Franklin Grammar of Greek

*%*
Entered according to Act of Congress,
in the year 1830,
by
Benjamin Franklin Fisk,

in the Clerk's Office of the District
FISK'S
Court of the District of Massachusetts.
GREEK GRAMMAR.
The requisites in a Manual of Grammar, are simplicity and lucidness of

arrangement, condensation of thought, and accuracy of principle and expresThese requisites Mr. Fisk. appears to have attained in a considerable
degree in his Greek Grammar, of which we have expressed approbation by
introducing it into our School.
Forrest and Wyckoff, Principals of Collegiate School, New York City.
New York, October 3d, 1843.
sion.
I have used for several years Fisk's Greek Grammar, and I regard it among
the best, and perhaps the best, now used in our Schools. Pupils instructed in
encounter less difficulty than in others.
it,
New
E. H. Jenny, A. M., Principal of"

York, October, 1843.
New York
Institute."
I have examined Fisk's Greek Grammar, published by

Mr. R. S. Davis,
yourself.
To all who will take the trouble to examine it, its own intrinsic
merit will be its best recommendation. The Syntax I regard as decidedly
superior. The rules are peculiarly clear and comprehensive, thereby relieving
the student from a heavy tax upon his time and memory, to which he would
otherwise be subjected, and from which, perhaps, he is not equally free in the
use of any other work of the kind.
C. Tracy, Principal of Select English and Classical School.
New York
City, October 28th, 1843.
Recommendations fully concurring with
the above opinions,
have been received
from the following gentlemen, among many others, who have recently adopted
Grammar in preference to any other.
James N. McElligatt, Principal of the Mechanics' Society School, New York.
"
"
" All Saints Parochial School,
Wm. A. Taylor,
this
Moore and Fish,

Charles W. Feeks,
Washington King,
Jay Gre enough,
J.
A. Jones Sexton,
B. Kidder,
J.
From Benjamin
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
the
New England
Classical
School,
and English School,

"
"
"
u
"
Select School,
"
"
"
"
"
Greenleaf, Esq., author of the National Arithmetic,
etc.
For several
Bradford, (Mass.,) Teacher's Seminary, October 16th, 1843.
years past, I have used Fisk's Greek Grammar in my seminary. I consider it
and perare
clear
a work of superior merit. It is well arranged ; and the rules
spicuous. It is, in my opinion, better adapted to initiate pupils into the idiom
of the Greek language, than any other treatise of the kind, that I have examined. Fisk's Greek Exercises should be used in connexion with the
Grammar. A work of this kind has long been needed. It is a production of
Yours respectfully, Benjamin Greenleaf.
great merit.
Fisk's Greek Grammar is used in Harvard University, and in many
other Collegiate and Academic Institutions, in various parts of the United States.
O*
PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION.
Perhaps no elementary work has so long and so justlybeen the subject of complaint, as the grammars employed
purpose of introducing beginners into a knowledge of
for the
the Greek language.
Those most esteemed for copiousness

fail either by the omission of
and methodical arrangement,
much
important matter, or by the incommodious disposition
and defective exemplification of what they contain.
With the hope of remedying these
faults the following
vork was undertaken, the extreme difficulty of which the
compiler was by no means aware of; but he soon discovered

without
that,
writers
of the
acquaintance
familiar
with
the
Greek language, and whatever
principal
has been
published to elucidate them, no one could be qualified to
compose a
full, clear,
and accurate system of
its
grammar,
wherein the rules and observations should be properly exemplified,
and
importance attached to them
their respective
and accordingly, with a labor to be appreciated by those

only
who
are conversant with such studies (to say nothing
of extraneous
impediments of no ordinary character), he
collected and perused every

afford
any thing of service
work which seemed
In particular he read over

authors,
Homer
besides
likely to
to his undertaking.
all
the
more popular Greek
most of them many times, especially those from

to
Demosthenes,
as also their different
commentators,
having constant recourse to the invaluable lexicons
and indexes of single authors by
Damm,
Seberus, Schweig-
PREFACE.
IV
haeuser, Sturze,
He
others.
Sanxay, Beck, Reiske, and
Schleusner,
also availed himself of the labors of Vigerus,
Hoogeveen, Bos, Fischer, Matthias,

other grammarians
Buttmann, and
public, with the
the
before
the
principal
general lexicons, from the smallest up to the voluminous one
of Stephanus.
In perusing these works,
of which were
all
constantly before him, he copied whatever might be of use
any part of the grammar, and thus accumulated a mass
in
which he was enabled
of materials, from
to
deduce the
general principles of the language, with the particular observations and exceptions, and to illustrate
tion
them by a
selec-
from a large number of the most pertinent examples that

found
are to
be
would
observe, without
in
Greek
the
all
further
writers.
And
here he
acknowledgment, that
he
has borrowed from other grammarians whatever answered his

purpose, retaining their language wherever greater clearness
would not be produced by an
The
parts
alteration of
it.
preceding the Syntax required
than most of the others
bestowed on these, and
less attention
much pains have been

hoped that many deficiencies
nevertheless
it
is
have been supplied, and that the whole has been considerably simplified.
The modern
division
declensions
was adopted, because
venient, and
had
later
grammarians
many, and
as a
in
;
its
favor the suffrages of nearly
but as the ancient division
knowledge of
those writings in which

is
of nouns into three
appeared most con-
it
it is
it
is
is
necessary
exclusively referred
subjoined in a smaller character.
It
the
all
preferred
in
by
perusing
to, this also
was discovered
that
when baryton verbs are divided into four conjugations, the

rules concerning them are far less complex than when they
are
reduced to one.
The
tenses
universally
called
the
perfect and pluperfect middle, until they were lately transferred
by the German grammarians
to the active voice,
under
PREFACE.
denomination of the second perfect and second plu-
the
perfect, are here retained in the
middle voice
advantage of a more philosophical
be incontestably
seemed not
so,
because the
classification,
even
if it
in this case a sufficient rea-
son for disturbing the nomenclature so generally recognised
by
philologists,
and
symmetry which has
for destroying the
The
hitherto existed in the three voices.
List of Defective
Verbs, with some slight modifications from Matthiae, Busby,
and others, was derived from Fischer, by
whom
unques-
tionable authorities are given for the use of the tenses here
inserted.
But the chief cause of the complaints made by teachers

and learners has always existed
was, in
all
which he
wholly
it
object of the compiler,
flatters
His design was, by
failed.
to the student at
any stage of
complete as possible,
as
his researches, the great
in the attainment of
Syntax, and to pre-
in the
Greek student with one
sent the
himself that he has not
its
copiousness, to adapt
his studies,
here, as also elsewhere, the parts
to
first
and accordingly
be
learned
printed in the largest character, and those last of

smallest.
learner,
The
rules
and observations,
generally in
comprising so
still
the
much
have been too long
inconvenience
the
and those
with the Latin,
frequent use, and after
is
to
to
be cited on
obviated,
either
is
rule into several
be taken which
difficult
is
by
of most
the exemplification subjoining
Moreover the use of
studiously avoided,
is
only in the principal part as
remainder, or by dividing the
which that only
common
in
words of Adam's Latin Grammar; but
the
where they would

every occasion,
in
all
the ease of the
are expressed as concisely as possible,
which the Greek language has
ble.
for
are
the
parts,
of
immediately applica-
was
was sometimes
or abstract terms
although in 50 doing
it
necessary to employ others hardly so precise or expressive.
PREFACE.
VI
The Prosody
most
attention,
and,
The
made.
is
and
as full
demanded
the Syntax
labor and reflection
satisfactory as the
importance will admit of
relative
its
to
much
the result of
believed,
is
it
allowable to
which next
also,
is
prosodists from
whom
it
being
was drawn are Maltby,
Leeds, and others of the highest authority, and from
be ascertained,
limits
its
may
it
almost every case, whether the doubtful
in
vowel of any word be long by the usage of the poets.
It is
presented in the form which seemed most convenient for

reference
to
and that every proper
facility
might be afforded
the younger student, derivatives and compounds, partic-
from
ularly
obvious
less
primitives,
nearly
all
treatises
Accents
and they
on
those delivered
by the
have been
earlier
subject in
little
The
larger
many
As
passages in need-
which often require the aid of adscititious

alone would have rendered the
their presence
sense perfectly clear and obvious,
Greek
much
further simplification.
the omission of these marks involves
where
be found to comprise
will
this
grammarians, but which later ones
and which perhaps admit of
light,
for
scarcely any loss, greatly to condense,
able, with
less obscurities,
given,
occasion.
little
have been taken with the
Considerable pains likewise

rules for the
often
are
may have
which the more advanced student
will hereafter
Dialects
it
it is
to be
hoped
that
no
be printed without them.
was thought advisable
to
take from the
Gloucester Greek Grammar, in consequence of the great
and unexpected
difficulties
of the more important parts.

corrected, however,
in
many
experienced in the
They have been
execution
altered
and
places, and the accents inserted
throughout.
The
compiler cannot
returning his thanks
him
in
dismiss
to those
his
performance, without
gentlemen
who
so kindly aided
procuring the books necessary to be consulted
and he
PREFACE.
regrets that
its
appearance should convey so inadequate an
idea of the labor bestowed

casual
or
ficial
VU
upon
reader, that
it
particularly to the super-
it,
would hardly protect him
against the charge of ostentation, should

detail the obligations laid
upon him.
he acknowledge
He
in
must, however, be
permitted to express his gratitude for the use he was allowed

to
make
of the literary treasures of Harvard University, from
the Librarian of which he experienced every kindness consistent
It
with the duties of his important charge.
has long been the opinion of the compiler, and one
which he
pretty generally to
finds
among
prevail
others,
that a considerable portion of the time usually allotted to the
study of Greek, might be employed to
much
greater advan-
tage in the writing of exercises in this language

exercises, indeed, as
have been drawn up
Neilson and Huntingford, which, from the

present,
but such
fail
as,
altogether of the end they
by the
not such
difficulties
rules of construction to those
transition
more
they
were designed
simplicity and pertinency of the
be written, by the gradual
ples to
purpose by
for xhis
for
exam-
from the easiest
difficult,
and, above
all,
by their not presupposing a knowledge of what has not

already been learned, shall render the progress of the student
more
rapid, than
ume he
terials
in
is
any method hitherto devised.
endeavoring to prepare
Such a
and, as most of the
necessary had previously been collected,
it
is
vol-
ma-
already
such a state of forwardness, that, should no unforeseen ob-
stacle prevent,
it
will
appear not long
of this Grammar.
Waltliam, Massachusetts, June, 1830.
after
the publication
PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION.
The
compiler of this Grammar, by a maturer consideration
of the subject, and by the suggestions of several respectable

teachers, has
been enabled
Second Edition
in the
make
to
various improvements, which he natters himself will be found
considerably to enhance
To
its
value.
render the inflection of words more easy to the under-
standing of the pupil,

adjectives
have been
new
declensions of substantives and
inserted,
and examples
for the exercise
of the learner subjoined to each declension
have been made
in
transpositions
the declensions of adjectives, by which
they have been better arranged
the four conjugations of
baryton verbs have been exhibited at length, through

voices,
all
and the contract verbs have been conjugated
form better adapted for use
the
in
complete synopses of the modes
and tenses have been given, of the four conjugations of baryton verbs, and of the three forms of contract verbs, and the
synopses of the verbs
posed
in
have been more conveniently
and numerous other additions and
simplifications
dis-
have
been interspersed throughout the whole.
The
penultimate quantity of polysyllables has been indi-
cated by the usual signs, wherever
it
might otherwise have
been doubtful, that the beginner may be enabled

each word
sion to
its
proper accent from the
pronounce
tance, that
it.
first
to give
time he has occa-
This was deemed of so much impor-
whenever the marks of quantity would have been
excluded by the Greek accents, the
latter
have been
sacri-
PREFACE.
ficed without hesitation
as
IX
we have no
regard to them in
our pronunciation of the language, but observe the same

rules that
we do
tives
in
except
in
as
it
,
Of
be long or short, but the penultima
when
of polysyllables only
antepenultima.
which we accent the penultima
in Latin, in
of dissyllables, whether
is
it
long,
and when
liquid following, as
on the antepenultima
The
short, the
have the accent on the penultima,
writers not Attic
and the words which have a
short vowel in the penultima, rendered
and
it is
the polysyllables not marked, compara-
common by
mute
p. 48., are to be accented
in prose.
Exercises promised in the Preface to the
first
edition
have been duly published, and the compiler has the assurance of experienced teachers, that they fully answer the purpose for which they were intended.
the
Grammar be
first
committed
of easy Greek be next read, they

the greatest profit.
to
It
is
believed that,
memory, and a
may
then be written with
Although the Notes appended
Exercises refer to the pages of the
first
if
portion
edition of the
to the
Gram-
mar, which do not correspond with those of the second, yet,
by means of the Table
at the
end of
be used alike with both editions.

Waltham, Massachusetts, October,
1S31.
this
volume, they
may
CONTENTS
Page
Letters
Breathings
Accents
Marks of Reading
Change of Final Syllables on the Meeting of two Words..
Farts of Speech
Article
.
Noun
Gender
Declension
First Declension
Second Declension
Third Declension
Gender
Genitive
Accusative
Vocative
Dative Plural
Contracts
[The Ten Declensions]
Derivative Nouns
Irregular
Nouns
I.
II.
I.
II.
Nouns
Redundant Nouns
Defective
Patronymics
Diminutives
IV. Verbals
6
7
7
8
9
12
14
15
16
20
21
21
39
49
50
Irregular Adjectives
Comparison of Adjectives
Irregular Comparison
51
Cardinal Numbers
Ordinal and other Derivative Numbers
Methods of representing Numbers
Verb
34
35
36
37
38
38
Adjectives
Pronouns
22
2G
III. Amplificatives
Numerals
53
54
55
56
Modes
58
60
Tenses
61
CONTENTS.
XI
Fage
Conjugation
62
63
63
Characteristics
Active Voice
Augment
Augment
71
74
Deponent Verbs
75
80
89
92
95
97
98
103
113
125
138
of Compound Verbs
Formation of the Tenses in the Active Voice
Passive Voice
Formation of the Tenses in the Passive Voice
Middle Voice
Formation of the Tenses in the Middle Voice
Contract Verbs
Verbs in
Irregular Verbs in
Defective Verbs
Impersonal Verbs
139
139
141
Particles
Adverbs
Comparison of Adverbs
Prepositions
142
Conjunctions
142
SYNTAX
143
Concord
Agreement of one Substantive with another
an Adjective with a Substantive
a Verb with a Nominative
Accusative before the Infinitive
The same Case after

The Construction of
a Verb as before it
Relatives
or Relative, with Substantives coupled by a Conjunction
Use of the Article
as a Pronoun
1
143
143
144
146
147
149
150
Agreement of an Adjective, Verb,
The
Government
Government of Substantives
Adjectives taken as Substantives
Government of Adjectives
Adjectives governing the Genitive
Adjectives governing the Dative
Government of Verbs
Verbs governing the Genitive
the Dative
the Accusative
the Dative and Genitive
the Accusative and Genitive
the Accusative and Dative
two Accusatives
The Government of Verbs having a Causative Signification
The Construction of Passive Verbs
Impersonal Verbs
-.
>
the Infinitive
Participles
Verbals in
152
153
155
156
156
157
158
158
161
162
162
166
169
170
170
171
172
173
173
174
175
177
180
CONTENTS.
XII
Page
The Construction
of Circumstances
Price
1 81
181
181
Crime and Punishment

Matter, and Part taken hold of.
182
182
182
183
183
184
184
187
190
Cause, Manner and Instrument

Measure and Distance
Place
Time
Part and Circumstance referred to
of Adverbs
The Construction
Conjunctions
Prepositions
Grammatical Figures
203
PROSODY
Quantity
Syllables long by Nature
by Position
The Doubtful Vowels in the First and Middle Syllables
1.
Before Vowels and Diphthongs

Before Single Consonants
Doubtful Vowels in Final Syllables
Quantity of Derivative and Compound
Derivatives
2.
Compounds
1.
2.
The
The
207
209
214
Words
Verse
Scanning
Different kinds of Verse
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
Hexameter
Pentameter
Iambic
Trochaic
Anapestic
Anacreontic
Sapphic and Adonian
216
216
217
217
217
218
218
219
219
220
220
221
226
Accents
Enclitics
228
228
236
242
249
252
255
257
258
Dialects
Attic Dialect
Ionic Dialect
Doric Dialect
iEolic Dialect
Bceotic Dialect
Dialects of the Pronouns
Dialects of the Article
Dialects of the Verb Substantive
DlGAMMA
Abbreviations
206
206
206
207
259
260
GREEK GRAMMAR.
LETTERS.
The Greek Language

twenty-four
Power.
alpha
beta
gamma
&
written by means of
Name.
Figure.
is
letters.
a
b
delta
g
d
epsilon
zeta
eta
theta
th
iota
kappa
lambda
mu
nu
*-
f
7
omicron
Pi
?
7J
xi
rho
sigma
tau
upsilon
phi
chi
ph
ch
psi
ps
omega
LETTERS.
The different characters for the same sound are used indiscriminately,
with the exception of
and , of which the former is used only at the beginning and in the middle of words, and the latter only at the end. By
some modern editors, however, is used at the end of syllables, when
they form an entire word, with which another is compounded as,
Also in a word where the last vowel is cut off, a is retained bey
fore the apostrophe; as,
before y, , ,
is pronounced like ng in angle ; as,
anggelos ;
.
,
, , ,,
.
'
,,
Angchises.
When
Greek words
sented by
by
or
are written in Latin,

and are generally repreand y ; as,
cycnus. The Latin
is expressed in Greek
and sometimes by alone ; as,
or
Servius ;
Severus.
old Greek alphabet consisted of sixteen letters only,
which were sufficient to express all the sounds of the
Greek language. The remaining eight were afterwards added, for tbe
sake of convenience rather than from necessity.
Tne
The
letters
divided into seven vowels and
are
seventeen consonants.
The vowels are ,
short
,,
long
and a,
doubtful.
The doubtful vowels are long in some syllables,

short in others, and either long or short in others.
-,
There
, , ov
The
ancient Greeks used
for J,
for
for
and
are twelve diphthongs
u,
and
for
HEPOJO for
or
as,
JEMETPOS
six proper,
six improper, a,
rj,
q>,
r\v,
av,
torr
hence these vowels are

All diphthongs end with
called subjunctive, and the others prepositive.
is not sounded,
.The iota subscript, in the diphthongs , r\,
It was
but serves only to indicate the derivation of the word.
anciently written in the line, and in capital letters this is still
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
practised
is
times by
TSII
ai, as,
long, as,
as
e
as,
%arjf,
commonly represented
The
,\, Medea ;
in Latin byte, as,

by i long, as,
by
oe,
as,
'}
or ady.
Phcedrus, someNilus, sometimes by

by u long,
Baotia ; and
Musa.
consonants are divided into mutes, semivoivels,
and double consonants.
The mutes
are nine
Three smooth,
Three middle,
Three aspirate,
, ,
, ,
, ,
&.
BREATHINGS.
Each smooth mute has its corresponding middle

and aspirate, into each of which it is frequently
for its middle, and
changed thus,
has
for
;
aspirate.
its
,
&, , &
, .
When two mutes come together, the former must be of the

same breathing with the latter a smooth must stand before a
smooth, a middle before a middle, and an aspirate before an
;
aspirate
J-unqcib,
not
thus,
when
cept
same
the
not
The
aspirate
,.
poets often drop the final vowel of the preposition

the
into
before
into
before /, and into
,
for
those letters respectively
as,
The semivowels
, ,
for
, , , , ,
are nve,
before
for
the four
of which are also called liquids.
first
changed into before 7, ,

before , ,
into
and into , , and , before those letters respectively
is
ex-
', and change
, ,
,,
for
would be doubled, and therefore,
'
as,
for
The
),
for
for
double consonants are three
for
for
for
,,
, ,.
,,
These double letters are universally used instead of their
corresponding simple ones ; as,

for
from
for
from
except where the two simple letters
belong to two different parts of a compound
as,
not
,
.
BREATHINGS.
There are two breathings, the smooth or soft ('),
and the rough or aspirate ( ), one of which is
placed over every vowel or diphthong beginning a
c
word.
The
rate
aspirate breathing has the force of the English h aspi-
as,
Jiistoria
"
Homeros.
The smooth
is
MARKS OF READING.
ACCENTS.
,
,.
we begin
used where, in modern languages,

ego
with a vowel
omos.
as,
", .
In diphthongs the breathing is placed over the second vowel

except when it is silent ; as,
as,
and
rate
as,
. -
beginning of a word have always the aspiWhen is doubled, the former has the
q at the
as,
smooth, and the latter the aspirate
The ancient mark for the aspirate was H, as in Latin ; thus,
This was afterwards divided, and d used
TON was written for
as the soft, and l as the aspirate. These were next altered to -* and *<
and finally rounded into their present form, ' and r
;
The
who
avoided the aspirate, used another sound, similar to

a or a w, to prevent the hiatus occasioned by the meeting of vowels in
this was called the digamma, because its figure redifferent syllables
sembled two gammas, one above the other, thus,
or f.
Thus ftoniqa
for
for
for
Hence the Latin
iEolians,
,/
',
vispera, ovum, video,
&c.
.F
ACCENTS.
There
three
are
accents,
the
acute
'
),
the
and the circumflex (" ).

The acute stands over one of the three
grave, (
),
only
word
last syl-
the grave over the last syllable

and the circumflex over one of the two last.
lables of a
;
The circumflex stands only over long vowels and

diphthongs the acute and the grave, also over short
vowels.
Words accented on the last syllable are called oxytons or
;
acutitons ; those not accented on the last syllable, barytons or

gravltons.
MARKS OF READING.
The Greek comma
same
as the English
and period ( ) are the

), which is not
.
the colon (
distinguished from the semicolon,
;
is a point at the
top of the line
and the note of interrogation ( ; ) is
the English semicolon.
;
The
diastole or hypodiastole
distinguish certain
the same letters
from
that.
is
a comma, used to
words from others consisting of

as,
o,rt,
which, to distinguish
it
;;
CHANGE OF FINAL SYLLABLES.
'
The
as,
apostrophe denotes that a vowel

for
The
diceresis is
pronounced
is
cut off;
placed over the latter of two

vowels, to show that they do not form a diphthong
as,
o-is.
CHANGE OF FINAL SYLLABLES ON THE MEETING OF
TWO WORDS.
The Greeks have three methods of preventing the meeting

of vowels in different words by cutting off the last vowel of
the former word, by adding a consonant to it, and by drawing
;
the two words into one.

1
off
The final vowel of some words is often cut

when the next word begins with a vowel, and
the omission denoted by an apostrophe

for
before an aspirate vowel,
responding aspirate
as,
If a
it is
as,
smooth mute be left

changed into its cor-
ov for
ov.
vowels thus cut off are , ,

and the diphthongs at
but
never, and datives of the third deand
clension seldom lose their final vowel.
The Attics and Dorians sometimes cut off these vowels and
diphthongs at the beginning of words as,
for
The
and
o,
t>,
"-
&.
,
.
,
,
,
,
,
;. ,, ,
2.
is added to the dative plural in at, and to
verbs of the third person in
and l, when the next
word begins with a vowel ; as,
for
naoi
Also
to
\),
, and .
In like manner
take
and
before a
vowel ; as,
becomes
before a smooth vowel,
and
before an aspirate.
is often added before a consonant in verse
dk
as,
3.
When a word ending with a vowel or diphthong precedes another beginning with a vowel or
diphthong, they are sometimes drawn into one
^
,
,
, ,,
PARTS OF SPEECH.
as,
&
for
for
for
for
olda,
for
for
for
for
for
Some of the most learned critics omit t, when in the former

of the two words thus drawn together, and subscribe it when
in the latter, as in the examples above ; but others subscribe
', as well as
it in both cases, writing
/,
PARTS OF SPEECH.
The
parts of speech
pronoun,
noun,
article,
Greek
in
are
eight,
participle,
verb,
viz.
adverb,
and conjunction; the interjection being

reckoned as an adverb by the Greek grammarians.
The article, noun, pronoun, and participle, are
declined with gender, number, and case.
There are three genders, masculine, feminine, and
preposition,
neuter.
There are three numbers
the singular, which
speaks of one ; the plural, which speaks of more

than one ; and the dual, which speaks of two, or a
pair.
The dual is not used in the lEioYic dialect any more than in the Latin,
it ; nor is it found in the New Testament, in the
Septuagint, or in the Fathers. It is used most frequently by the Attics,
who, however, often employ the plural instead of it.
which was derived from
There are five cases, nominative,

and vocative.
genitive, dative,
accusative,
ARTICLE.
The
article
<5,
the in English.
English indefinite
no
article a
a man, or man in general

declined
&&
, generally answers
When
article
is
is signified.
and
to the definite article
expressed in Greek, the
Thus
the
man.
means
It is thus
NOUN.
Dual.
F.
Singular.
F.
.
,
,
, \,
,
,
,
. ^, ",
G.
D.
Plural.
F.
.
., , ,
,,
,
,,
,,. . ,
, ?, .
.., , ,
G.
G. D.
D.
is an adverb.
article for the vocative, for
or
annexed to it has the signification of a demonwith
The declension remains the same ; as,
strative pronoun.
There
is
no form of the
, ^, ,
The
,,,
article
&c.
NOUN.
GENDER.
To
indicate the gender of the noun, use is made of the arfor the feminine, and
for the masculine,
for the
neuter.
The gender of nouns is determined partly by their signifiticle
cation,
and partly by
,,.
their termination
the following are the
rules concerning the former; those concerning the latter will
be given with each declension.

The names of male persons or animals, of months, and
I.
as,
rivers, are masculine
Exc. The gender of some names of rivers depends on the
the river Lethe.
termination ; as,
II. The names of female persons or animals, of trees, countries, islands, and towns, are feminine ; as,
;
,
,
,
,
,,
,
,, ,,
?,
,
,
& . ", ,
&,
'
Exc.
Diminutives in
1.
are neuter
from
as,
wife.
Exc.
Some names
2.
wild fig-tree
of trees are masculine

cork-tree
Some
are masculine or feminine
cherry-tree
as,
papyrus
wild olive-tree.
Exc. 3. Several names of towns are masculine ; as,
&c. Others are either masculine or feminine
&
Many names
6,
as,
cytisus.
lote-tree;
III.
when
".
,
Nouns used
and
is
as masculine
spoken
of,
when
are
as,
the male, and feminine
common
horse or mare.
',
neuter.
of islands and cities are of both genders
the female
ox or cow ;
is
as,
and
NOUN.
In most names of animals one gender
Obs.
,/,
sexes, called the epicene gender
as,
is
used
for
wolf,
both
and
whether masculine or feminine.
DECLENSION.
There are three declensions of nouns, corresponding to the three
declensions in Latin.
first
GENERAL RULES OF DECLENSION.
The
same
and vocative are mostly the

and always in the dual and
nominative
in the singular,
plural.
The dative singular always ends in t, either in

the line, as in the third declension, or subscribed, as
in the first and second.
The
The
genitive plural always ends in
nominative, accusative, and vocative of neuters are alike, and in the plural end in a.
The dual has but two terminations, one for the
nominative, accusative, and vocative, and the other
for the genitive
and dative.
View of the Three Declensions.

I.
Decl.
II.
Decl.
III.
Dec!.
Singular.
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
a
as
mmm
Neut. ov
f
\
?-
av a
ov
it
Neut. like the
Neut. ov
Dual.
N. A. V.
G. D.
a
aiv
otv
|
Plural.
N.
G.
at
Neut. a
Neut.
at
Neut. a
Neut. a
Neut. H
Neut. &
X.
D.
A.
V.
Nom.
FIRST DECLENSION.
FIRST DECLENSION.
the first declension end in
masculine.
Nouns of
,,
. -,
Singular.
-,
. -,
-,
G.
D.
-r,,
V.
a
of a ^
to a
,
,
,
,
feminine
Nouns
. -,
-,
-,
. -,
. -,
G.
D.
G.
D.
V.
V.
-,
,
,
,
,
Plural.
-,
-*,
genitive in
contest.
tongue.
thirst.
viper.
sea
a pure, and
-,
tempest.
bee.
root.
table.
outer garment.
-,
-,
-,
. -,
-.
friendship.
. . V. /-,
G.
D.
G. D.
some proper
make
the
thus,
Dual.
N.
,
&,
,
,
&,
/*,
,
,
contracted, with
the dative in a
Sing.
V.
of (
-atc, to
In like manner decline
,
, and
in
in
muse.
Dual.
two
of two
to two
|
two
1
two
,, , &, , ,
names, as
and
-.
.
G.
D.
Plur.
-/',
/-,
V.
-.
market,
field,
bridge,
day.
door.
sword, knife,
share,
sphere.
/,
&,
,
,
,
^/,
,
.
cauê.
truth.
gift
olive-tree.
hearth.
dove.
shadow.
porch.
Obs. 1.
vowel is called pure, when it immediately follows
a vowel or diphthong, with which it is not mixed or united in
sound.
Obs. 2. The ancient Latins followed this manner of making the genitives
in as; as, terras, escas, Latonas, for terra, esca, Latona. Paterfamilias
continued always in use.
NOUN.
10
,
Sing.
. -,
G.
D.
A.
V.
honor.
Dual.
-,
-,
-.
. . V. -,
-rf,
G. D.
,
,
,
,
,
,
Plur.
-,
-,
-^
-,
.
G.
D.
-.
,
,
,
A.
V.
-al.

axe.
,
,
virtue.
pleasure.
girl.
village.
grief.
cloud.
victory.
bride.
pain.
gate.
voice.
a steward.
Dual.
Sing.
. -,
-,
-,
. -,
-.
N. A. V.
G.
D.
G. D.
-,
-,
Plur.
/-,
-,
G.
D.
-.
. ^-^,
-.
,
,
,
&-,
,
&, & ,
,
, -, ,
,
,
, ,,
V.
V.
Some nouns
JElneas.
youth,
cockle.
fowler.
make
in
the genitive in
keep a exclusively,
as,
-,
-,
. -,
-.
G.
D.
V.
Satan;
g'enitives in
a were the
publican.
. . V.
G. D.
-,
-,
-,
-. . -,
-,
-.
.
Plur.
G.
D.
V.
prater.
Thomas;
gen.
Dual.
-rf,
as,
Some
parricide.
gen.
Sing.
Pythagoras
^^,
These
north wind;
gen.
father.
Doric form.
gen.
as well as
and
and
gen.
gen.
Atrides.
FIRST DECLENSION.
11
,
,
,
,
,
,,
,, .
,
&,
&,,
,
,
,, ,
,
,
,
All nouns in
nouns
poetical
compounds of
, and
a*
in
prophet;
Scythian;
as,
shameless;
geometrician.
But
Also
make .
and
as,
,
,
,
&>
seller
Nouns
robber.
Words
make
in
or
'
,
,
,
,
, ,,
for Practice.
of bread.
citizen.
master.
artist.
archer.
thief.
,
,
.
national names in
make the vocative
in
judge.
disciple.
lover.
Persian.
Orestes.
warrior.
'
poet.
The iEolians and Macedonians adopted the termination

even in the nominative of these nouns ; thus,
for
horseman;
for
cloud-gathering.
Hence in Latin cometa, planeta, poeta, from
Contracts of the First Declension.
Some nouns of the first declension are contracted, by dropping the vowels preceding the terminations , ,
except
not preceded by a vowel or , which is contracted into
thus,
uvaa,
mina.
a,
Sing.
. -,
a, wool.
Sing.
,,
,
.-, ,
,
earth.
Sing.
weasel.
Sing.
. -, , . -, ,
,
-,
, -, ,
-,
,
-,
-, , D ' >
-,
. -, , . -, ,
. -, ,
-,
,
- -, &c -, ,&. -,
a,
G.
D.
,-,
V.
ff,
~,
G.
D.
V.
simplicity.
Sing.
-orj,
G.
D.
,-, ,,.
"-,
&,C.
-, ,
. -, ,
V -, ,
G.
D.
G.
G.
D.
a,
&C.
a,
V. y
V.
, Mercury.
, .
G.
,
Sing.
-,
-,
. -, ,
-,
V.
f,
&C.
-,
TJ,&C.
Sing.
'
-],
,
,
. "-,,,
D.
V.
, &c.
12
NOUN.
SECOND DECLENSION.
, generally mascu-
Nouns of
line,
the second declension end in

but sometimes feminine, and ov neuter.
Sing.
Dual.
-,
-,
-,
. -,
-.
.
word, speech.
. . V.
G.
D.
-,
-,
. -,
G.
-w,
G. D.
D.
6-.
V.
,
,
wind.
,
,
silver.
beam.
continent.
gar den.
06s. In a few instances, the
common
,
,
-,
-,
. -,
-'.
N. A. V.
-cp,
,
,
,
G. D.
as,
iron.
5eecA.
&
whence
wood.
Plur.
-,
-.
V.
,
,
way.
house.
dialect, like the Attic,
Dual.
Sing.
island.
makes the vocative like the nominative

the Latin
heus tu.
Deus ; and
G.
D.
-.
V.
,
,
.
Plur.
-,
,
,
,
,
.
. -,
G.
D.
A.
V.
-,
,
-,
-.

silver.
book.
tree.
animal.
measure.
apple.
sandal, shoe,
sheep,
rose.
fig-
Contracts of the Second Declension.
Some nouns
changing
of the second declension are contracted, by

and
oa, into , and dropping
and
so, oo, into ov,
before a long vowel or diphthong.
SECOND DECLENSION.
-, >,
-,
,
-,
,
. -^ ,
-, .
Sing.
N. A. V.
D.
G. D.
V.
,
-, ,
V.
y-'3e,
,
So
its
N. A. V.
G. D.
ovv J
-,
N.
-,
-6 ,
we
a.
Plur.
-,
-,
olv.
ol,
G.
D.
-, ,
-,
,
.
, &, , ,
,
, , ., ,
as, evVoa,
V.
V.
compounds
uncontracted
or,
basket, dish.
down ;
voyage ; 6
compounds. But the neuter plural
6
olv.
Dual.
-ea,
G.
D.
understanding.
y-oos,
'-,
-, ,,
-,
. -, ,
-,
,
,
Sing.
. -,
Plur.
N.
-,
G.
D.
bone.
Dual.
G.
13
^-(54,
Also
&,c.
skin
in a of
stream;
with their
compounds remains
Even in the geni-
than
rather say
&.c.
be referred, difthe contracted of this form may
and (with more
fering in the dative only, which ends in
as, 6 Jwvvg,
propriety than to the triptots) diminutives in
tive
,.
To
-,
-,
-,
. -,
-.
.
Sing.
G.
D.
-,
Sing.
4-,
G.
D. Jiov -,
. 4-,
V.
V. Jiov-v.
Attic Form.
In some nouns of the second declension the Attics change
the last vowel or diphthong into
subscribing , and making
the vocative like the nominative ; as,
hare, for
,.
If the vowel preceding

people ;
for
as,
,
be
long,
,,
it
is
changed
9
hall.
into
14
NOUN.
<5
Si " g
-,
-,
JN.
G.
D.
V.
temple.
Dual.
. . V.
-,
-.
',
,
,
Plur.
. -,
*-,
-.
,
,
G. D.
-,
-,
G.
D.
^-^,
^-.
V.

brother' 5 wife.
cable.
Mcnelaus,
peacock.
hall.
-,
-,
-,
. -,
Sing.
Dual.
-;
G.
-.
G. D.
'^-'.
V.
-,
. . V.
G.
D.
Plur.
. /-,
^^-?,
-,
^^-.
D.
.
V.
,
,
,
In like manner decline the neuter adjectives

)
Obs.
1.
propitious.
fertile.
There
one neuter
is
in
debt.
Obs. 2.
The
the nominative
,
Obs.
3.
The
viz.
,-.
, "&.
Attics frequently omit
as,
So
in the accusative
Sometimes
as,
in
for
Attics often decline after this

to the third declension
which otherwise belong
form,
;
words
as,
for
from
and the
which belong to the second,
later Greeks decline words in
according to the third declension ; as,
for
from
from
for
Nouns
THIRD DECLENSION.
end in , , , , , , , , ,
V.
Sing.
-,
-,
~.
in the genitive.
-,
. -,
G.
D.
of the third declension
and increase
savior.
Dual.
. . V. -\,
G. D.
-.
.
G.
D.
V.
Plur.
-\,
-,
-,
-,
-?.
15
THIRD DECLENSION.
-,
-,
-,
-,
-.
.
G.
D.
A.
V.
body.
-,
-,
-,
-. . -,
-,
-.
Dual.
Sing.
. . V.
Plur.
G.
D.
G. D.
V.
6 rtcaav, pcBan.
Sing.
A.
V.
-,
. . V.
-,
-,
G.
D.
-,
-,
-,
. -,
-.
Dual.
-,
-,
N.
Plur.
G.
D.
,
G. D.
-.
Ttai-avotv.
V.
storm.
-,
-,
. . -,
-,
-,
-.
-,
. -,
-.
-.
&,
Dual.
Sing.
\.<-
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
Plur.
G.
D.
G. D.
V.
V.
jackdll.
Dual.
Sing.
#- ?
N.
&,
G.
D.
. . V.
&-,
&-,
A. #-,
V. <&-.
Words
Plur.
. &-,
G. - -,
D. -&-,
. 3~-,
&-.
G. D.
V.
&-.
the third declension are given with

the examples of the different formations of the genitive.
for practice in
GENDER.
Nouns of the
third declension admit of no general rule for the determination of their gender ; but that of a large proportion of them may be known
by the following rules for some of the principal endings, in which those
nouns, whose gender is determinable from their signification, are not noticed.
1.
,,,
Nouns
in
girdle
-,
tendon
Except
*? faie
'
and
those
tooth
,
>
light.
as, 6
intellect;
>
which have
, , -, and harbor
, ,masculine
amphora
-,
-,
-,/,
,-,
in the genitive, are
air, mist
laughter ; 6
thong.
goose;
belli/;
with the neuter contracts in
16
NOUN.
Nouns
,
&,
2.
-, ,
in
are feminine
in
and
as,
,
,
-,
,
-
-,
with nouns of quality
-6, modesty
persuasion ; ]
ness.
Except some adjectives

and the following nouns
adder;
bug;
of the
in
grace ;
r)
sweet-
torch
common
gender,
, ,, ,
, ,,
, , , - -, ,
, ,,
, -, , ,
-,
\,
,,
-,
,,, ,
and
Nouns
3.
&1, bank,
honey;
),
liver;
weevil;
and
body ;
water ;
neuter ; as,
city;
breast;
miracle;
wall;
shore,
, , ,
-, are
in
contracts in
Except
serpent
a certain measure ;
dolphin; ,
bird;
lion;
tiger
in
cup
with
heart.
starling; 6,
lymph;
ulcer;
and or
head.
are no other neuter substantives of this declension,
light ;
ear ; and
fire ;
stone;
There
except
dough.
in
therefore, are generally masculine, when they
the genitive in
feminine, when they make it in
and neuter, when they make it in
and
Those
make
GENITIVE.
The
genitive of the third declension always ends in

admits of a great variety of formations.
a
l
,,, , ,
,, ,
,
From
the vowels
body
thing
, and
,.
thought
mouth.
mustard ;
gum ;
pepper,
honey, the only substantive of this
form but there are several neuter adjectives,
which may be said, however, to derive their
genitive rather from the masculine termination
;
, ,, , ,
in
tear;
manner
knee,
and
. ,
,
,
&,
,,
these two sometimes take
mustard. In like
spear ; but
from the obsolete
and
city
Latona;
^,
echo.
fiock.
persuasion;
;;
17
THIRD DECLENSION.
From
ctvog
kV
the consonants
g,
, ,
,
,, ,
,
,,
pman
Titan.
having struck, neuter
which follow
parti-
their masculine.
,
,
,
,
,
, , ., ,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,,
ciples,
"
in
tender, neuters
,"
of adjectives
month
Greek;
Siren.
harbor;
shepherd;
tyQtyi intellect.
ray ;
dolphin;
nominative of these nouns
The
nose.
quently ends in
in
fre-
as,
greater, neuters of adjectives
ciples in
striking, neuters of parti-
and those endor

Phorcys, the name of a sea deity.
joining, neuter participles
of verbs in
ing in
wooden tower
or
as,
Plato
branch
poppy.
swallow;
,,
,,, ,
,,
,
cheek;
saw.
Xenophon. In like manner the present participles of contracted verbs
in
as,
tendon.
and
second
So the present,
aorist
first
lion
future,
active of participles, as,
striking.
,
,
, ,,
,,
going to strike, the second

}
future active of participles
also the present
of contracted verbs in
and
as,
ovv
honoring.
dragon
making.
neuter compounds of
from
as,
two-footed,
neuter participles.
2*
18
NOUN.
,
,
,
,, ., ,
-,
,
,
,
&,
&,
,
,
,,,, , ,
,
,
,,
,, ,
?\,
the
'
liver
bait
the well,
starling ;
nectar
wife,
wife,
VQ
S-,
makes
wild beast
girdle
shepherd
fate,
sky
mist
air,
brother-in-law.
breast;
witness
sword.
fire,
lymph;
thief;
prey,
Big
Nestor
&,
*>,
hand;
statue
black;
old age ;
torch
fugitive,
giant
wretched,
flesh.
dove
,&,
,, ,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
&,
,
,,
,
,
.
,,,, , ,,
,
,
&,
&,
.
a stone,
true, the neuter of adjectives
Ion.
Att.
king;
&
in
*?
louse.
thong,
ns
orator.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
^ ,,,,, ,,
^
horseman,
galley
mosthenes,
kettle
priest;
fisherman;
&,
De-
love
caldron,
clothing.
Parnes,
a mountain
of
Attica.
Clemens;
Valens, and other names borrowed from

the Latin,
honored, contracted from
city ;
Att.
serpent ;
seer
action.
power
,
,
,,
&,
,
,
&,
, , ,,
THIRD DECLENSION.
iS
&
--
hope
t$og
,
,,
Paris
19
spot.
bird;
a favor,
and
right.
So words
any.
cord.
which often
in
&, ,
,
,
,
&,
,,,
,
, ,,
,
,
& , &,
,
.
,,
,, ,, ,
,
, , ,,
end
dolphin.
in iv t as,
wall;
part ;
ciples.
,
,
fiower ;
mountain ;
having struck, neuter
parti-
fsh;
oak;
mouse;
lip.
pine,
sharp
sweet,
axe;
Att.
ell.
military robe
stranger.
helmet.
ciples of verbs in
or
shame
love
man
and contracted
parti-
from
as,
standing.
a red spot on the legs, occasioned
by being too near the fire, the only word of
this form.
<
jackall ;
hero ;
,
,
,
,
,,
,
,,
,
,
,,,
,
&,
Trojan.
having struck, and such
participles.
danos, meal, entertainment;

dough.
comb;
'
,,
one.
Simois, a river of Troas

Opus, a city of Greece ;
Likewise the participles, as,
,
, &,
&,
like
child.
old woman.
key.
comely.
from
Phorcys.
dawn.
laughter
,,
light
ciples
joining, and the like parti-
,,
having been struck.

ox or cow ;
skin.
foot.
;
;
,, ,, ,
20
NOUN.
,
,
.
,
,
,,, &,
,,,
, ,,
and participles of verbs

having given.
Opus, and other nouns con-
tooth
in
as,
'
,.
tracted from
&
ear, is contracted
from
sea.
the
name
earth-worm,
of a city.
belly-worm
happy.
,,
,
&,,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,,
,
,,
, , ,
", ",
, ,
,,,
,, ,
grasshopper
quail;
trumpet;
phalanx,
breastplate
raven
flame;
cup ;
changing
king;
cough ;
into
ant
fox.
night.
nail,
claw ;
rank.
visage;
ecu//,
storm;
Cyclops,
Arab
vein
steel.
Cinyps, a river of Africa
stair.
, , ,,
^,
,
,
, , ,,
Obs. Some nouns form their genitive from an obsolete

nominative ; as,
from
milk;
from
woman ;
from
water;
from
from
filth;
and
from
Jupiter.
\,
,,
ACCUSATIVE.
The accusative singular of masculine and feminine nouns

generally ends in a as,
Titan.
Exc. 1. Nouns in
having
pure in the genitive, change
of the nominative into
as,
bunch of grapes
stone,
makes
, ,,,,, ,
., ,
,,,
,, , ,.
,
But
ship.
Also
Jupiter,
makes
4 la, and
skin, commonly
frequently use the regular termination in a, as
or vrja.
The
poets
21
THIRD DECLENSION.
Exc.
, &,
strife;
compounds of
Qldipus;
but
>=,
,,
, .- -,
,,",,,"
og
impure
xoov&u and
as,
as,
?,
with
,
,,
, having
,
,
,
and
Barytons in
both a and
2.
make
tive,
Grace,
in the geni-
$>rJ
and
f'otv,
Also the
helmet.
and
favor, has
key.
VOCATIVE.
The
vocative of nouns generally, and of participles univeras,

sally, is like the nominative
and
barytons in
Exc. 1. Adjectives in
and nouns in
form the vocative by shortening
tender
the long vowel of the nominative ; as,
;
,
-,
,, ,,
&,, ,
&,
,,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
, . , ,,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
, , , , lion
Hector
'
~"
tune
^,
father
better;
compassionate;
mother ;
Demosthenes.
Also
Apollo ;
Nep-
man;
brother-in-law;
savior, though
we meet
also with
Exc.
All nouns in
and baryand
barytons in
and adjectives in
drop to form the
vocative
as,
king ;
Simois, a river of Troas
serpent;
bunch of grapes ;
sharp.
mouse;
Likewise
child: but
old woman; ,
tooth.
Other words
foot ; and
2.
tons, contracted nouns,

;
,,
, , , ,, ,
,,
,
,-,-, ,
-,
;
also lose
ryllis, the
among the poets;

name of a woman.
as,
woman, makes
Amafrom
, ,.
,
,, ,,, , ,
,
.
and
king, in addressing a deity, ccVa.

Exc. 3. Barytons in
and
and adjectives in
form the vocative by dropping
or
from the genitive
as,
ivretched ;
Ajax ;
comely. So
Some of these also form the vocative by
dropping
Ala
from the nominative ; as,
the obsolete
, ,
;
,,
Exc.
4.
Feminines in
and
Sappho;
form the vocative in

dawn.
?,
DATIVE PLURAL.
The
dative plural
before *
,,
inserting
(for
,,
is
as,
formed from the dative singular by
as,
>
the double consonant
savior
being put
22
, -,, ,,., ,
NOUN.
by page 3), vulture.

sake of softness
as,
for
, &, , ,
But
torch
giant.
from
from
for
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
, , , , , ,,
is
changed
Words ending
into
after a
in
singular
as,
been struck.
Except
;
are dropped for the
for
as,
diphthong add
horseman ;
comb ;
to the
nominative
having
,
. , , , . >,
, ., ,, , , ,
,,
runner;
son;
which are regular from
three,
ear;
foot
makes
,.
Syncopated nouns
make
in
the dative in
Also
father,
lamb
makes
hand, makes
star
son.
as,
;
But
from the poetic
belli/,
Contracts of the Third Declension.

Contracted nouns of the third declension are very numerous,
and are divided into five forms.
,,
and
I. Nouns in
where two vowels meet.
-, ,
-,
-, ,
. -,
-.
.
. . V.
G. D.
-,
-, ,,
-,
. -,
-.
G.
. . V.
D.
G. D.
&,
1.
Plur.
G.
D.
V.
wall.
'
-, ,
-,
-, ,
-,
-, . . -,
-, ,.
.
G.
D.
Plur.
ibv
f
,
, '.
V.
V.
Obs.
the cases
-,
,
,
-,
-,
-,
~, . . -,
-, ,.
.
Dual.
Sing.
all
galley.
V.
contracted in
Dual.
Sing.
G.
D.
, are
Proper names have sometimes the accusative and
vocative according to the
first
declension
'
as,
23
THIRD DECLENSION.
Oiis. 2.
Proper names in
-,
-,
-,
,
. -,
-, ,,
are doubly contracted
G.
D.
,,
&\
,,
*,
?.
V.
Obs. 3. The termination

contracted into a, and not into
byta
'
, ,.
Nouns
II.
plural, into
and
in tg
N.
-ic,
G.
D.
-, ,
-^,
V.
.
G
D.
V.
..
btp-Hog,
-,
-.
/^-,
V.
-.
mustard.
-,
-,
-,
-,
-,
Plur.
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
-.
G. D.
- , .
, , , , . ?, . ..,
,
The form
Nouns
-,
-.
D.
in
Nouns
is
,, ,
and
making
into
G. D.
.
are
G.
and
in the genitive,
king.
and
of the
-, ,
-, -,
-. . -,
-, ,.
Dual.
. . V.
But the most
the Attic, in
,
}
into
in
Dual,
eif
D.
G.
-,
-,,
-,
Sing.
properly Ionic.
is
inflected in
contract
into
neuter plural into
G.
D.
Plur.
G.
D.
A.
V.
-,
t,
usual form of the genitive
-,
V.
. . V.
atvrj7r-To?,
ai
-,
,
-/^,
-*,
-,
-, ,.
Dual.
more commonly
Plural, N. V.
III.
Sing.
Obs.
, m, of the singular
is
serpent.
G. D.
-t.
a vowel,
and
as, ityi%,
Dual.
Sing.
when preceded by
contract u,
*.
thus,
2d Contraction.
1st Contraction.
G.
D.
V.
Plur.
24
NOUN.
.
G.
D.
A.
V.
axe.
-, ,
. . -,
-,
-. . -,
-, ..
&,
-,
-,
-,
,
-,
-.
Sing.
Dual.
V.
G.
D.
Plur.
G. D.
V.
city.
Sing.
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
Dual.
&-,
-,,
-,
. . V.
(-,
G. D.
-.
-,
-.
Obs. The Attic genitive in

from masculines in
Nouns in
,.
?, and
genitive into
into
as,
and
in
and
-, ,
-,
-,
2<?-,
#-&,
V.
-,
r\
,
.
most in use, particularly

pure contract
m the
in the accusative singular and plural
'
for
contract
into
o'C
for
into
<,
, and
modesty.
. . V. -,
G. D.
-.
Plur.
-,
-,
. -,
atf-ol,
G.
D.
V.
altf-o/.
005. 1. The dual and plural are formed like nouns in

the second declension.
Obs.
in
for
of
of this form are

and
The only nouns in
the use of these scarcely extends beyond the singular.
Obs. 2.
^?, and
>
is
Dual.
Sing.
G.
D.
a certain measure,
Nouns
IV.
for
oa into
G.
D.
-,
Plur.
. &-,
3.
*'
,, ,.
In the same manner are declined the Attic forms
as,
for
V. Neuters in
pure and
are both syncopated and contracted in every case, except the nominative, accusative, and
vocative singular, and the dative plural.
25
THIRD DECLENSION.
;,
-,
-,
-,
(by syncope)
-.
G.
D.
horn.
Sing.
-,
-,
(by crasis)
-,
xAQSfi
V.
-,
-,,
. -,
-,
-,
. -,
Dual.
N. A. V.
G. D.
G.
D.
V.
-,
-,,
-,
-.
'-,
'-,
'-,
^-,
Plur.
-,
-*',
-,
'
-cr.
OTHER CONTRACTIONS.
Some nouns
,
., ,
,,
are contracted in every case
?,
spring.
Sing.
G.
&C.
G.
stone.
,,
,
Sing.
.
}
&C.
G.
as,
torch.
,,
Sing.
iefe,
&LC.
Some are contracted only in the nominative, accusative, and

vocative plural ; as,
;, woman.
, ,
-,
. ;, . -,
, .. -,
, ..
A.
old
G.
.
G.
or cow.
Sing.
Plur.
Sing.
Plur.
Sing.
-aac,
V.
-,
G.
V. f*ff,
bunch of grapes.
-,
.
-,
.
V.
Plur.
\
\
.
G.
,
.
Sing.
<1,
.
.
-#
,
V.
hey.
Plur.
-frJec,
}
daughter, -^, man, and

Ceres, are
syncopated in all cases, except the nominative and vocative
t
26
NOUN.
singular,
and the dative
plural,
never immediately preceded by
inserting
Sing.
. -,
G.
D.
G.
V.
V.
dcv
.A
G
&-, &-,
^-^^
&~-,
. &-, -,
3--.
,,,
.
G.
, ',
&-.
Dual.
V.
D.
Plur.
V.
-.
-,
-, -.
-,
. -,
Dual.
G.
D.
-, -,
-,
D. <ib-^,
V.
G. D.
is
Sing.
--, 3--,
--,
\->, &-,
. &-, <&-,
&-.
. . &-, &-,
&-, --.
.
because
<5,
v.
D.
A.
V.
-,
-'
'-';, -,
-,
-.
Plur.
d^-^scjj
'-/',
,
, , , ,
, , -
<)^, &zm6 and ,

After this manner also
dog, are syncopated, the latter dropping in
all the cases.
To these may be joined
father,
mother, and
belli/; but they are not syncopated in
the accusative singular, and the genitive and accusative plural,
to distinguish them from
one's native country,
matrix, and
bottom of a vessel, of the first declension.
differs
by making
and
from
in the dative plural.
old Greek Grammarians made ten declensions, five of simple,

of contracted nouns. Of these declensions the four first are parisyllabic, or have an equal number of syllables in all the cases; the rest are
imparisyllabic, or have a greater number of syllables in the oblique cases
than in the nominative.
%* [The
and
five
I.
SIMPLES.
FIRST DECLENSION.
Nouns of
the
first
-,
-,
. -,
V -.
Smg.
G.
D.
declension of simples end in
-q,
G. D.
masculine.
steward.
Dual.
N. A. V.
,,
-,
-,
.
G.
D.
V.
-,
-,
Plur.
-,
-.
'
',
&
&
.
,
,
, ', .
[the ten declensions.]
Some nouns
make
in
the genitive in a as well as

gen.
gen.
;
as,
ov
as,
^^,
and
and
Some keep a exclusively
gen.
'
gen.
were the Doric form.
in a
2?
.
G.
D.
,
-,
,
gen.
These genitives
gen.
publican.
Dual.
Sin-.
. . V.
-^,
-^.
-,
G.
D.
-.
,&, ,&'
,
-,
,
Plur.
-at,
,,
,
,
'
.
,
,
,
.
,
]
,
*.
V.
G. D.
All nouns in
compounds of
poetical
.
,,.
Also
make .
Nouns
nouns in
make
V.
-at.
national names in
the vocative in a as,
, and
'
But
make
in
, ,
,-,
-,
-,
,
or
as,
^*?,
and
The Cohans and Macedonians adopted the termination a even in the

nominative of these nouns thus,
for
for
Hence in Latin cojneta, planeta, poeta, from
'
Some nouns of this
declension are contracted
, Mercury.
Smg
. ,-, ,
G.
,
D.
i,
.
,
'
-,
-,
-,
-,
Apelles.
Sing.
V.
as,
Jji,
,
. -^, ,,
V.
&c.
G.
D.
, &C
SECOND DECLENSION.
Nouns of the second declension of simples end
-,
-,
-,
. -,
-.
.
G.
D.
V.
the dative in a
&,
pure, and
-,
-,
-,
. -,
0-.
.
G.
D.
V.
V.
-.
some proper names, as

make the genitive in
and
contracted, with
thus,
ij
Sing.
Plur.
G.
D.
-,
, ,, ,
in
. A. V. /-,
G. D.
, , femimne.
-,
-,
-,
. ,
Dual.
Sing.
Nouns
in
muse.
friendship.
Dual.
N. A. V.
G. D.
-,
\-.
-,
-,
-,
. -,
-.
.
G.
D.
V.
Plur.
2S
Obs. 1
vowel
is
when it immediately follows a vowel or

not mixed or united in sound.
called pure,
diphthong, witli which
it is
Obs. 2. The ancient Latins followed this manner of making the genitives in as ; as, terras, escas, Latonas, for terra, escce, Latonce.
Pater'
familias continued always in use.
fi
honor.
Dual.
Sing.
. -,
-,
/-,
. -,
-.
. . V.
G.
D.
G. D.
V.
Plur.
-,
-,
-,
. -,
-.
.
-.
G.
D.
V.
Some nouns of
the second declension are contracted, by dropping the

except
not preceded by a vowel
vowel preceding the termination
or q, which is contracted into /; thus,
G.
D.
V.
,,
a, wool.
Sing.
Sing.
-,
-, ,
-,
. -, ,
-, &C
\, ,
a, rrnna.
earth.
Sing.
a,
. -,
a",
G.
D.
G. y-/aj,
D. y -,
.
V.
a,
,
-,
,
-,
lp
, &C.
|-, ,
weasel.
Sing.
Sing.
. -6,
G. -<5>7,
D.
-?, ,
.
,
. \-, ,
-,
q,
simplicity.
G.
D. ya\-ip,
V.
. \-,
-, ,,,
?/,
-, ,, &C.
V. -,
q,
-lav,
y-/a,
-,
<-<5?7/,
V.
&C.
&C.
THIRD DECLENSION.
Nouns of the third declension of simples end in
but sometimes feminine, and ov neuter.
b
. \-,
-,
-,
G.
D.
A. \6y-ov,
V.
-.
word, speech.
Dual.
Sing.
, generally masculine
N. A. V.
G. D.
-,
\6-.
.
G.
D.
.
V.
Plur.
\6-,
-,
-,
-,
-.
,
,
Obs. In a few instances the common dialect, like the Attic, makes the
whence the Latin 6 Deus ; and
vocative like the nominative ; as,
heus
tu.
rb
Sing.
. \-,
G.
D.
|-,
-,
. -,
V.
\b\-ov.
wood.
Dual.
. . V. \-,
G. D. \-.
Plur.
. -,
G. -,
D. \-,
. |-,
V.
\-.
29
the third declension are contracted, hy changing to, oo,

and dropping and before a long vowel or
Some nouns of
and
into ov,
oa, into a,
diphthong.
rb
-,
-, ,
,
,
,
. , ,
V -, .
v<ioj,
,
-,
,
-,
. -, ,
,
-,
,
-6, ,
.
,
-6, .
understanding.
v-dos,
. . V.
-<$,
G. D.
G.
D.
7,
-,
V.
Dual.
Sing.
boT-ta,
G.
D.
-,
G. D.
Plur.
-,
. . V.
G.
D.
bone.
Dual.
Sing.
Plur.
-6,
,,,
,
,,.,
. -, ,
-, ,
-,
-, ,
,
G.
D.
-, .
,
,-
V. -<5,
V.
*.
,,
stream, 6
&c. Also
So its compounds
skin; with their compounds. But the
down;
voyage;
neuter plural in a of compounds remains uncontracted as,
Even
in the genitive
we
&C.
than
"
,.
,
rather say
the contracted of this form may

the dative only, which ends in
and (with
as,
triptots) diminutives in
Jiovvq, 6
To
-,
/-,
-,
. -,
IN
to the
Sing.
-,
IN.
G.
D.
V.
be referred, differing in
more propriety than
G.
D.
-,
-.
Aiov-\S,
-5.
V.
FOURTH DECLENSION.
Nouns of the fourth declension of simples end in
but sometimes feminine, and
neuter.
This declension
from which
mostly masculine,
in reality, nothing but the Attic dialect of the

formed by changing the last vowel or diphthong
into
subscribing , and making the vocative like the nominative ; as,
hare, for
be a
If the vowel preceding
long, it is changed into s as,
for
people ;
,,
third,
is,
it
is
, ,. ,
b
Sing.
,
G.
JN.
-,
-,
. -,
temple.
Dual.
. . V. -,
D.
V.
-,
G. D.
(#.
Plur.
. -%
-,
G.
D. <,
. -,
V. *<$.
30
^/,
-,
-,
-,
. -,
-.
hall.
Dual.
IN.
G.
D.
N. A. V.
G. D.
-,
^-,
Plur.
-,
/^-,
. ^-,
G.
D.
-,
^/-.
, , ,
, .. , , .
, ',
,
, .
V.
V.
Obs. 1.
There
Obs. 2.
The
is
Obs. 3.
viz.
debt.
in the accusative ; as,

Sometimes in the nominative; as,
So
)',,
one neuter in
Attics frequently omit

'
for
The
Attics often decline after this form words
wise belong to the
which
other-
declension; as,
for
from
and the later Greeks decline words in
which belong to the fourth, according to the fifth declension ; as,
for
fifth
from
for
from
FIFTH DECLENSION.
Nouns belonging
neuter, and,*, q,
,,
-,
-,
Sing
to the fifth declension of simples end in a,

//, of all genders, and increase in the genitive.
.
G.
D.
.
V.
-,
-,
-.
. . V.
G. D.
D.
-,
-,
..
G.
D.
V.
. . V.
G. D.
-.
itai-ava,
ij
-,
\\-,
-,
. \-,
-.
-
G.
D.
V.
-,
-.
..
V.
G. D.
V.
-,
-,
-,
. -,
-.
.
PJur.
G.
D.
V.
-,
-,
-,
. - ?,
-.
Plur.
G.
D.
V.
storm.
Dual.
Sing.
Plur.
-,
-,
. -,
-.
--?7,
G.
D.
pcean.
Dual.
Sing.
-,
-.
body.
-,
V.
G. D.
-.
-,
-,
-.
Dual.
. -,
V.
-,
rb
Sing.
.
-,
G.
savior.
Dual.
-,
-.
-,
->,
/-,
. -,
.
Plur.
G.
D.
V.
-JTCS.
t,
v,

h
. -,
-,
-,
N. A. V.
. -,
V. -.
Some nouns
G. D.
, %,
,
.,
.
ft
)ip,
Some
plural
G.
&C.
$,
-if,
,
, ,,
as,
h Sats, torch.
5<<we.
Sing.
Sing.
^,
$,
G. <3<5,
&.C.
woman.
old
,
,
0<$rp8o S .
ft, ij
.
.
0o8?,
&.C
and vocative
,
.
az or cow.
Sing.
Plur.
-,
-,
-,
}
>
G.
Plur.
/?<5rp-faf,
V.
0drp-wi
/?-d f ,
V.
0-,
,
.
^,
/J
Sing.
Plur.
N.
N.
. -,
>
bunch of grapes.
Sing.
G.
-,
-.
0-7.
are contracted only in the nominative, accusative,
ft
0-,
0-,
as,
Sing.
G.
Plur.
G.
D.
of this declension are contracted in every case
spring.
lap,
-,
V.
Sing.
N.
G.
jackall.
Dual.
Sing.
G.
D.
31
key.
Plur.
.. -?3,
-<5, ^
.
A.
G.
r
V.
-?,
-,
>
e7f
daughter, arr>,o, man, and ^

Ceres, are syncopated in
cases, except the nominative and vocative singular, and the dative
plural,
inserting
because is never immediately preceded by v.
t/yOTJj^,
all
.
G.
Sing.
, -,
. . -,
-,
. -, ,
-,
-,
-,
. -, -,
-, '.
D.
V.
,
-,
.
.
, -,
-,
-, -,
/-.
Dual.
V.
G. D.
.
-ps,
G.
D.
-<?,
. . V.
G. D.
G.
D.
-?,
-,
-,
-',
V.
Plur.
V.
Sing.
G.
D.
,,,
V.
,
-,
.
,
,
,
,
, ,
-,
.
Dual.
Sv
-,
Plur.
iv-fpef,
,,
lamb, and ,
After this manner also
in all the cases.
dog, are syncopated, the latter dropping
To
mother, and
belly; but
father,
these may be joined
they are not syncopated in the accusative singular, and the genitive and
^,
,,
32
, ,,
,,
accusative plural, to distinguish them from

one's native country,
matrix, and
bottom of a vessel, of the second declension.
differs from
and
by making
in the
dative plural.
For the formation of the genitive, accusative, and vocative singular,
and dative plural, of this declension, see pages 1622.
/,
CONTRACTS.
II.
FIRST DECLENSION.
Nouns of the
nine, and
tg,
declension of contracts end in

neuter.
first
-,
-,
-, ,
,
. -, ,
-.
. . V.
G.
D.
G. D.
-,
-, ,,
-,
. -, ,
-, .
-,
-,
,
-,
,
. -,
-.
Sing.
-,
V.
wall.
Dual.
. . V.
G.
D.
-,
-, ,,
-,
. -, ,
-, .
Plur.
-,
G.
D.
-, .
', , '.2
G. D.
V.
Plur.
G.
D.
-, .
V.
galley.
Dual.
Sing.
masculine and femi-
V.
Obs. 1. Proper names have sometimes the accusative and vocative ac,
cording to the first of the simples ; as,
Obs. 2.
Proper names in
are doubly contracted
-,
-,
,
-,
,
. -, ,
-,, ,
.
,
,
G.
D.
V.
,
,
.
7,
, ,,
when preceded by
Obs. 3. The termination
as,
into a, and not into
thus,
2d Contraction.
1st Contraction.
and
a vowel,
is
contracted
SECOND DECLENSION.
Nouns of the second declension of
feminine, and
neuter.
b
G.
D.
-,
A. V.
-u,
G. D.
-.
d<p-u,
. -,
V.
-.
end in
tj
masculine and
serpent.
Dual.
Sing.
. -,
contracts
Plur.
-,
-,
-,
. -,
-,
G.
D.
V.
*f>
U3
.
G.
D.
A.
V.
Obs.
monly
ec,
is
G.
-,
-,
-,
..
-.
?
.
,
. .
.
D.
at,
the Attic, in
-to?
G.
D.
-.
G. D.
The form in
inflected in
-,
V.
alviftt-i,
ta,
mustard.
Dual.
Sing.
.
V.
-,
-,
-,
Plur.
-,
-,
,
.
are more comproperly Ionic. Nouns in

Dual,
G. eW. Plural, N. V.
But the most usual form of the genitives
is
D. -,
?,
and
.,
THIRD DECLENSION.
Nouns of the
culine and
&
.
G.
D.
.
V.
third declension of contracts

feminine, and
neuter.
end
\-,
-,
..
-,
\-,
V.
G. D.
\-.
0-&,
.
G.
D.
5,
\-.
V.
. \-,
-,
\-,
. -,
-.
..
G.
D.
-,
-, .,
\-,
-,
\-,
^-,
. -?,
-, .
Plur.
\-, ,
-.
,
G.
D.
Dual.
-,
,
-,
-,
. -, ,
-, .
V.
?,
G. D.
V.
Plur.
\-,
\-, ,
axe.
Dual.
Sing.
? mas-
king.
Dual.
Sing.
masculine,
in
V.
city.
Sing.
G.
D.
.
V.
Obs.
-,
-,
-, ,
-,
-.
The
..
V.
G. D.
Plur.
-, ,
G.
D.
-.
V.
Attic genitive in
.,
most in use, particularly from mascuand
is
, ,
lines in
Nouns in
pure contract
in the genitive into
in the accusative singular and plural into a as,
a certain
ure,
for
for
and jfo&g for
meas-
FOURTH DECLENSION.
Nouns of the
fourth declension of contracts end in

ft
Sing.
. '-,
G.
D.
A.
V.
-,
-, ,
-,
-.
Dual.
N. A. V.
G. D.
feminine.
modesty.
alS -,
-.
Plur.
N.
G.
D.
alS-oi,
-cSv,
-7,
-,
V. eW-oi.
34
NOUN.
Obs. 1. The dual and plural are formed like nouns in

the simples.
, (), , .
Obs. 2. The only nouns in

of this form are
use of these scarcely extends beyond the singular.
Obs. 3. In the
'
as,
same manner
of the third of
and
], and the
are declined the Attic forms in
for
for
FIFTH DECLENSION.
Nouns of the
declension of contracts end in

are of the neuter gender.
pure and
fifth
-,
-,
-,
. -,
-.
horn.
Sing.
G.
D
>, and
(by syncope)
-,
-,
(by crasis)
-,
-,
V.
..
-,
-,
. -,
-.
-,
Dual.
-,
-,
V.
G. D.
G.
D.
V.
-,
-.
-,
-,
-,
-,
-,
-,
Plur.
-,
-,
-,
-.
IRREGULAR NOUNS.
Irregular nouns may be divided
and redundant
into
two
classes, defective
DEFECTIVE NOUNS.
I.
.,
The
following are indeclinable ; the names of the letters of

the alphabet ; nouns shortened by apocope, as
for
and some foreign names, as
for
or
Some have
fates
&
;
Some
ol
The
only one case, as

gift
gods.
are used in two cases only, as
&
&,
&, ,
al
&,
,
Hon
, , , , , ',
from
a sort of cake.
following neuters have the nominative, accusative, and
from
,.
vocative singular only
35
IRREGULAR NOUNS.
Some have no
,.
, ,
plural, as
,
Ucdov,
\,
->)
and others known by the sense.

entrails
The following have no singular
trade winds; the names of festivals, as,
feast of Bacchus; and some names of cities, as, ui
'/,
ol
'&,
)&,,&, ,
, ,,
; ,
,
,
,
,
,
,. , . ,
, ,, ,,
, ,,,
II.
REDUNDANT NOUNS.
Some nouns have
1.
tive
nomina-
different terminations in the
and
and
and
as,
and
and
and
&LC. Nouns in
and
,
as,
particular, are declined by the Attics in ,
for
So
for
and
and
^,
in
for
Frequently a new form of the nominative

oblique case of the old form ; as,
.
,
-,
, &.
,
, &,
tive
and
&,
&,
,
arises
and
whence
from an
and
and
In like manner
the dative plural
--
So from the accusa-
dative plural
4\,
new nominative
-,
?,
,
"
,
,
,"
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,' ,
,
,
,
, , , ,
,
, -, .\, ^, \ -,
has arisen.
Some admit
2.
tive
and
and
and
,"
"
different inflections from the
as,
same nominaand
and
/, and
oôc,
and
and
)&),
and
and
and
and
,, ,
,,,
make
of
after the first

tive
and
and
and
thus,
and
and
and
Some nouns in
all
compounds
are declined
and third-declension in the accusative and vocaof the third declension makes
after
the third,
after the first.
and
>
3. Some are regularly declined, and have besides, in the

oblique cases, other forms, which descend from obsolete nominatives; as,
and
from
also
,,
from
,,, , ,.
and
from
NOUN.
JO
, ,, ,&
Likewise 6
from <|
and
and
, ,,
, ,,
from
and
anc
,
,
,, , ., , ,
,,,
, , ,, ,
,
?,
from
from
plural
and
and
from /g
In the same manner
and
from
-roO,
|.
^*?
from
from
and
dative
and
from
Some nouns, without having two forms in use in any case,
borrow their oblique cases from obsolete nominatives ; as,
from
from
from
from
voc.
Jti; J la, from Jig, and
makes J
from Zr\v.
Ionic
makes, in the sing.,
, ,, , , , ., , , ,
,,, , ,
,
,
,
, ,
, , .
From
and
in the plur.,
Ionics have, in the sing.,
the plur.,
ace.
and in the plur., nom.
4.
Some have
and
the
and
in
also in the sing., gen.
gen.
ace.
different genders in the singular
plural.
-,
and
in the
and neuter in the plural ;

following are commonly added, but they some
times occur in the neuter singular ;

Masculine
in the singular,
^, -
The
-a.
-,
-.
-,
-, -,
&-,
Masculine
plural
in
the
and and and -a

and -.
-, --,
The
- Feminine
}
-,
the
-,
-, -ol
-ol
-,
in
&-,
-ol
more rare in the neuter plural

-ol and and
in the singular, feminine
and
and neuter
and -a
and -a
-ol and -ol and -
-,
following are
and -a
and -.
-,
-,
-, -
singular, masculine
and
and -a
-ol and -a
-ol and -a
-ol
-, -
and neuter
in the plural
-a.
DERIVATIVE NOUNS.
I.
PATRONYMICS.
Masculine patronymics are derived from the genitive

singular of their primitives, by changing the termination into
,, .
-. ', "-,
1.
- ,",-,-
or
If the primitive be of the first declension, or in
as,
the second, the change is into
pure of
'
,
-.
,
, - , -,
-.
,, '.
.
,
,
,
,
',
,.
37
DERIVATIVE NOUNS.
But when the penultima of the genitive

change is into
it be, the
-,
declension
"-,
'
is
-,
long, of whatever
as,
Under every other circumstance, the change
as,
The
Ionics form their patronymics in

The iEolics in
from
for
for
Feminine patronymics end in

Those in I; and a; are formed from
2.
ing
is
always into
as,
as,
,,,
as,
or
'.
by cast-
their masculines
Those in
from the nominative of the primitives, by
as,
changing the termination into
..
,
Those
in
from nominatives of the second declension in
impure, and of the third in
as,
.
Those
in
in
ceded by
or
' *,
from nominatives of the second declension
,
',
and of the third
when
in
as,
'
these terminations are pre
& & ,,
,
,
,,
,
.
,
,
,&
,
7 ^,
DIMINUTIVES.
II.
Masculine diminutives end in ?,

from
from
from
from
from
from
2. Feminine diminutives end in
from
from
from 7/#0
,
from
1.
&
Dor. for
from
from
,& &,
,
from
?.
&
from
,,
Neuter diminutives end in

from
from
from
#} ^toy #
pjtftov from
tîo^,
from
from
62#0
from ,
from
One primitive has sometimes a variety of diminutives as,
from
>?7 is derived
3.
,
'
, .., , ,
^.
One
diminutive
comes
sometimes generates another
as,
from
NOUN.
AMPLIFICATIVES.
III.
,,,
,,
,
.
,
Amplificatives increase the signification of their primitives,
and generally import something contemptible in the person.

having a large belly,
They end in
over-rich, from
head, from
current, especially of lava, from
VERBALS
IV.
Are generally formed by
casting off the
augment of
their
and changing the termination,
primitives,
.
.
&,
.
.
.
^ .
.
.
.
.
.
in the first person of the perfect passive,
into
,
,
'"'"
from
/
J
I*
rr
in the second person of the perfect passive,
from
as
into
&,.
in the third person of the perfect passive,
Masc.
as
into
into
as
Neut.
{,
,,
,
as
iov,
from
from
from
,.
ADJECTIVE.
,,
,
.
.
.
.
^&.
in the first person of the perfect middle,
from
as
,
,
few are formed from other tenses
#*jk*7,
^,
as,
from the present

from the perfect
from the first aorist
from the second aorist
ADJECTIVES.
Adjectives are declined like substantives.
Some adjectives have different terminations for
all the three genders ; some have one for the masculine and feminine, and another for the neuter;
others have only one for all the genders.
I.
Adjectives of three terminations end in
M.
,
,
ug,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
F.
,
,
,
,
,
,
*?>
ua,
uva,
,
,
,
,
,
40
ADJECTIVE.
Among
these terminations are included those of

seven being peculiar to them.
participles, the last
In adjectives of three terminations, all feminines

first declension
all masculines in
with their neuters in ov, of the second; and all
other masculines and neuters, of the third.
are of the
beautiful.
Dual.
N. A.
Sing.
-,
, ,
-,
-, ,V ,
\, ,
-,
-, , ,*. -, ,
,
N.
G.
D,
fj[,
G. D.
oiv.
-e,
Plur.
, ,
-,
,,
-,
,
,
. -, , ,
-ol,
G.
D.
V.
-ol,
,
,
,
,
,
&
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,,, ,,,
In
&,
like
manner
<
lecline
good.
white.
soft, tender.
wooden.
plain.
wise.
contemplative.
bad.
make the feminine in a as,

pure and
long
friendly ;
and
not preceded by or a vowel as,
brazen ;
except those in
delightful.
dear.
liglit.
Adjectives in
soft.
eighth.
-'
long.
-, ,, ,, -,. ., , -, ,, ,,
-,
-, ,,
-, , ,
. -, , ,
. -, , ,
.
,.
, . -,
Dual.
Sing.
Plur.
N.
V.
D.
D.
G. D.
V.
-ol,
G.
G.
,
,
,
,
-h,
In like manner
holy.
wild,
worthy,
right,
just.
V.
-ol,
decline
&,
&,
,
,
left.
free,
hostile.
sacred.
strong.
,
,
DECLENSION.
,
,
smooth.
like.
easy.
41
small.
hard,
manifest.
,,,
,
,
-,
,,
,-,
,, ,,
-,
,.
-,, , ,
. -, , ,
. -, , ,
..
-, , ,
-,
, ,
,
, , -, , ,
-,
-,
,
, ,
-, ,
-,
, , -, , ,
-,
-,
,
, ^,
,
-,
,
-,
,
. -, , ,
. -, , ,
,
,
-,
-, , ,
,,
-,
, , -, , . -, , ,
-, , .
-, , ., ,
Some
6,
and
adjectives in
into
tracted
some in
of silver, into
likewise
as,
are congolden, into
as,
Dual.
Sing.
into
Plur.
V.
G.
G.
D.
m,
D.
G. D.
V.
V.
have the same form
6,
Adjectives in
tion as the above, except in the voc. sing,
contract
,
,
It
into
,
,
,
Words
after contrac-
in
which they
for practice.
flaxen, linen.
brazen.
,,
masc,
simple.
double, or two-fold.
Adjectives in
differ in contraction from those in
only in the sing, fern., through all the cases of
which they are contracted into a
thus,
',
woollen, and
are contracted, in the nom.,
into
The
-,
a, ovv
adjectives
in the gen., into
,,,
the neuter in o, though the neuters

sometimes found.
Many
adjectives in
-, , ,
,, ,
,
especially
&,c.
and
and
compounds and
',
,
derivatives,
masculine and feminine ; as, 6, i

adjectives of three terminations are often used as common in
the Attic writers; as,
II. /S'. 742}
one termination
Thucyd. .
for the
2.
sweet.
ffi
4*
,.
are
have but
also
Homer and
//,
,
,
,
,
. . V. . -, ,
. -, , ,
-, , , G. --,
G. -,
,
D. -,
D. -, , , , ,
G.D.
. -, ,
. -,
,
, . -,
V. -, ,
V. -,
Dual.
Sing.
make
Plur.
,
,
42
ADJECTIVE.
&,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,

deep.
heavy.
slow.
sweet.
broad,
half.
sharp.
swift.
,,
,
Adjectives of this termination, in the poets, often make the accusative
singular in
instead of
as, evQia
II. '. 291.
Sometimes they are used
as
common
Odys. '. 369.
as,
graceful
,
.(~, ], , , .-, , ,
.-, ,
, ,.
.,,. . .-,
,-, ,
.,
, . . .-,
.-,
,
-,,
-, 0.-,,
Sing
Dual.
Plur.
V.
G.
or
(.\).-
,
,,
&,
,
,
,
hairy.
rocky.
flowery.
, ,, ,, ,
,,
From
tracts,
honored.
,,.
-, ,
Sing.
. -,
r\v,
-, }, ,
. ->, , ,
V.
,,
adjectives declined after this form arise several conbeing contracted into $?,
and
thus,
into
G.
D.
snowy,
shady,
mouldy.
^ ,,
if,
,'.
G.
D.
V.
,
,
-, ,
,
-,
,
-,
,
,
-,
,
--,,,.,
full of honey.
Sing.
],
or
-\,
. . -,,,,,
-,
,
. -, , , . -,
,
,
-,
-,
,,
,
,
-,
-,
,,
. -, , , . -, , ,
,.
-, , .
Dual.
Dual.
N.A.V.
G.D.
A.V.
G.D.
Plur.
Plur.
G.
D.
G.
D.
V.
V.
black.
,
,
,
-,
,
-,
,
. -,
.
V.
,
,
-,
-,
alvrj,
av,
G. D.
-, , ,
-,
-, ,
,,
-,
-,
,,
. -, , ,
-, , ,
Plur.
ava t
G.
D.
V.
ava.
In like
manner decline
some compounds,
wretched, and
G.
D.
>.
rc
Dual.
alvaiv, avow.
Sing.
V.
av.
Dual.
N. A. V.
,
. -, , ,
-,
,,
-,
,
,
. -, , ,
,
-,
-,
,.
,
-, ,
. -, , ,
-,
,,
-. , ,
. -, , ,
-, , .
all.
Sing.
G.
D.
43
DECLENSION.
as
N.A.V.
G. D.
Plur.
\j.
D.
V.
In like manner decline several

as,
nqonag, and
compounds,
,,,
very participles in
the only
miserable, the only other examples other words declined after this form.
of this form.
nauuikag,
all
black,
willing.
, ^,
-,
,
-, , ,
. -6, , ,
-, , .
-,
.
-, , ,
. -, , ,
-'', , ,
Sing.
,
,
-,
,
,
-,
,
,
. -, , ,
Sing.
. -,
. -,
G.
D.
G.
D.
V.
Dual.
N.A.V.
G. D.
Plur.
-,
. -,
G.
D.
V.
, ,.
:
-?, *,
",
,.
,,
-, ,
-,
. -, , ,
-,
,,
-, ,
V.
-,
Dual.
N.A.V.
G.D.
Plur.
G.
D.
.
V.
-,
-,
or
nnvAllThere is
participles of the present, form.
first future, and second aorist active.
So decline
ing,
and
tender.
,
, .,
no other example of
this
44
ADJECTIVE.
&,
. &- ,
-',
,
,
&,
,
. &-, ,
having been struck.
,
.,
,
,
.,
,
having given.
,
,
,
,
,,
},
,
,
-, , .
,.
&- .
, ,
,,
,
&-,
,
. &-, , , . , , ,
,
,
,
&-,
,
,
&-,
,
,
,
,
,
,
&-,
,
,
,
,
,,.
&-, , .
Sing.
>,
G.
D.
ev f
V.
Sing.
G.
D.
V.
Dual.
N.A.V.
G.D.
Dual.
N.A.V.
G.D.
Plur.
Plur.
D.
G.
D.
V.
V.
G.
In this manner are declined partiIn this manner are declined participles of the first ana second aorist ciples of verbs in
from primitives
passive, and of verbs in
from in
primitives in
-,
. -, ,
. -, ,
-,
,
,
-,
,
,
-,
,
,
-,
,
,
. -, , .
. -, , ,
-, , , -, , .
joining.
Sing.
going
to strike.
Sing.
ovv,
i>v,
G.
G.
D.
D.
V.
V.
-,,
-,
, ,.
. -, , ,
,
-,
,
-,
,
,
. -, , ,
-, , .
Dual.
,
-, ,
,
,
-,
,
,
,
-,
,
-, , .
N.A.V.
G.D.
G.D.
Plur.
-,,
,
,.
Dual.
N.A.V.
G.
D.
G.
V.
V.
D.
Plur.
In this manner are declined partiIn this manner are declined partifrom primitives ciples of the second future active,
ciples of verbs in
and of the present of contracted
in
verbs in
and
,-, ,
DECLENSION.
45
having struck.
honoring.
,
-,
,,
-,
,
,
. -, , ,
-, , .
...,-^, , , .
.^-^, , .
Sing.
. -,
G.
D.
G.
D.
V.
V.
Sing.
-,
-,
/?,
off,
OTO,
,
-,
,
-, ,
-, ,.
,
. -?,
. -, , ,
,
-.
,
-,
,
,
-,
,
,
-,
,
,
-, , .,
. -, , ,
-, *, , . -,
.
/,
?,
off.
Dual.
Dual.
A.V.
G. D.
u /,
Plur.
Plur.
mat,
G.
D.
V.
In
this
present
verbs in
G.
D.
*',
V.
u?at,
In this manner are declined partiare declined the

participles of contracted ciples of the perfect active and mid-
manner
dle.
?,
standing.
. -, *, ,
,
..
,
-,
?, -, , , -,',
,
.--,
-, , .
. -, , , -, ,, . -,, ,
. -?, *, .
-?, ,
Dual.
Sing.
. -?,
G.
7,
G.D.
tort,
?.
V.
Plur.
V.
G.
D.
V.
This word, and several others declined in the same manner, as

are participles of the perfect active, from which the Ionics drop
generally shortening the penultima, and which are afterwards contracted
thus, sOTrjxaig,
:,
II.
,.
Adjectives of
M.
F.
,
,
,
,
two terminations end

N.
ov
in
46
AJJJX, 1/A1VJS.
,
,
,
,
V
0Q
All adjectives of two terminations are of the third

declension ; except those in
and
which are of
the second.
-,
-,
-,
. -,
-,
Sing.
glorious.
Dual.
. . V.
G.
D.
G. D.
&,
,
,
-,
,
,
,
,
-.
immortal.
strong, brave.
celebrated.
& ,,
royal.
Sing.
G.
D.
,,
third declension
as,
. -,
V.
G.
-, ,
',
&,
Dual.
Sing.
a distinct
Plur.
-,
-,
. -,
-,
D.
V.
full.
and xlqaq, horn, follow the

D.
fond of laughter, G.
form of the second declension is also used.
laughter,
"
bordering upon,
saving, salutary.
wretched.
fertile.
but the Atttic
fruitful,
Dual.
propitious.
Compounds of
'-.
4<3, Aristoph.
G. D.
. -,
V.
common sometimes take
. . . -,
-,
-,
-.
. -,
-, .
V.
G.
D.
Several adjectives which are properly

feminine ; as,
Horn. ;
. -,
-,
-,
Plur.
. -*,
love,
-,
-,
true.
Plur.
,, %
. &^,
, N. A. V. . &-,
&.,
&-, , G. &-,
G.
&-, ,
&-, ,
G. D.
D.
, ,
. D.. &-,
, &-,
1
i,
\,
&-.
&-
V.
-, ,
,.
,
,
&,
,
&,
?,
, ,&,
-,
-,
DECLENSION.
47
for five years,
exact,
pure.
thorny,
safe, secure,
of noble birth.
stony, stone-tike.
godlike.
happy.
.
G.
D.
V.
-,
-,
-.
-, -,
-,
-. . -,
Dual.
Sing.
ov,
N. A. V.
-ovt,
,
,
G. D.
ov,
Plur.
G.
D.
-,
V.
,
,,
ovct f
ova,
ova.
compassionate,
comely.
bloodless.
neighboring.
Comparatives in
are declined like
but they
syncopate and contract the accusative singular of the common
gender, and the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural of
all genders ; thus,
greater.
,,
-, -, -,
-,
-,
. -, ,
. -, , ,
.
-, , ,
. -,
Dual.
Sing.
G.
D.
ov,
Plur.
ova, oa,
ova, oa,
G.
D.
-ovt,
oa,
V.
'N.A.V.
G.D.
ov,
-ovotv.
V.
, ,,
-,
ova,
better.
more beautiful.
agreeable.
.
G.
D.
V.
Sing.
-,
-,
&,
-t.
-, -,
-,
-, ,
-. . -,
-,
.
-,
Dual.
N. A. V.
G. D.
Plur.
*,
G.
D.
V.
Adjectives of this termination, with the exception of

t, skilful,
G.
, fasting, and a few others, are compounded of substantives,
y
like which they are for the most part declined ; but some compounds of
make
in the genitive j as,
, witliout a city, G.
-,
-,
-.
48
ADJECTIVE.
-&^
. -,
Sing.
G.
D.
-&,, .
V.
Adjectives in
.
-,
compounded.
two-footed.
Thus,
. . V.
G. D.
.
G.
D.
Plur.
V.
-,
,
-, -,
-) ,
-6 . -,
.
Dual.
are declined after the substantives of
,
,
cvv, toothless,
G.
-,
D.
which they are

A. -on a,
-,
Contracted compounds of nouns of the second declension, thus;

ow, favorably disposed, G, -ov, D. -,
A. -ovv, V. -,
In
'
the same manner those of
as
&c.
tearless.
-,
. #-, ,
'-',
#-?, . . <-,
^-",
-*,
-.
. -,
. -, , ,
<-/.
,.
-,
Sing.
Dual.
G.
D.
Plur.
G.
D.
V.
G. D.
V.
V.
/,
Adjectives of this termination follow the substantives of which they are
compounded;
as,
three cubits long,
&,
. -,
G.
D.
-,
-,
V.
-.
. . V.
. &-,
There
is
G. D.
-.
male.
'
Dual.
Sing.
G.
Plur.
. &-,
-,
G.
D.
-^,
-,
eva f
-, ,
-. . -,
V.
no other adjective declined
^^,
after this form.
magnanimous
. ^-?, ,
-,
-,
..
-^,
^-,,
-,
-,
-. . /-,
. -, ,
.
V.
G.
D.
^-.
V.
In
like
Plur.
Dual.
Sing.
G.
D.
G. D.
manner decline dpjmeft
V.
>rai?e.
49
COMPARISON.
evcrfiowing.
-,
,
-,
-,
. . -,
-,
-,
-,
. -, ,
. -,
-.
, -, ..
. -,
Dual.
Sing.
V.
G.
D.
Plur.
G.
D.
G. D.
V.
, ,
,,
- ,
- ,
like
III.
manner
unwearied.
decline
Adjectives of one termination are the cardinal
numbers above
four.
Other adjectives of one termination are masculine and femi-
Such are, 1. Adjectives compounded with sublong-handed;

which remain unchanged as,
quick-scented.
and
2. Those derived from
as,
fatherless ;
of the same mother. 3. Adjectives in
as,
unsubdued ;
and
unknown, also that does not know; except
poor, which
as,
is always masculine.
4. Adjectives in I and
of the
same age;
and
5. Adjectives in
lofty.
as,
weak, cowardly, most of which,
fugitive ;
nine only.
stantives,
,
,- ,-
,, ,
,, ,&,
however, are feminine only.

Some are also neuter, except in the nominative and accusative ; as, cponaat
Eurip.
Some are masculine only
as,
old,
and adjectives
in
and
of the
first
declen-
noble ;
voluntary.
neuter, which is deficient, is expressed by another adjective ; thus, for the neuter of
is used.
sion,
The
IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES.
and
have only the nominative, accusative, and
vocative, masculine and neuter, of the singular, and borrow
the other cases from the obsolete
, ov, and
,
,
,
,
-,
, ,
-,
,,
,
, ,.
thus,
great.
.
G.
D.
.
V.
Sing.
ij,
-,
-^
,
.,
,,
-,
,,
. ,.
much.
Sing.
G.
D.
r^g
>
V.
50
ADJECTIVE.
-, ^ .,
. -,
-, ^
. -,
-,
Dual.
. . V.
G. D.
N. A. V.
G. D.
-oiVj
-,
-, ,
Dual.
ay
Plur.
G.
D.
ojv
V.
Plur.
-,
-,
. -,
-,
,
N.
af
ai i
ocg }
ag t
ay
at,
a.
The
and
uv f
(bp
f
}
,'
}
throughout like
whence comes
in the nominative plural;
poets decline
in the genitive;
in the genitive
the form
ai,
V.
,
,
,
,
,,, ,
Ohs.
-oi,
G.
D.
aig y
alv y otv,
in the accusative.
Sometimes
also
used.
is
has from this form only

safe, contracted from
masculine and feminine,
neuter and accusative,
accusative plural
rarely the feminine singular and neuter plural
All the rest is from

, op.
?,
,
,
.
,
,,
.
,
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
,
.
,,
.,
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
1. The comparative and superlative are generally

to the positive
and
formed by adding
as,
happy,
kindly disposed,
Adjectives in
the neuter
as,
,,,
and
add
broad,
poor,
to
black,
makes
but
-,
So
false,
and
to
add
and
Adjectives in
moreover
in
those
of the nominative plural,
prudent,
as,
changing
into
stupid,
But
makes
^,
ripe,
if
old,
those in
drop
Adjectives in
the penultima be short, change
and
fat,
drop
into
and,
as,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
.
,
,
COMPARISON.
51
/(fee, graceful,
renowned,
strong,
wise,
pure,
,.
, ,.
,& ,
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,.
Some
Obs.
change
, or
&,
adjectives in
into ai,
drop
in
2.
Some
in the midst,
without envy,
and
adjectives in
and
as,
change these
comparative
for the
^,
sweet,
So
base,
&c,
The form
ever,
is
m the
&-
abundant,
ancient,
as,
terminations into
and superlative
liberal,
loquacious,
Some
particularly in the Attic writers,
as,
and
also used in all these adjectives,
comparative of
old,
which sometimes have
and
and
how-
and always
swift,
in
the superlative.
& , &., &,,,

Obs. Some comparatives in
ceding consonant, into
or
sweet,
'
for
change the , with the pre-
deep,
as,
for
swift,
should properly be
'
,
,
,
,
,
&,
good
bad,
.
,
,
,
,
, .
j
^,
small,
.
.
for
IRREGULAR COMPARISON.
for
little,
\.
since
it
52
,
,
,
.
,
.
,
,
,
.
,
,
.
,
.
,
.
,
.
,
,
,
.
,
{,
, .
ADJECTIVE.
fair,
long,
,
,
,
,
,
great,
small,
few,
many,
easy,
agreeable,
,
,
.
,
,
, .
friendly.
.
.
,
.
, .
,
.
,
,
$,
,
,
,
\.
.
,
,
,
.
.
, ,.
, ,
.
,
,
.
,
,
.
.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
Comparisons from the Comparative Degree.
From
the Superlative.
From
&>,
",
Substantives.
&\.
*,
From a Pronoun.
ipse,
ipsissimus,
.
,
,
, , ,.
, .
,
.
,
, ^,
From
From a
Verbs.
Participle.
53
NUMERALS.
,
,
.
.
,
,
,
.
,.
,
,
,.
From Adverbs.
,
,
,
,
,
tvboVf
From
,
Ini,
,
,
.
,
.
,
,.
, ^, ^.
^,
,
,
?.
. .
Prepositions,
(by syncope and contraction)

(by syncope)
NUMERALS.
CARDINAL NUMBERS.
The
first cardinal numbers are declined

the rest, as
and the decimals, as far as a hundred, are indeclinThe round numbers above a hundred are again
four
far as ten,
able.
declinable, like the adjectives
as,
-, ,
a, tico
hun-
dred, &LC.
,
,
one, sing.
G. kvbg y
D. hi,
A. ha,
,
,
,
,
%v,
kvbg,
..
or
hi,
h.
two, dual.
G. D.
or
,, ,
,
,.
.,
three, plur.
two, plur.
G.
,
.
,-,-,
D.
four, plur.
G.
D.
G.
D.
-,
-,
,
.
,&., , ,, , , - ,&
.
Obs.l. Like
are declined
&C.
and
and
ing the negative signification.

and
have
but
it
is
its
compounds
&C.
as,
Aristotle Uses
are often used for the sake of increasfrom its nature, can have no plural,
and
Ohs. 2. Ji'o is the Attic mode of writing; in Homer and Herodotus

is the form for the genitive and dative.
is indeclinable.
Jvtty
hardly found except in the genitive. "Jjutpte accords with
5*
54
,
,
,
,
ADJECTIVE.
The cardinal numbers are
,
,
,
one.
two.
,
,
*,
three.
four.
five.
six.
Hf
,
,
,
,
,
,
ten.
eleven.
twelve.
thirteen.
,
,
,
fourteen.
fifteen.
a hundred,
two hundred,
three hundred,
four hundred,
five hundred,
six hundred.
#
seven hundred,
eight hundred,
nine hundred,
a thousand,
two thousand,
ten thousand,
twenty thousand,
a hundred thousand.
a thousand thousand.
,
,
,
,
,
-,
,
,
,
, .,
thirty.
less
seventy,
eighty,
ninety.
,
,
twenty.
twenty-one, 8fC
From ten to
commonly
Obs. 1.
\-,
sixteen.
seventeen.
eighteen.
nineteen.
, &C.
forty.
fiftysixty,
,
, ,,
-,
,
,
-,
,
-,
,
-,
,
-,
,
-,, ,
-,
,
-,
,
-, , ,
,
seven.
eight.
nine.
,
,
,
above;
twenty, the
'.,
numbers are usually expressed as

&c. The remaining com-
are usually written separately ; and when the smaller

number precedes, they are connected by
when it follows, commonly
or
not; as,
pound numbers
, , ,
The numbers compounded with eight and nine are more freas,
quently expressed by a circumlocution with the participle of
twenty years, wanting one, that is, nine
or
Obs. 2.
teen years.
ORDINAL AND OTHER DERIVATIVE NUMBERS.

1.
The
,
,
,
like
,
,
',
',
,
',
,
ordinal
or
,
,
,
,
numbers end always
,
,
,
,
first,
second,
third,
fourth,
fifth,
sixth,
seventh,
eighth,
ninth,
tenth,
eleventh,
twelfth,
thirteenth,
&C, fourteenth,
twentieth.
in
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
, and
&C
twenty-first, SfC.
thirtieth,
fortieth,
fiftieth,
sixtieth,
seventieth,
eightieth,
ninetieth,
hundredth,
two hundredth,
&C.
&C.
8fC.
are declined
three hundredth, fye.

thousandth,
two thousandth, SfC.
ten thousandth,
twenty thousandth.
also in compound numbers the smaller

or follows without it, as,
The numeral
2.
many
times
four
times,
The
3.
are
&c.
,,
,
The
5.
day
are
6.
How \
simple;
triple, or three-fold, &,c.
which express how many

twice as
than another, are
thrice as much, &c.
numerals which answer to the question On what
on the second day ;
on the third
or those
is
day, &c.
pre-
or
,
,
numbers are
multiplicative
times more one thing

;
number usually
adverbs, which answer to the question

once ; dig, twice ;
thrice ;
double, or two-fold ;
4. The proportionals,
much
,?
, ,
, ,
Here
Obs.
cedes with
55
NUMERALS.
The numbers
,,
as substantives are
unity
as
all
formed in ag t gen
&c.
METHODS OF REPRESENTING NUMBERS.

The Greeks represented numbers by
the letters of the alphabet,

for this purpose were divided into three classes, the first expressing
the class of units, the second that of tens, and the third that of hundreds.
But as each class contained only eight letters, 6 was denoted by , called
1.
which
'
90 by *? called
was placed over the numeral
Tens.
Units.
1.
2.
'
'
3.
'
4.
5.
'
6.
'
'
7.
8.
&
and 900 by ^, called
letters in order to distinguish
9.
A mark
them.
Hundreds.
'
10.
20.
30.
40.
50.
60.
70.
80.
90.
100.
200.
300.
400.
500.
600.
700.
</
1
'
'
'
'
800.
900.
ty
'
Thousands were expressed by writing the mark under the letters ; thus,
1830.
a is 1,000 , 40,000 xp, 700,000 ;
2. Another method consisted in denoting 1 by J, 5 by 77, 10 by J, 100
by H, 1,000 by X, and 10,000 by M, these letters being respectively the
Jlxa,
and
Each
initials of "la for Mia,
;
,, .
of these letters, with the exception of 77, may be repeated four times
20,000 ; J J II, 22. When they are enthus, 7777, 4 ; J J J, 30 ;
closed in a 77, their value is five times greater ; thus,
fx], 5,000;
, 50
MM,
2M77, 55; pi"//, 60.

3. Sometimes numbers were represented by
their alphabetical order
so that a denoted 1
the letters according to
,2
and
, 24.
56
PRONOUN.
PRONOUNS.
PERSONAL.
,;
,
ol,
RELATIVE.
?,
thou;
of him.
o,
DEMONSTRATIVE.
,
-,
, , ,,
,
-bg,
abg,
abv, thy
g or h-bg,
-og,
-,
bv, his
ov, our,
of us two;
your, of you two;
ov, our ;
-og, a, ov,
-,^,,
your
,
iy&, I.
.
G.
D.
Si " g *
or
or
uwir*
J
,
.,
thou.
,,
G. ol,
D. ol,
A. 1
Dual.
G.
D.
Plur.
0?,
.
G.
0,
>
Sing.
,
% ,
\,
ol,
">
. *, ^, .
Dual.
..
,
G.D.
Plur.
Plur.
?,
G.
D.
Afabg and
like the article
of one another.
, , . . ,., ,,.
,
.,
.
.,
,
,
,,,
,
,
,
,,
..
. ?.
.,
G.O.vibi'v,vcuv. G.O.cq>ia'iv f aq)(5v. G.D.uqxutv,
,
,
,
any ;
some one.
of him.
Sing.
N.
G.
D.
.
Dual.
Dual.
. . , ,..
INDEFINITE
ol,
Sing.
,
,
,
. ..
Plur.
RECIPROCAL.
-og, a, ov,
-og, a, ov,
that
,,,
my ;
bv,
he, she, it
POSSESSIVE.
-bg,
who.
?,
&,
5.
G.
D.
G.
D.
are declined like the relative
?, and
OJs.
has the signification of the English seZf; or else, in the oblique cases, after other words in the clause, it is used for the simple pronoun of the third person; but when it is immediately preceded by the article, it signifies the same.
In this last sense it is often compounded with
the article, as
and then the neufor
for
for to
ter ends in ov as well as in o, as
arid
, ,,
,
,
,
,
PRONOUNS.
this, is declined,
57
and prefixes
like the
article; thus,
,
, ,
,
Sing.
,
.
,
.
,
,
,
, .
,
,
. ,
,
, ,
,
,
,
N.
G.
D.
A.
Dual.
N. A.
G D.
Plur.
N.
G.
D.
A.
,
,
,,
,.
Obs. The Attics add to the demonstratives, to give a stronger emphain which case it is long, receives the accent, and absorbs the short
vowel at the end of the word to which it is affixed ; as,
this here,
sis,
from
from
from
and
instead of t, are annexed
For the same purpose
which end with a short vowel; as,
hicce,
From
self;
of thyself';
of himself.
-,
,,
-,
-, , )
Sing.
Plur.
&-, , ,
D. -, , ,
.
, .
G.
-,
if,
6.
In like manner are declined

singular
the accusative singular of the personal pronouns and

compounded the reflective pronouns
of my-
are
G.
D.
A.
number
,,
and
only.
Obs. 2.
is
The
latter is
and
often found, by crasis, for
used by the Attics in the three persons.
,
Sing.
N.
G.
D.
A.
,
,
,
.
Obs. 1. Homer never uses these reflectives, but

or
&c.
that there.
to the cases
..
ai
,
for
any.
Dual.
G. D.
in the
,
.
.
G.
D.
,, .
Plur.
,.
%
58
VERR.
Obs.
Tig,
1.
, who, what
? is
marked with an acute accent, and always
,
,
. *
, , , , ., , ,
on the
first syllable.
and
Obs. 2.
and
for
and
are often used for
and
also
and in the neuter plural
Ion. aooa, instead of
and
are often joined, and signify whosoever ; thus, Wic,

is often separated from
with or without
a comma, to be distinguished from the conjunction '. Also
are used for
and
Ion.
for
Obs. 3.
/rtg,
on, &c.
In the neuter
,
\
Ouv, with the signification of the Latin cunque, is added to

relatives, and takes the accent, as
whosoever.
Obs. 4.
,
.,
,
,
,
,
,
..
compound
some one.
of one another.
Sing.
Plur.
G.
or
or
D.
.
,
.
Juva
is
, ?,
.
Dual.
G. D.
G.
Obs.
sc.
>,
-, ,
-, ,
. L
,
.
Plur.
^-^,
^-?,
G.
D.
or
sometimes indeclinable
oiv y
as,
fofva,
VERB.
Verbs are of two kinds, transitive
,
,
and
intransitive
or
neuter.
an action which
transitive verb expresses
the agent
upon some object;
as,
,I
love
is
exerted by
you
wrote a letter.
An intransitive verb expresses an action or state, which is
as,
I run ;
not communicated to any other object
he
he sleeps.
Transitive verbs have three voices, active, passive,

; intransitive verbs have properly an ac-
and middle
tive voice only.
The
, ,
active voice signifies action or condition
they sleep.
strike
you
as,
he goes ;
The passive voice signifies passion, suffering, or

I am struck.
the receiving of an action as,
;
The middle
voice expresses an action that
upon the agent

But more particularly,
flected
as,
I strike
re-
is
myself.
,
, , .^,,,/&,
-
1. The middle voice signifies what we do to ourselves, and

equivalent to the active joined with the corresponding reflecthe same
tive pronoun
as,
I wash another, but
they anointed
as
I wash myself ;
they anointed
him, but
the same as
' ^,,
/,
&,
is
to restrain,
themselves ;
to restrain one's self, to refrain.
In many verbs the middle receives a simple intransitive signification
to put to
as,
I send,
I send myself, i. e. I travel ;
rest,
to put one's self to rest, i. e. to cease.
,,
,
,
,
But more frequently the middle signifies what we do for

and is equivalent to the active with the dative of the
reflective pronoun
as, ri\v
he subjected the
2.
ourselves,
,
,
, ,
&
& ,
;
being defined to whom,

he subjected the Medes to himself;
to put
a breastplate on another,
to put a breastplate on one's self;
to watch any one, to observe,
to observe any thing to one's advantage in order
to avoid it.
Hence the middle is used to signify what we do to any thing that beisland, without
its
longs or relates to us
'
as,
&,
to tear one's
thing to any one for a ransom,

belongs to one.
3.
The middle
r)
be
made
taught;
to tear the
own garment;
to receive
garment of another,
to return any
back any thing that
what we cause to be done as,

Panthea caused a breastplate to
often signifies
-,,
they
cause their sons to be
caused a table to be set.

Hence
he accused me, properly he caused my
name, as that of an accused person, to be taken down in
writing by the magistrate before whom the process is carried.
The
'
he
,
&,
passive has frequently the signification of the middle; as,

by this deed you have made us your
what accusation has he brought
;
?
we have deprived them of their
arms ;
7 oav, they had conveyed
their provisions into their strong holds;
how profia&vv
foundly you slept!
he lay down on his back;
they will fear us.
Obs. 1.
iua;
friends;
against you
&,',
,
',
>'&,
&!
Obs. 2. The middle is often used passively

as, ?;
his country was subverted ; especially the future middle; as,r7r' iuov
he shall be honored by me ;
ino
ov
whence they will not be hurt by the cavalry.
&
60
VERB.
, ,,
, ,,
Many
verbs, called deponent, have a passive or middle form,

transitive, some intransitive) signification;
to receive ;
to come.
and an active (some

as,
Some
present
verbs are deponent in the future, and active in the

as,
to hear ;
to be silent.
Some deponents
Obs.
are also used passively;

such a deed has been done by me ;
'
as,
&,
(wfovos
seen by no one.
he
was
MODES.
The modes
tive,
are five
imperative,
The
indicative
and
indicative, optative, subjunc-
infinitive.
used when any thing
is
is
to
be represented
as actually existing or happening, and as any thing independent

of the thought and ideas of the speaker.
Hence it is put in
many
cases where in Latin the subjunctive

see if
used
is
you know who he
is,
as,
an
scias quis
sit.
The optative and subjunctive represent an action not in its

actual relation, but rather in its reference to the ideas of the
speaker, the subjunctive only expressing this more determinately and certainly than the optative.
&,
The
optative
is
used alone to express a wish
may I instantly
die
as,
may
you be more fortunate than your father. The subjunctive is

as,
used alone only in exhortations in the first person
let us return home: and in dubious
let us go ;
preor
questions, partly with and partly without
whither shcdl I go ?
ceding as,
;
whence will
shall I tell you the cause 1
;
will you that we
you that I begin ?
;
;
' &,
;
-&
remain here
'
&
',
--
,,
In dependent members of sentences, the optative is commonly used when the verb in the preceding member denotes
past time, and the subjunctive when it denotes present or
I knew not
as,
or
future
or
whither I should turn myself;
I know
not whither
(,
I shall
turn myself.
MODES AND TENSES.
61
The optative is frequently used in relating the words or

sentiments of another, without representing him as speaking
as,
in the first person
I
saw.
he told
me
that the
way
led to the city which
Obs. When any one relates the words, or describes the sentiments of
another, not representing him as speaking in the first person, the relator
is said to use the oratio obliqua.
,
,
&
The imperative is sometimes used by the Attic poets in a

as,
dependent member of a sentence after
Also the
do you Imoio what you have to do ? Soph.
;
future
often put for the imperative

divulge this to no one.
is
-'
as,
TENSES.
The
the present, the imperfect,

the first and second
aorists, the first and second futures, and, in the
passive, the paulo-post-future.
the
tenses are nine
perfect,
Time
past,
the
pluperfect,
in general is divided into three parts, the present, the
and the
future.
The
,
,
present tense, besides its proper use, is put for the

imperfect and aorists in an animated narration, which represents what took place as present
as,
letter he
this
gives to a trusty person, as he thought, who, having
it, shows it to Cyrus.

Past time is expressed in different ways by the imperfect,
received
perfect, pluperfect,
and
aorists.
The
imperfect expresses an action which was going on, but

not completed, at some former time
as,
I was writ'
ing.
Hence it often has the signification of an action frequently repeated
as,
Milo the Crotonian was accustomed to eat twenty mina
;
of flesh.
The perfect expresses an action which has taken place at a

previous time, but which is connected, either in itself, or its
consequences, or its accompanying circumstances, with the
present
as, y
which signifies not only / have written,
but it shows also the continued existence of the writing.
The pluperfect shows an action which is past, but which
still continued, either by itself or in its following and accom;
;;
62
,, ,
VERB.
panying circumstances, during another action which

as,
is past
perfect is often put for the
case the pluperfect has the sense of the im-
I had
present, in which
perfect ; as,
The
icritten.
The
Ifear, Ifeared.
aorists express simply a past action, without
any referany other past time as,

which
signifies I wrote, but it does not determine whether the writing
be still existing or not. Hence they often denote the customary performance of an action
as,
a short time commonly dissolves the connections of the wicked.
Future time is expressed in different ways by the futures
and paulo-post-future.
ence
to the present, or
The
after
futures express an
as,
action that
is
&
to take place here-
I shall write.
The paulo-post-future shows that an action will be

as,
pleted at some future time
the state will be perfectly organized.
;
com-
There is also a periphrastic future, made up of

and
the infinitive of the present, future, or aorists, corresponding to
the Latin participle in rus joined with the verb sum, and denoting that one is about to do something, or intends to do it
he is about to be put to death ;
as,
I intended to say this ;
as,
which I am to suffer. The infinitive is often understood
sc.
you slew
yourself, and meant to slay us also.
,&,
&,
;
Obs. The first and second aorist differ not in signification. Few verbs
have them both, and the first is found much oftener than the second.
The same may be observed of the first and second futures.
CONJUGATION.
There are four conjugations of baryton verbs,

by their characteristics.
The characteristic is the letter which immediate-
distinguished
ly precedes
nr,
,,
The
or
in
the former letter
is
present
tense.
In
the characteristic.
in the future, and before a

characteristic of each of
the
also
letter before
in the perfect,
the
is
these tenses respectively.
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CONJUGATIONS.
63
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE
First Conjugation.
,
,
,
,
,
,
, ,
,
\,
,
Pres.
*.
0,
Fut.
Perf.
to delight.
to
pour out
to write,
to strike.
Second Conjugation.
, ,
, ,
,
,
,
,
,
, ,,
, ,
,
Fut.
Pres.
\,
\,
Perf.
\,
,
'
>
\,
to plait,
to say.
to moisten.
or
to dig.
Third Conjugation.
Fut.
Pres.
Perf.
'
to finish,
to sing,
<5,
to
{,
pure, as
persuade,
to say.
to
honor.
Fourth Conjugation.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
, ,
,
Fut.
Pres.
"
,
,
>
<
,
,
,
Perf.
<
/
V
V
s
\
<
J
to play.
to distribute,
to
to
show.
sow.
to cut.
ACTIVE VOICE.
SYNOPSIS OF THE MODES AND TENSES OF THE
First Conjugation.
Indie.
Present
Imperf.
1st Fut.
1st Aor
Perfect
Pluperf
2d Aor.
2d Fut.
'
Imper.
Optat.
Subjunc.
Infin.
Part.
<;
^*
**
64
VERB.
Second Conjugation.
Indie.
Present
Imperf.
1st Fut.
1st Aor.
Perfect
Pluperf.
2d Aor.
Imperat.
Optat.
Subj.
,
(
2d Fut.
'
Infin.
\
Part.
Third Conjugation.
Present
Imperf.
1st Fut.
1st
Aor.
Perfect
Pluperf.
2d Aor.
2d Fut.
Fow tk
Conjugation.
Present
Imperf.
1st Fut.
Aor.
Perfect
1st
Pluperf.
2d Aor.
2d Fut.
FIRST CONJUGATION.
INDICATIVE MODE.
S.
,
,
, ,
,
,
>7
, ,
I strike,
D.
Present Tense,
thou strikest,
you two
we
strike,
you
Imperfect,
S.
D.
strike,
strike,
J was
>
^
,
I strike.
he strikes,
they two striae,
they strike.
,
,
,
striking.
CONJUGATION OF THE ACTIVE VOICE.
s.
D.
P.
,
,
,
,
, .
I shall strike.
First Future,
,
,
,
,
, , .,
I struck.
First Aorist,
s.
D.
P.
,
,
,
,
,
&, , .
Perfect,
s.
D.
P.
,
,
,
,
,
,
I have
, ,
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
, .
,
,
,
, ,
.
,
,
.
.
, <:
Pluperfect,
s.
D.
P.
Second
S.
D.
P.
I had struck.
Aorist,
Second Future,
S.
D.
P.
struck.
7"
I struck.
shall strike.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
Present, strike. - ~ ,
,
,
,
,
,
.
First Aorist, strike.
D.
'
65
66
VERB.
,
,
,
, .
Perfect, have struck.
S.
D.
P.
,
,
,
, .
Second Aorist,
S.
D.
P.
strike.
,
,
,
,
,
, , .
*,
,
,
,
, , ,
.
OPTATIVE MODE.
Present,
S/
D.
P.
First Future,
S.
D.
/ mighty
I might,
D.
D.
/ might,
/ might,
,
,
,
,
Second Aorist,
S.
D.
P.
could, would, or should have struck.
I might,
Second Future, 1 might,

S.
D.
could, would, or should strike.
,
,
,
,
, , .
Perfect,
S.
could, would, or should hereafter strike.
,,
,
,
,
,
, , .
First Aorist,
S.
could, mould, or should strike.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
.
,
,
.
could, would, or should strike.

linoi,
could, would, or should hereafter strike,
67

SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
s.
D.
P.
s.
D.
P.
s.
P.
s.
strike.
,
, ,
, ,
,
,
, ,
, ,
,
J may
},
,
.
strike.
^,
J may
],
have struck.
Second
Ik
J may
First Aorist,
Perfect,
D.
,
.
,
,
,
, ,
Present,
Aorist,
I may
strike.
],
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
.
],
,
.
7**}*
INFINITIVE MODE.
Present,
First Future,
First Aorist,
Perfect,
Second Aorist,
Second Future,
N.
G.
,
,
,
,
to strike.
to be
going
have struck,
to
have struck,
to
have struck.
to be
going
G.
to strike.
, ,
,
PARTICIPLES.
Present, striking.
, .
,
First Future, going to strike.
N.
to strike,
to
&.C
68
VERB.
,
,
, .
, , ,
,
,
,
,
First Aorist, having struck.
N.
Perfect, having struck.
N.
G.
,
,
,
,
Second
N.
G.
, ,.
,
, .
Aorist, having struck.
Second Future, going
N.
G.
to strike.
SECOND CONJUGATION.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Pres.
mp
i
1st F.
1st
A.
Perf.
Plup.
2d A.
2dF.
S ing.
,
,
,
|-
,
,
iiunXiv-
'
W,
>
,
,
, ,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
, ,,,
,
(,
,
, ,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
Dual.
,
h
,
h
,
,
h
,
&TOV,
Plur.
.
.
.
.
.
.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
,
,
,
,
,
.
, (,
(,
, ,
Dual.
Sing.
Pres.
1st
(,
. \
. \
Perf.
2d
\-
.
.
(.
,
&,
,
, (.
Plur.
OPTATIVE MODE.
Pres.
1st F.
.
2d .
1st
Perf.
2dF.
/-
,
,
,
,
,
,
Sing.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,.
Dual.
OtTOV,
OITOV,
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
,
,
, ,, .
Plur.
015V

SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
\-
Pres.
1st
*'-
A.
Perf.
2d A.
,
,
,
,
>
>
>
,
>>
&J
VS>
>
.
.
.
IstF.
.
2d .
1st
Perf.
,
- ,
\- ,
- ,,,
-
Pres.
IstF.
1st
.
.
Perf.
vat.
2dF.
,
,
,
,
Plur.
PARTICIPLE.
INFINITIVE.
Pres.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
Dual.
Sing.
2d
2dF.
,
,
,
,
,
via,
6.
THIRD CONJUGATION.
INDICATIVE MODE.
- ,
-
Imp.
IstF.
1st A.
Perf.
Plup.
2d A.
2dF.
,
,
,
,
,
,
, ,
,
,
,
,
,
>
h
h
>
<*,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
Dual.
Sing.
Pres.
,
,
,
els,
,
, ,,, ..
,
,
, ,,, ..*
,
, ..
, ,
,
Plur.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
Sing.
Pres.
.
2d .
1st
Perf.
>
.
,
>
,
,
, ,
,
,
,
,
,
,
Dual.
,
Plur.
,
, (.
,
.
,
OPTATIVE MODE.
,
,
,
,
- ,
Sing.
Pres.
IstF.
1st
Perf.
2d
2dF.
Of/,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
OITOV)
,
,
',
,
,
,
Dual.
,
,
,
,
,
,
Plur.
,
,
,
,
,
otre>
oXsv
7U
VERB.
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
Pres.
1st
A.
,
,
,
,
Perf.
2d A.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
Dual.
Sing.
?>
}Kt
0>
W>
/>
Jfi>
>
..
.
.
Perf.
2d .
IstF.
.
Perf.
2d .
.
.
2dF.
Pres.
1st
,
, .
,
,
Plur.
PARTICIPLE.
INFINITIVE.
Pres.
1st F.
,
,
,
,
1st
7110-
2dF.
,
,
,
,
,
.
,
, , .
, , ..
,
.
,
OV.
FOURTH CONJUGATION.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Sing.
Pres.
Imp.
1st F.
1st
A.
Perf.
Plup.
2d A.
2dF.
,
,
, ,
, ,
- ,, ,
,
,
,
,
>
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
, ,
,
,,
Dual.
,,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,,
}
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
, ,,,
,
,,
Plur.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
.
. -
1st
*,
Perf.
2d
,
,
,
,
,
, ,
,
,
,
,
,
Dual.
Sing.
Pres.
,
,
,
,
,
,
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
lur.
OPTATIVE MODE.
,
- ,
. - ,
,
. - ,
- ,
Sing.
Pres.
IstF.
1st
Perf.
2d
2dF.
,
,
,
,
,
,
, ,,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
Dual.
OITOV,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,,
Plur.
.
.
.
.
.
.
71
AUGMENT.
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
. . -
US,
lst
v>
J?i;
Ih
Perf.
us.
lb
2d
PSj
to
.
.
.
.
,
.
PARTICIPLE.
INFINITIVE.
.
Perf.
2d .
1st
2dF.
Plur.
Dual.
Pres.
Pres.
1st F.
, .
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
,
, , ,, ..
- ,, ,
, ..
'
. - , , .
,
. , ,
- , ,.
,
,
,
,
Siiu
Pres.
IstF.
1st
Perf.
2d
via,
6.
6.
2dF.
OBSERVATIONS.
viz. all tenses of

person plural ends in
the active, the aorists of the passive, and the perfect and pluperfect of the
1.
Those tenses whose
middle voices, have no
first
first
person dual.
imperfect, pluperfect, and aorists of the indicative, and all the

tenses of the optative, in all the voices, form the second person dual in
The remaining tenses of the indicative, and all
ov, and the third in
those of the subjunctive, form the third person dual like the second, and
or
the tjiird person plural in
2.
The
3.
In verbs of the fourth conjugation, and in the Attic and Doric
dialects, the first future
is
the
same
as the second,
when
there
is
no
change in the penultima.

4.
fect
In the ancient Greek writers, the more

instead of
is
common form
of the pluper-
,
,
,,
.
, ,,
5. The Attics frequently use the iEolic form of the first aorist, but only
in the second and third person singular, and the third plural.
S.
D.
6. The Greek tenses cannot be expressed with much precision in

English, their use and signification depending on the particles joined
with them.
AUGMENT.
Verbs are augmented in the imperfect and aorists

of the indicative, and in the perfect, pluperfect, and
paulo-post-future of all the modes.
The augment is of two kinds the syllabic, when
the verb begins with a consonant; the temporal,
when it begins with a vowel.
;
Obs. The syllabic

the temporal, because
is
it
so called because it adds a syllable to the word

increases the time or quantity of the syllable.
;
;
;
72
,
,
.
,
,,
VERB.
The
I.
and
fect
syllabic
aorists
augment
prefixed to the imper-
is
as,
,,
,
.
If the verb begin
with
doubled after
throw : except
among the poets, where it sometimes remains single
as,
to sew.
the
augment
as,
this letter is
to
In the perfect, pluperfect, and paulo-post-future,

the first consonant of the verb is repeated before
the syllabic augment, which is called the reduplication
as,
prefixes the syllabic
and the pluperfect also
augment
to the reduplication
with a rough mute,

the corresponding smooth is
If the verb begin
,
,,,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
, , , &. , , ,
,
, ,. , , , ,
,,
as,
the
in
used
reduplication
as,
to love.
Exc. 1. Verbs beginning with a double consonant, with

joined to a mute, or with
do not receive the reduplication,
as,
to seek
but the syllabic augment only
play ;
to sow ;
So verbs beginning with , when
to know.
doubled after the augment; as,
to throw.
to
also
is
So
Exc. 2. The following verbs sometimes take the reduplicaand sometimes neglect it:
tion,
-&
and
Also
II.
In verbs beginning with
, ,
into
and
the temporal augment changes a and
of the diphthongs
as,
subscribing the
into
to hope
to hear ;
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,,
,,
,
to
name;
to increase
The
\,
,
;
to lift
temporal augment remains the same in
the augmented tenses.
up;
to dwell.
all
,
,
,
,
,
.
&,
.
, , , , ,., ,
, ,
,
,
73
AUGMENT.
Exc.
',
The compounds
1.
of
;,
To
',
these add
and
bird,
wine,
rudder, omit the augment ; as,

(though the two last sometimes change
into
ola-
Also
,,
', , , , ,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,,,
,
,
,
,
,,
, ., ,
which are sometimes augmented, particularly

into
Exc. 2. The following verbs change
&, &,
(which retains the augment through
to
go ;
Exc.
all
the modes),
as,
',
3.
Verbs beginning with
',
to have.
fects
,
, .,
,,
change
into
as,
In the same manner the pluperare formed from the Attic perfects
to feast.
remain unchanged at the begin, ,

Obs.
}
short becoming long in the tenses
ning of a word, t and
to echo, sound;
susceptible of augmentation; as,
to push,
But
to supplicate.
',
and
to buy,
%\,
&,
take the syllabic augment
thus,
,
&,
', , ,
,
,
,^
,
,
,
,
^ , ,
?\
,
,
,
,
,
,, ,,,
Exceptions by the Attic Dialect.
The
and
are changed into
as,
and the syllabic augment into
Att.
by sync,
conjecture;
1.
diphthongs
spectively,
to
fl
and
re-
to
know;
to
pray
to be
about to do
any thing.
2.
fixed
'
The
to
for
taken
to see
3.
augment is used for the temporal, or preand takes the breathing of the present as,
to be
to take;
for
to break;
for
to say ;
for
syllabic
it,
,
%,
',
for
to be like.
In verbs beginning with a short,
or o, the
of the present are prefixed to the perfect

to collect;
to dig;
beginning with , which is
plication is always short ;
incline, fall.
%\,
two
first letters
as,
vomit;
to smell.
Also in one
changed into , because this reduas,
, ^,
to
to bend,
If the perfect thus augmented have more than three syllables,

the long vowel of the third is changed into the corresponding
&,&,
,
,
^,
,
&,
,
,,
,, ,,, ,
, . &, &.
74
VERB.
short one
as,
make ready
prop, makes
to
But
hear.
guish
Obs.
4.
into
it
from
grind;
to
%\,
of the verb
come;
^,
to contend.
,,
,
as,
Except
to
to distin-
pluperfect of these forms admits a temporal
The
share,
to
The
to
.&,
anoint;
to
augment
as,
from
reduplications of the perfect

to take ;
it is fated.
and
are
to receive
changed
for one's
Exceptions by the Ionic Dialect.
, &&
The
reduplication of the perfect is used in the second

ad other tenses, and continues through all the modes
/#,
for
for
to persuade ;
1.
aorist
as,
to hear
for
persuade, to trust, to obey.
to
-, &, &, &,

&,
2.
The augment
the perfect
to receive
as,
from
, ,,
omitted, as
,
for
),
for
The two
is
for
to
eat;
from
to take
also the reduplication of
is
from
for
for
from
to hose.
of the present are sometimes preas,

fixed to the aorists, after the augment has been removed
for
from
to fit.
formed from
3.
first letters
, ,
,, , ,,
THE AUGMENT OF COMPOUND VERES.
Verbs compounded with prepositions take the

I.
augment between the preposition and the verb as,
;
to
bring
to.
,
,
, ,.^
, , , ''
Exc. 1. The following verbs compounded with prepositions

1. Such as have the sigtake the augment at the beginning.
as,
nification of their simples
&lc.
2. Some whose simples are not in
but many of these receive
&,c.
as,
use
&, &,
,
,
&,
,
, ), ), ), ), ),.
it
in the
Exc.
middle
2.
&C. 3.
Some compounds take
or in the middle
&c.
as,
Others take
the
and
augment
as,
it
at the
at the
beginning
beginning and in the middle
Several in the beginning, middle, or both; as,
as,
&C.
75
FORMATION OF TENSES IN THE ACTIVE VOICE.

Obs.
1.
,&,
, .,
and
. &,
4&
preposition in composition before a vowel loses
the final vowel; as,
Except
to restrain, for
and sometimes
as,
not
is often conIn nob the

to place around.
from
for
as,
tracted with the syllabic augment into
If the initial vowel of tne
from
to foretell.
and of the prepoverb have a rough breathing, the smooth
ta&e away,
and &
as,
sition are changed into
-
^,
,,
,
and
from
Obs.
2.
resume
it
>,
'> and
which change
before a consonant,
to inscribe.
before a vowel
as,
as,
always drops the
before , and sometimes before
j to discuss, to examine.
Obs. 3. If the verb begin with , and the preposition end
to floiv upon.
is doubled
as,
with a vowel,
;
,
,
,
,
,
,,
;
Verbs compounded with any other part of
II.
speech take the augment at the beginning

desert
to
philosophize
to
as,
^C
to be unfortunate.
Compounds of
and
middle, when these particles are
Exc.
take the augment in the

followed by a vowel or diph-
thong susceptible of augmentation
as,
to benefit.
FORMATION OF THE TENSES
^/
The
imperfect
changing
),
The
to
Imperfect,
changing the
formed from the present, by

and prefixing the augment
as,
is
into ov,
first
THE ACTIVE VOICE.
IN
future
First Future.
is
in the 1st conjugation, into \\> as,
in the 2d
into
as,
in the
3d
,.
,
,
formed from the present, by
last syllable,
into
as,
-,
4th conjugation, by circumflexing the

syllable, and shortening the penultima
in the
and,
last
as,
;;
76
VERB.
, ,,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
, ., , , , ,
.
, ,,,, ,
Obs. 1. The penultima is shortened by dropping the second consonant,

and the second vowel of the diphthong, and shortening the doubtful vowel
as,
judge.
to
Some verbs in
tion, making the future in
Obs. 3. Some verbs in
Obs.
are of the third conjuga-
or
2.
as,
&,c.
,
,,
, ,
, ,
,
,
, ,, , ,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,, ,,,, ,
.
,,,,,, ,
.
,
,,
,
,
,
,
, ,, .
,,,
,,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
.
,
,
,,, .
. , ,
making
the future in
are of the second conjugation,
as,
&c.
Some make
and
the future in
One
&c.
Verbs in
and into
and
Verbs
S-,
or
and
To
retain a.
pure, with those in

these add
The
following have a and
Exc.
2.
), ,
,,
Some
verbs in
retain
as,
with verbs
and
are formed;
'
The
following have
and
are
whence
from which others in
uai,
pre-
and
whence
as,
&,
with verbs from which others in
formed
as,
to gild.
in
t,
as,
change a and into

to honor ;
to love;
Exc. 1.
ceded by
as,
and
in
as,
few in
as,
&&,
makes
and
by syncope
,,.
The
following
The
oao),
Verbs
3.
the future in
and
,,,
,
Exc.
as,
make
#,
make
not derived from nouns retain the
in
6lc.
,,
Attics drop a from the futures in

making a contraction in the three
and
former, but only circumflexing the
in the latter
IN
THE ACTIVE VOICE.
77
for
for
as,
for
for
,,
Many
in
,. ,
FORMATION OF TENSES
baryton verbs frequently have their futures
by the Attic and Ionic

from
from
The
, ',
dialects
as,
and
iEolics form the futures in
,
,
,,,
of the
conjugation by inserting a before

to excite.
to land ;
fourth
The
of
futures
and
, #', #', &.
change the smooth of the

breathing
thus,
.V
first
syllable into a
as,
rough
First Aorist.
.
,' , . ,
,,,
, &, ,
, ^,
, 7] ,
,
The
aorist is
first
by changing
as,
into a,
) ,
formed from the first future,

and prefixing the augment
The first aorist of the fourth conjugation lengthens the short penultima of the first future
a is
;
changed into
and
into
Some
ever,
in
which have at
the
first
as,
aorist
verbs,
in the present, take a
how-
long a
as,
to finish.
and
the last three
is
are formed from the present

from the perfect. The use of
rarely extended beyond the indica-
tive.
Some
drop the a of the future
or
or
7*
or
),
^,
as,
and
78
VERB.
Perfect,
The
perfect
is
formed from the
future,
first
,
,
,
by
prefixing the reduplication, and changing,

in the 1st conjugation,
2d
the 3d
in the
in
in the
as,
Obs. 1. The perfect in

future in ^5 as,
into
into
into
as,
as,
and
,,
^,
as,
..
into
,, ,^
4th
into
, formed from
presupposes a verb in
whence
the
,,,
,
, , ,, ,,,,
,, ,,,
(, ,
,,,
,, ,,
,
, , , , ,&,
,
Obs. 2.
from
In some perfects a syncope takes place
for
as,
to build.
change the
Dissyllables in
future into
as,
to
of the
send
to stretch.
and
Dissyllables in
drop the
as,
Other verbs
to ivash.
change
in
into
as,
to pollute.
In dissyllables of the first and second conjugation

into
the Attics change
as,
So
In some verbs of the
to bear.
to turn.
third conjugation the Ionians
, and shorten the preceding vowel, when it

to go
happens to be long as,
drop
In the participle
to be born.
the long vowel often remains
as,
&,,
to die.
Pluperfect.
The pluperfect is formed from the perfect by

changing a into
and prefixing the augment, if
as,
there be a reduplication
;;
.
,
,.
FORMATION OF TENSES IN THE ACTIVE VOICE.
no reduplication,
no change ; as,
If there be
augment of the perfect
the
Second
<V
suffers
Aorist.
,.
.
,
,
,,,,
,
,
,
,
, ,
&,
,
,
,,
, ,,
,
,
,
,
,
,
, ,,,
>,
.
,
,
,,
,
,
,
, ,), , ,,,
.,
,,
The
second aorist is formed from the present,

by changing
into ov, prefixing the augment, and
as,
shortening the penultima
;
The penultima
shortened
is
In consonants, by the omission of
1.
the last of
Some
two
liquids
verbs change
to
cover
as,
to
Others into
to dip;
to sew
to throw
to hide.
to connect;
bury ;
dig ;
to
and of
of the present into

hurt;
as,
as,
to
to tear.
Verbs
and
in
change these terminations
into yov, if of the second conjugation
of the third;
consume, and
but
to cool,
to shudder,
into
take
t,
and
to eat
to
to leave
strike,
into
Likewise
makes
and
makes
,,
into
at,
as,
to
to
cause to cease
to fly.
if
arrange;
make
In vowels, by the change of
2.
into
to
to say.
to
as,
burn
But
Dissyllables of the fourth conjugation change
a
polysyllables, into
as,
into
to
and
to assemble.
so
VERB.
,
,
, . ,,
, ,, ,
In dissyllables,
preceded or followed by a liquid
changed into a
is
as,
to flay.
But
to see,
to burn, retain the
otqco,
to say,
and
to cut,
makes
and
Verbs in
into ov
and
change these terminations
as,
to
to
bellow
sound, to roar.
, ,
,
,
.,
Obs. 1. In some verbs the penultima of the second aorist necessarily remains long, particularly in dissyllables which take the temporal augment
as,
ijdov, to sing.
So also where the penultima is long by position ;
as,
to seize.
But
in
place to preserve the analogy ; thus,

poetry ;
to see, to regard,
Obs. 2.
in
of these a transposition takes
'
makes
to destroy,
The
following verbs have no second aorist

verbs in
and
after a vowel ; verbs in
,,,,,, ,
and
many
and many others
in
polysyllables in
polysyllables
from
being poetical.
Second Future.
The second
future
,.
is
by changing ov into
ping the augment as,
aorist
formed from the second

circumflexed, and drop-
PASSIVE VOICE.
SYNOPSIS OP THE MODES AND TENSES OF THE
First Conjugation.
Indie.
Pres.
Imp.
Perf.
up
~
E'
P.p.F.
1st
A.
1st
F.
2d A.
2dF.
Imper.
Optat.
Subjunc.
Part.
CONJUGATION OF THE PASSIVE VOICE.
'
.
,
*Indie.
Pres.
Imp.
Perf.
Piup.
P.
F.
81
Second Conjugation.
Imper.
A.
IstF.
2d A.
1st
Subjunc.
Optat.
,
-
Part.
Infin.
2dF.
Tliird Conjugation.
Pres.
Imp.
'
Perf.
Plup.
P.p.F.
1st A.
IstF.
2d A.
2dF.
Fourth Conjugation.
Pres.
Imp.
Perf.
Plup.
1st
IstF.
2d A.
2dF.
FIRST CONJUGATION.
INDICATIVE MODE.
,
& &,
& &
.
,
,
,
&
&, .& .
>
Present Tense,
s
D.
P.
,,
s.
P.
],
I was
struck.
ft
struck.
Imperfect,
D.
I am
&?],
VERB.
, ,
,
&,
&
& &, .
,
,
&
&,
&,
&, & ,
Perfect,
s.
D.
P.
7"
Pluperfect,
s.
D.
P.
have been struck.
I had been
D.
&
P.
,
&
.
&, &,
&, &
&.
& &
^
&,
&, &,
D.
P.
D.
P.
I was
D.
P.
&,
&,
&,, &-,
&&,
&&,
&^&^
&&, &&, &.
I shall
be struck.
,
,
,
,
,
, , .
Aorist,
I was
struck.
,
^) ^
-&
&
\.
\^ &,
t
Second Future,
S.
D.
P.
struck.
Second
S.
be struck.
First Future,
S.
I shall
First Aorist,
S.
^.
Paulo-post-Future,
s.
struck.
I shall be
struck.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
&,
, &.
&,
&,
Present, be struck.
S.
D.
P.
&
CONJUGATION OF THE PASSIVE
,
&,
&,
82
VOICE.
#,
&,
Perfect, have been struck.

S.
D.
P.
&.
.
,
First Aorist, be struck.
&,
&,
&,
S.
D.
P.
&\,
&,
,
. ,
Second Aorist, be
S.
D.
P.
&,
struck.
,
,
,
&,
&,
&, & .
, ,
,,
,
,
,
&,
&
&,
&, ', .
&, ^
&, ~
&,
-, &, &.
OPTATIVE MODE.
Present,
S.
D.
P.
D.
I might,
D.
.
S.
S.
',
I mighty
>.
fyc. hereafter be struck.
I might,
fyc. be struck.
&,' &&
&,
&&,
&&, &&, &.
First Future,
D.
have been struck.
^,
First Aorist,
D.
fyc.
',
Paulo-post-Future,
S.
fyc. be struck.
Tvmolued-ov,
Perfect,
S.
I might,
i"
might, fyc. hereafter be struck.
\^^
84
VERB.
Second Aorist,
S.
D.
,
,
,
,
, .
J mighty
& ,7&
.
Second Future, 1 might,

S.
D.
fyc. be struck.
&,
&,
\,
Sfc. hereafter be struck.
,
,
],
&>
&,
&,
&. &,
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
Present,
S.
D.
Perfect,
S.
D.
P.
I may
I may
D.
&,
&,
,
S.
P.
have been struck.
, ,
^g,
-J,
(,
^,
*.
&
&,
/ may
be struck.
&[,
&,
&.
rvcp&ifg,
,
.
, ,
Second Aorist,
D.
First Aorist,
S.
be struck.
7 may
struck.
zvnrf y
-,
&,
INFINITIVE MODE.
Present,
Perfect,
Paulo-post-Future,
First Aorist,
First Future,
Second Aorist,
Second Future,
&,
&,
&&,
/^-,
to be struck.
to
have been struck.
to be
to
to be
to
going
to be struck.
have been struck.
going
to be struck.
have been struck.
to be
going
to be struck.
85
,
.
,
',
, ,
^
, .
,.
&, &
&.
&
,
&, ^ &,
PARTICIPLES.
Present, being struck.
.
G.
&LC.
Perfect, having been struck.
.
G.
Paulo-post-Future, going to be struck.
.
G.
First Aorist, having been struck.
.
G.
&,
&, &, &.

First Future,
.
G.
G.
to be struck.
, ,.
Second
going
Aorist, having been struck.
,,.
^
Second Future, going
.
G.
to be struck.
SECOND CONJUGATION.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Pres.
Imp.
Perf.
Plup.
P. p. F.
.
2d .
1st
1st
F.
2d F.
,
,
,,
,.
.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
, ,,
- , , , , , , , -.
,,
, , ,,
,
,.
,
.
,
,
-,
, ,,, ,
,,
.
,.
- ,, ,, ,
,
, ,,
.
,
\-
,
6, ,
Dual.
Sing.
t),
trai,
"!-
$,
, ,
,
'
Plur.
VERB.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
,,
.
,
,.
,
,
,
, ,, .
, ,
- ,
,
. - , ,
. - , ,
Sing.
Pres.
Perf.
1st
2d
Dual.
'- ,
,
Plur.
OPTATIVE MODE.
.
,,
,
,,,,
,
,
,
,
,
|- ,
,
,
,.
,
,
, ,,
.
,
,
,
, ,
,
.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
- , , , , , , , , ..
- ,, ,
Sing.
Pres.
Perf.
P. p. F.
.
F.
2d .
1st
1st
2d F.
Dual.
Plur.
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
,
\-
Pres.
Perf.
1st
2d
,
,
,
,
/, , ,
.
,
,
,
,
,
, , , , ..
Sing.
- ,
\.
\.
Dual.
tJTOV,
VJ,
>
V,
Perf.
P.p.F.
.
.
,
.
.
1st
1st
F.
2d
2d F.
~,
JJTOV,
PARTICIPLE.
INFINITIVE.
Pres.
Plur.
Pres.
Perf.
P.p.F.
1st
.
.
IstF.
2d
2dF.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
.
.
.
.
.
iv.
iv.
THIRD CONJUGATION.
INDICATIVE MODE.
,
- ,
,
,,
,
, ,
,
- ,
,,
,
, ,, ,
- ,, , ,, ,
,,
,
,
,
- ,,, , , ,,
,
,
,
,
, , ,,,
Dual.
Sing
Pres.
Imp.
Perf.
Plup.
P. p. F.
1st
A.
1st F.
2d A.
2d r.
V?
V?
VS,
>
V,
, ,,, ..
,
,
, ,
}
)
,
.
, ,, .
,
, ,, .
.
,
Plur.

IMPERATIVE MODE.
,
, , ,,
,
,
,
,
,
. -, , , , ,
- ,, , , ,
Dual.
Sing.
1st
.
.
.
Plur.
Pres.
Perf.
2d
87
OPTATIVE MODE.
Perf.
P. p. F.
1st
,
,, ,, ,.
,,
,
,
,.
,
,
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
,.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
, , , , , ..
, ,,, , ,
,
,, ,
,
,
,
,
,
,
. - , ,,
,
,
,
. ~ ,, ,, ,,
-
Pres.
1st F.
2d
2d F.
Dual.
Plur.
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
,
. . '
Pres.
Dual.
Sing.
ji,
Perf.
1st
2d
>
,
,
flff,
]fff,
is,
~,
,
,
,, ,
}},
V,
if
.
.
.
.
.
.
P. p.
1st A.
IstF.
2d A.
2dF.
.
,
,.
3>.
PARTIC IPLE.
'
*.
INFINITIVE.
Pres.
Perf.
Plur.
Pres.
Perf.
p. F.
1st
1st
F.
2d
2d F.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
.
.
.
, ..
, ..
,
,
FOURTH CONJUGATION.
INDICATIVE MODE.
,
, ,,, .
.
, ,,, ,,, ,,
, , ,
.
,, , ,, , , '
- ,,, , , ,,, ,,, , ,,, ...
- , , ,,, , , .
- ,6, ,, ,,
Sing.
Pres.
Imp.
Perf.
Plup.
1st
1st
F.
2d
2d F.
Dual.
Plur.
jj,
,
,
,
,
7/.
WWf
88
VERB.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
- , ,; ,
,,
,
,
,
,
,
. - , , , ,
Sing.
Pres.
Dual.
ov,
Perf.
1st
2d
.
.
,
, .
,
,
Plur.
OPTATIVE MODE,
,, ,
, , ,,
. - , ,
, ,, ,,
- ,
,
, ,
Sin<
Pres.
Perf.
1st
1st F.
2d
2d F.
,,
,
,, ,,
,
,
,
,
,
,.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
.
,
,,, , ,.
, ,, , ,, , ..
Dual.
Plur.
'.
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
. '-
Pres.
Perf.
1st
2d
Sing.
,
,
Dual.
,
Vj
Vj
V>
$,
.
.
.
.
.
%,
,
,,
, ,
,
.
IstF.
2d .
1st
2dF.
*,
.
,
, .
INFINITIVE.
Pres.
Perf.
Plur.
PARTICIPLE.
Pres.
,
,
,
,
,
,.
,
,
, .
Perf.
.
IstF.
2d .
1st
2dF.
,
,
"
V,
OBSERVATIONS.
1.
The second person
formed
a,
in
making
as,
it
also contracted fat

use only in
singular of the present indicative was originally

The Ionics dropped the
which the Attics contracted into

The Attics
instead of rl} which form remained in common
into
and
, -, ,,-...
, ' , ',
',
observation applies to other tenses. Thus in the imperfect

became
and was afterwards contracted into
So
The same
became
Some
is
and
verbs retain the original form

formed the passive of verbs in
&C.
Thus also
thus
pure, the circumlocution of the

2. If the perfect indicative end in
participle with
is not used in the third person plural, which is then
formed from the third person singular by inserting
before
as,
, ', .
.
FORMATION OF TENSES IN THE PASSIVE VOICE.

So
in
the
pluperfect
89
into
In this case also the perfect optative is formed by changing
thus,
under the preceding vowel if it be or
,,
, ,
,,
, ,*.
/..
-,, ,, , ,
,
,
.
, ,,. .
,,
,
, ,
& ^.
&,
and subscribing
-, ,, ,,
-$,
The
subjunctive
'
is
(.
(,
If the preceding vowel be
into
Phir.
Dual.
Sing.^
or v,
it is
merely lengthened
formed by changing
from
as,
with the preceding vowel
thus,
Dual.
Sing.
Plur.
,,
or
The
3.
jj",
often syncopated in the third person plural of the
aorists are
for
indicative; as,
&.
In the second person singular of the imperative they end in

when another & precedes ; as,
,,
In the plural of the optative their

tier.
traction
The
4.
-,
first
is
but in
the Attic con-
,,, ,,.
future subjunctive
Sing.
more common form
&,
is
sometimes found
Dual.
thus,
Plur.
IN
THE PASSIVE VOICE.
,.
Present.
The
present
by changing
formed from the present
is
into
as,
,.
active,
Imperfect.
The
imperfect
changing
as,
is
into
formed from the present, "by

and prefixing the augment ;
Perfect.
The
perfect
by changing,
is
formed from the perfect
in the
1st. conj., (pa into
the 2d,
into
in the 3d, xa into
in the 4th, xa into
in
as,
as,
---.
-
-,
-,
as,
as,
active,
-cpa,
eyal-xa,
90
VERB.
-, -.
Perfects in (pa impure change

into
, ,.,
Verbs of the
termination
this
third conjugation in
pure, if the
,,
,,
^, , ,
, , ,, ,, '^,, ,
penultima of the perfect be long, change xa into

as,
Also
and
whose penultima is short.
'
But
both
,,
and
and
retain
Some have
as,
, , ., ,
,, , ,, , ',
,
, , .,, ,
and
to shut.
In verbs of the fourth conjugation,

changed into
by the Attics into a
as,
Att.
Dissyllables of the
which
in
resume
is
and second conjugation,
first
the perfect active change
perfect passive
before
into o, in the
as,
to steal.
and sometimes
change
into
Some
to turn.
as,
the penultima of the

in the perfect passive ; as, '-
verbs change
perfect active into
in
and
,
,, ,,,,, ,,,,).
,)
, \\
>,, ,
.
,
,
,
,
,
,)
, ,, ,
Synopsis of the Formation of the Perfect Passive in

I.
S.
all its
(for
D.
.
II.
S.
\\,
(for
D.
III.
S.
\\-,
(for
D.
Persons.
,
,
,
)
,
, , ,.
FORMATION OF TENSES IN THE PASSIVE VOICE.

IV.
S.
91
(for
D.
-, -.
imperative is formed from the second person indicaThe third person is

as,
by changing ai into
as,
formed from the second person plural indicative, by changing into
The second person
tive,
TfTUtf-d-S, TtTl'lfd-U).
The
infinitive is
changing
into ai
formed from the second person plural indicative, by

as,
'
&-, ^-.
,.
Pluperfect.
The
pluperfect
changing
augment
as,
formed from the perfect, by

and prefixing the second
is
into
,.
Paulo-post- Future.
The paulo-post-future is formed from the second

person singular of the perfect, by changing ai into
as,
First Aonst.
,
.
,.. , ^, &&,
^,
^, .
The
formed from the third person

into
by changing
the preceding smooth mute into the rough one, and
first
aorist is
singular of the perfect,
dropping the reduplication
Some
verbs
assume
as,
as,
On
drops
the contrary,
it,
making
Some
change
ay
in
as,
verbs which have

in the perfect passive,
into
in the first aorist
as,
it
In the poets, some verbs in

which dropped
the perfect, receive it again in the first aorist;
for
92
VERB.
Those verbs which
>,
in the perfect passive
into a, in the first aorist

to
resume
as,
turn
change
,,
First Future.
The
first
future
by changing
ment as,
;
formed from the first aorist,

and dropping the aug-
is
into
Second Aorist.
.
The
second aorist is formed from the second

aorist active, by changing ov into
as,
,
,.
Second Future.
The second
future
by changing
the augment
as,
aorist,
is

and dropping
into
MIDDLE VOICE.
SYNOPSIS OP THE MODES AND TENSES OF THE
First Conjugation.
Indie.
Imper.
Optat.
Subjunc.
Infin.
Part.
Present
Imperf.
Perfect
Pluperf.
1st
Aor.
1st Fut.
2d Aor.
2d Fut
rvxpouai
\ \6
'
&
Second Conjugation.
Present
Imperf.
Perfect
Pluperf.
1st
Aor.
1st Fut.
2d Aor.
2d Fut.
\(
\6
\\
f
CONJUGATION OF THE MIDDLE
V *CE.
Third Conjn gation.

.
Imper.
Indie.
Optat.
Subjunc.
Infin.
Part.
Present
Jmperf.
Perfect
Pluperf.
1st
1st Fut.
2d Aor.
2d Fut.
Fourth Conjugation.
Present
Imperf.
Perfect
Pluperf
1st Aor.
1st Fut.
2d Aor.
2d Fut.
;
,
&
.,
FIRST CONJUGATION.
INDICATIVE MODE.
&
&
, ,
&, &,,
First Aorist,
S.
D.
/ struck.
&
&
&, &,
}
Second Future,
S.
D.
P.
/ shall strike.
.},
>.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
&,
,
&
&, &.
First Aorist, strike.
S.
D.
P.
//,
,
~
Second
S.
D.
P.
&,
^,
&
.
Aorist, strike.
94
VERB.
,
,
,
&,
&
&, &, &
,
OPTATIVE MODE.
First Aorist,
S.
D.
I might,
fyc. strike.
SECOND CONJUGATION.
INDICATIVE MODE.
, ,
,.
-,
, ,,
, ,, ,, ,
.
.
, ,
. -, ,
, ,
, ,, .
. -, , , , , , , , .
Dual.
Sing-.
1st
. \-
,
,
2d F.
Plur.
aro,
IMPERATIVE MODE.
Sing.
1st
\{-
Dual.
Plur.
at,
2d
OPTATIVE MODE.
Sing.
1st
Dual.
Plur.
THIRD CONJUGATION.
INDICATIVE MODE.
1st
2d F.
-,
, ,
,,
,,
, ,, .
.
, ,
,,
. -, ,
,
,,
. - , ,
, ,. .
Dual.
Sing.
,
,
Plur.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
Dual.
Sing.
1st
2d
Plur.
OPTATIVE MODE.
1st
-, , ,
,,,,,.
Dual.
Plur.
FOURTH CONJUGATION.
INDICATIVE MODE.
1st
2d F.
, ,
-,
, ,, ,, ,, ,, .*
, ,
Sing.
,
,
Dual.
Plur.
FORMATION OF TENSES IN THE MIDDLE VOICE.
95
,.
, ,, .
, ,
, ,
. - , , , , , ', , , .
IMPERATIVE MODE.
1st
2d
Dual.
Sing.
.
.
Plur.
at,
OPTATIVE MODE.
Dual.
Sing.
1st
Plur.
OBSERVATIONS.
,,,
.,
1. In verbs of the fourth conjugation the first future is the same as the
second, both in the middle and in the active voices, when there is no change
middle
first and second future active
in the penultima; as,
second
first future active
middle
but
middle
future active
.,
2. The perfect and pluperfect have an active, the other tenses a passive
termination.
The only tenses that have a peculiar conjugation are the first aorist indicative, imperative, and optative, and the second future indicative ; the
others are conjugated like those of the active and passive, whose termination they borrow.
FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE MIDDLE VOICE.

Present and Imperfect.
The present and imperfect are the same as those

of the passive.
Perfect.
,.
,
,
,
,
,
. ,,,(, ,
The
active,
perfect is formed from the second aorist

by changing ov into a, and prefixing the
reduplication
as,
If the second aorist have a in the penultima,

from a present in or
the perfect middle changes
it into
but from a present in
or ai, into
as,
eonagov,
eonoqa
So
makes
and with the
syllabic augment
eoqya.
Also
,&, , ., ,
,
.
,
,
,,
.
96
VERB.
#,
makes
If the
perfect
and
second aorist have

middle changes it
in the penultima, the
into
as,
If the second aorist have

in the penultima, from
a present in ^, the perfect middle changes it into
as,
olda
and in like manner /', olxa, and with the syllabic
augment
But from a present in t, it is merely lengthened ; as,
,. ,,
,&
~ &
.
& &, &. , .
,
Some
retain also the diphthong of the present
makes
The
larly
and
and
'
thus
poets frequently shorten the penultima again, particu-ulmu, from

feminine of the participle ; as,
in the
}
"Ed- makes
'&,
Also
makes
recurrence of the .
and middle of the same verb are seldom both
and
to avoid the too frequent
Obs. The perfect active

Indeed the perfect middle may be considered as another form of
in use.
the perfect active, as it has generally the same sense.
,.
Pluperfect,
The pluperfect is formed from the perfect, by

changing a into uv, and prefixing the augment as,
The
>
first
aorist
Verbs
Obs.
in
}
formed from the
is
by adding
active,
.
,
.
First Aorist.
this tense often

}
First Future.
The
active,
first
future
by changing
is
aorist
as,
pure have
for
first
syncopated
into
as,
as,
,-
formed from the
first
future
..
,
.
. ,,-,,(,,,, ,
-
DEPONENT VERBS.
97
but in the fourth conjugation, into ovucci
as,
/;,
Those verbs
Obs.
as,
which by
also of the third conjugation,
from the future active, change
the Attic dialect lose
into
Second Aorist.
The
second aorist is formed from

by changing ov into
aorist active,
the
second
as,
Second Future.
The second
future
is
by changing
Except
future active,
the poetic futures
which are thus varied

as,
into ovuai
and
by crasis vevucu
&c.
DEPONENT VERBS.
Deponent verbs generally have the middle form in the first
future and first aorist, but the passive form in the perfect,
pluperfect, and paulo-post-future, and some also in the first
aorist and first future.
SYNOPSIS OF THE MODES AND TENSES.
&
Imper.
Indie.
Pres.
Imp.
1st K.
1st
OptaU
Subjunc.
Part.
Infin.
M.
'
&,, . , ,
Perf. P.
Plup. P.
P.p.
P.
P.
IstF. P.
1st
Obs. Several deponents have a perfect, and some a second

to become,
middle form; as,
ova,
to perceive,
aorist,
to rave,
of the
to see,
has the
,.
98
VERB.
perfect mid.
and the second aor. pass.
the second fut. mid.
and
to fight,
CONTRACT VERBS.
,,
Verbs in
and
are contracted in the
present and imperfect
the other tenses admit no
contraction, but are formed like those of baryton
:
verbs.
,,
, ,, ,,,.,
,
,(,
(
.
,
, ,. ,
^.
Verbs
contract
in
subscribing
a
they happen to follow
into
ao, into
v,
as,
Verbs
contract
in
into
every other contraction drop
to
and
whenever
to honor
and dropping
love
Verbs
ing into
(,
in
(,
into ov,
and
with a long vowel followcontract

with a short vowel, or ov, into ov
with any other diphthong,

to gild;
into
as,
Except
Xqvoovoi' xQvoorjg
as,
infinitivlf which is contracted into ov
in the
$6,
ACTIVE VOICE.
SYNOPSIS OF THE MODES AND TENSES OF VERBS IN
Indie.
Pres.
Imp.
1st
F.
1st
A.
'
Imperat.
2d A.
2dF
Optat.
-(>
Perf.
Plup.
in
as,
'
Subj.
- -
Infin.
Part.
<
- -
CONJUGATION OF CONTRACTS.
.
Imperat.
Indie.
Pres.
Imp.
j
IstF.
A.
1st
Perf.
Plup.
2d A.
2dF.
Pres.
Imp.
IstF.
1st
Optat.
Perf.
up.
99
Subj.
~6
- -
Infin.
Part.
-at
-as
-6
-at
-hat
INDICATIVE MODE.
Present Tense.
, ,
,
, ,
,
,
,
, , ,
, ,
6,
, , ,
Sing.
9'>
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
, ,
,,
Dual.
, .
,
, .
Plur.
, .
.
,
.
,
Imperfect Tense.
X?
ic-
,
,
,
,
,
,
Sing.
,
,
, ,,
,
, ,,
,
/
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
',
,
,
Di ial.
,
,
,
,
,
,
, ..
,
.
,
.
,
,
, ..
Plur.
100
VERB.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
,
,
,
,
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
, ,
.
.
.
.
.
,
,
,
,
,
,
D.
Plur.
OPTATIVE MODE.
,,,
>
,
, ,,
,
, ,
,
6,
,
,
Sing.
5
(
>
js,
<?>
7,
,
.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
, ,
, .
,
.
, .
,
, .
Dual.
Plur.
<$,
<,
OUV
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
Sing.
{6,
Till'
,
? ,
?-
<(5
%,
it
>
Vi>
,'
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
Dual.
6m,
?*>
k,
>
6V,
Plur.
INFINITIVE.
(
k
,
.
,
,
.
,
,
.
,
,
, .
,
, .
.
, ,
,
.
, .
,, ,
PARTICIPLE.
.
.
.
.
.
.
"
\*
^,
,
,
,
,
,
.
.
.
PASSIVE VOICE.
Indie.
Pres.
Imp.
Perf.
Plup.
P.p.F.
1st
A.
IstF.
2d A.
2dF.
Imper.
-- - - -

- Optat.
Subj.
Infin.
Part.
CONJUGATION OF CONTRACTS.
101
.
Imper.
Indie.
Pres.
Imp.
Perf.
Plup.
P. p. F.
- -- -- -
- - -Optat.
Subj.
Infin.
1st A.
IstF.
2d A.
2dF.
Part.
.
Pres.
Imp.
<
-
-- - - --- --
Perf.
Plup.
P. p. F.
A.
IstF.
1st
INDICATIVE MODE.
Present Tense.
Plur.
",
\
"
Dual.
),
,
,,
,
,.
,
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
.
,.
,
,
,,
.
,
,
,,,,.
,
,
,
,,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
.
,
,
, ,,
,
.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,,,.
,
,
,
,
,
(, , ,
,
,
,
,
, ,
Sing.
oj) f
Imperfect Tense.
Dual.
Sing.
'
Plur.
,
,
9 *
/.
102
VERB.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
Sing.
" ,,
.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
5
(
{
,
,
,
Dual.
.
.
Plur.
,
,
,
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
.
,
,.
,
,
,
,
,
, , , , , ..
,
,
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,,
.
(, ,
,
,
.
,
,
,
,.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
, , , ,, , ,.
,,
,
,
,
,
. ,,, ,
,
,
,
^,
,,,
OPTATIVE MODE.
Sing.
(
(
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
Dual.
Plur.
~.
(,
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
Sing.
(
(
)
^
(
Dual.
Plur.
,
,
,
6,
.
.
.
...
PARTICIPLE.
INFINITIVE.
(
"
"
\-
"
"
-,
-,
-,
-,
,
,
,
,
,
-, ,
\^-,
\
.
.
.
.
.
.
MIDDLE VOICE.
Indie.
Prcs.
Imn
\
C
Perf.
Plup.
1st A.
IstF.
2d A.
2dF
Imperat.
-~
Optat.
- - - - -Subj.
Infin.
Part.
;;;
VERBS IN
103
Imperat.
Indie.
Pres.
Imp.
Perf.
Subj.
Optat.
A.
1st F.
2d A.
Infin.
Part.
-*
Plup.
1st
- -- - -- -
- -
- - - - - --
2dF.
Pres.
Imp.
A.
IstF.
1st
OBSE RVATIONS.
,,, , .
from which the Attics had excluded , are not

from
1. Dissyllables in
contracted ; as,
, ,.
,,, . ,
2.
commonly admit only
Dissyllables in
&c.
for
for
,,,.'
3.
, ,, ,
as,
find
and
the
In some, verbs, particularly
andy. Thus,
into
and
Imperf.
tyg, ty, &c.
&c. Inf. tfjv. In the optative they change
into
as,
but the third person plural is, as in the common
,,
Attics contract
form,
, .' $
4.
the contraction in
Yet we sometimes
.
,
Several contracts vary in their characteristic, and consequently in

as,
or
or
Some verbs
and contracts; as,
or
or
their contraction;
are both barytons
or
or
VERBS IN
Verbs
are derived from verbs of the third
in
,,
conjugation in
,
&,
,
,
,
,
,
and
as from
to stand
to place
to
give
to
show-
104
VERB.
Verbs
By
1.
are formed,
in
changing
into
and lengthening the
penultima.
By
2.
prefixing the reduplication.
.
,
, ,. , ,
The
reduplication properly consists
in repeating
consonant of the present tense with an

as,
If the consonant be an aspirate,
the corresponding smooth must be used
as,
the
first
for
&,
&&.
If the verb begin with a vowel, with

or
an aspirate
only is prefixed, which is called the
improper reduplication as, ',
to send ;
;
to fly
Verbs in
have only three tenses of that form
the present, imperfect, and second aorist.
They
take the other tenses from verbs in
thus
makes
,,
Verbs
from
have no second
in
aorist
except dis-
tense is the same as the

imperfect.
They likewise want the optative and
subjunctive modes, which they borrow from verbs
syllables,
in
which
this
in
Many
two
syllables
as,
,
,
have no reduplication, parfrom verbs of more than

from
from
from
verbs in
ticularly all those derived
,
.
, ,,,
,
,
&,
,
*
.
&,, ,
&, ,
from
from
The poets andÊolics give the terminations of verbs

a great number of contract verbs, but without the re
duplication ; as,
Obs.
in
1.
> to
'
Barytons
),
thr
sometimes become verbs in
we meet
as,
from
though
with
of the penultima discovers that they are properly derived
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN
from
to be
-, ,
changed
obsolete,
it
,,
ACTIVE VOICE.
being usual
into contract verbs.
...
for
105
barytons
., -
2. The poets sometimes repeat the two initial letters

To the
reduplication; as,
as,
common reduplication they sometimes add
They also make the reduplication in
The Ionic and Baeotic dialects
the middle
as, <Ww }
as,
make the reduplication by
Obs.
for a
*,
&,
/',
,,,
ACTIVE VOICE.
Indie.
Imperat.
Optat.
Subjunc.
Infin.
Part.
Pres.
Imp.
2d A.
1st F.
1st A.
Perf.
Plup.
Pres.
Imp.
2d A.
1st
F.
1st
A.
Perf.
Plup.
Pres.
Imp.
2d A.
IstF.
1st A.
Perf.
Plup.
Pres.
Imp.
IstF.
1st A.
Perf.
Plup
'
106
VERB.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Present Tense.
-, ,,
-,
-,
-, ,,
,
,
,
,
Sing.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
Dual.
,
,
,, ,,,
,
.
,
.
, ,,
,
, ,,
,
,
,
,
, ,,
.
.
.
.
,
Plur.
Imperfect.
Dual.
Sing.
-,
,
&-, ,
>
-,
-, ,,
V,
,
,
Second
Dual.
Sing.
-,
,
&-, ,
>
-,
Aorist.
IMPERATIVE
Plur.
Plur.
MODE
Present.
Dual.
Sing.
&-&,
&-, / ,
-&,
1-&, s
'
, ,
,
,
,
,
-, ,
,
&,
, ,, ,
Second
"*,
Plur.
Smg.
Aorist.
Dual.
S-,
.
\.
-.
Plur.
OPTATIVE MODE.
Present.
-,
&-,
-,
Dual.
Sing.
\
V
V,
Plur.
, , ,,
&
Second
-,
&-
Aorist.
Plur.
Dual.
Sing,
107
ACTIVE VOICE.
, , ,,
&,
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE
Present.
-, ,
&-, ,
-.
,.
, ,
,
,
,
,
,
.
?, ,
,
, *.
,
&,
,
. . ,,
mov
',
Second
Sing.
[,
Plur.
Dual,
Sing,
,
,
*.
*.
Aorist.
Plur.
Dual.
-,
&, -.
.
INFINITIVE MODE.
&.
\.
Present.
Second
Aorist.
&.
PARTICIPLE.
Present.
.
,
,
.
-,
.
,
-, , .
-?,
^&-
,
,
&,
,, .
&, , .
-,
-,
Second Aorist
&,
--elg,
&.
OBSERVATIONS.
The
third person plural of the present indicative is

nated in aoi by the Attics; as,
1.
commonly
termi-
2. In the imperfect, use is generally made of the original contracted

form with the reduplication as,
ei$, ei
a
,.
Sometimes
also in the present
&-,
, #
as,
10S
VERB.
3. The second aorist indicative retains the long vowel in the penultima
of the dual and plural, except in
&.
The
The
4.
tive
third person plural
as,
hence
iEolics
and
;
The second
often syncopated
as,
for
'& for
.,
&,,
&,,&.
quently used
in
is
as,
and poets retain the long vowel in the present imperaAnd from both forms &i is often rejected
&c. The contracted form is also fre-
&,
aorist imperative
as also in
'
as,
ends in #i, except in verbs from primitives
&1,
*5,
The
present infinitive has always the short vowel. The second

aorist assumes the long vowel, except in verbs from primitives in
as
which change the short vowel into a diphthong.
also in
5.
THE ACTIVE VOICE.
IN
Imperfect.
The imperfect is formed from the present, by

into v, and prefixing the augment,
changing
as,
except when the verb begins with
,.
Second
The
second aorist
is
&,
Aorist.
formed from the imperfect,
as, ivCGqv,
by dropping the reduplication
or by changing the improper reduplication into the
augment as,
,.
Obs. If the verb have no reduplication, the second

aorist is the same as the imperfect.
PASSIVE VOICE.
Indie
Pres.
Imp.
Perf.
Plup.
P. p. F.
A.
IstF.
1st
Imper.
Optat.
Subj.
Infin.
Part.
Imper.
Indie.
Optat.
109
PASSIVE VOICE.
Subj.
Part.
Infin.
Pres.
Imp.
Perf.
PIup.
P. p. F.
1st
A.
1st F.
Pres.
Imp.
Perf.
Plup.
P. p. F.
1st
A.
IstF.
Pres.
Imp.
Perf.
Plup.
1st
IstF.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Present Tense.
&~,^
Dual.
Sing.
^
( ,*. cat.
>
V
. &, &,
Plur.
u&ov t
&,
a&e t
vrm.
Imperfect.
&-
Sing,
-
Dual.
- >W>, &,
(
10
a&ov f
Plur.
&,
, &.
no
VERB.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
Present.
Sing.
Dual.
Plur.
>.
>
&.
&, &, &,
>
J
OPTATIVE MODE.
&- \,
Present.
Sing.
Dual.
&, &, &,
&
Plur.
&,
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
-, *,
&, ,
&,
&,
&,
&*,
&,
&,
&,
#, *.
-, , ,
&, &, &, ,
Present.
&
&
Sing.
tj,
Dual.
Plur.
^*',
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLE.
-,
&,
&,
&&.
&.
&*.
Present.
Present.
>?,
C "
v-og,
OBSERVATION.
The
, ,,..,
Ionics drop a from the second person singular in oat and ao, and
the Attics contract the syllables ; as,
Att.
B&eoo t
'
Ion. s&so, Att.
Ion.
Att.
&
FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE PASSIVE VOICE.

Present,
The
nultima
,,
present
by changing
;
as,
is
,-
formed from the present active,

and shortening the pe-
into
except in
,,
>
, ,
,
CONJUGATION OF VERBS
MIDDLE VOICE.
though
and
is
Ill
also used.
Imperfect.
The imperfect is formed from the present, by

and prefixing the augment,
changing
into
as,
except when the verb begins with
& ,.
MIDDLE VOICE.
Imper.
Indie.
Optat.
Subj.
Part.
Infin.
Pres.
Imp.
2d A.
1st A.
IstF.
Pres.
Imp.
2d
1st
.
.
IstF.
Pres.
Imp.
2d
1st
.
.
IstF.
Pres.
Imp.
1st
IstF.
INDICATIVE MODE.
The
Present and Imperfect as in the Passive.
Second
>H V
)
& &, &.

Dual.
Sing.
i&i(-
Aorist.
>
Plur
&,
&,
112
VERB.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
Second
Aorist.
Sing.
Dual.
- , &,
&, &,
)
'
>
Plur.
&,
&.
OPTATIVE MODE.
Second
-- \,
Sing.
Aorist.
Dual.
Plur.
&, &, &, &, &, ,

SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
Second
Aorist.
-, ,
&, &, &, &,
&, &,
&, .
-,
\, &,
.
-, , &, &, &, &, &, ,,
,,
Dual.
Sing.
rf,
ff,
curat,
PARTICIPLE.
INFINITIVE.
Second
Aorist.
&.
3&,,
&.
Plur.
Second
&-
>
6-
Aorist.
,,,
Second Aorist.
The
>
perfect,
,.
second aorist middle is formed from the imby dropping the reduplication
as,
IRREGULAR VERBS IN
TENSES PECULIAR TO THE

IN
The
113
OF VERBS
PRIMITIVES
,,.
, &
tenses peculiar to the primitives of verbs in

are regularly formed, according to the rules for
But there
verbs in
as,
some deviations
are
The
1.
of the present
in particular verbs.
future active has sometimes the reduplication
first
as,
I will give.
&, &, &

The
2.
instead of
and
perfect active and passive of
and the
(for
&
&&,
has
as,
has only
being put for
aorist passive
first
account of the & which follows) ;

(though
is sometimes found).
3. The perfect and first aorist passive of
shorten the long vowel of the perfect active
&
,
&.
,
',
.
;
&,
& on
,&
;
,and
as,
The
instead of as,
perfect active of
has sometimes
distinct from the Doric form
Very frequently it
is syncopated; as,
and by crasis
whence the participle
It is to be observed also, that the augment of
retains the
rough breathing of the present, and further often takes an in the pluperObs.
.
fect
which
%,
is
as, sfrTTiy'xitv.
Obs. 2. The perfect, pluperfect, and second aorist active,

have
the intransitive signification to stand, and the rest of the tenses the transitive one to place.
The perfect has also the signification of the present,
and consequently the pluperfect that of the imperfect.
IRREGULAR VERBS IN
Irregular verbs in
containing three verbs.
I.
II.
From
From
may
are derived
to clothe one's self.
III.
,,
are derived
to lie
down
to be
to
and
send;
to
know
to sit
I.
to be.
Present Tense.
,
10*
to say.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Sing.
or e7,
', to go.
\,
,
,, ,,.
Class
1.
MI.
be divided into three classes, each
Dual.
Plur.
114
VERB.
Imperfect.
Sing.
ty,
Dual.
i or fy,
iff,
ifcov,
Plur.
}
Imperfect Middle
\, , >,
&, &, ^&,
Sing.
Dual.
Plur.
^^, ^#, ^.
& &, &, &,
Future Middle.
,,
Sing.
ear],
'*,
&,
Dual.
Plur.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
Present.
&
Sing.
or too,
2,
,,
Dual.
Plur.
OPTATIVE MODE.
Present.
, , ', .
, , &,
. '&,
&,&, &,
Dual.
Sing.
]v t
',
Plur.
or
Future.
Dual.
iaol u.r\v t
Plur.
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
Present.
Dual.
Sing.
Plur.
fpov,
INFINITIVE.
Present.
Future.
&*.
115
IRREGULAR VERBS IS
PARTICIPLES.
-,
Future.
Present.
2.
to
ov.
go.
INDICATIVE MODE
Present.
Sing.
or ,
, ,
Dual.
eft,
Plur.
hov
fte,
Xai t
or foot.
Imperfect.
Dual.
Sing.
, ,
*l
tov,
',
Plur.
}
Pluperfect.
e,
Second
fr,
feff
Plur.
Aorist.
Dual,
Sing.
tov,
,,
, ,,.
Dual.
Sing.
',
Plur.
IMPERATIVE MODE .
Present.
Sing.
i#t or
Dual.
hov
Second Aorist.
Sing,
ifc,
,,
Dual.
Plur.
Plur.
fere,
OPTATIVE MODE.
Second
Aorist.
Dual.
Sing.
ft,
>
,,.
Plur.
116
VERB.
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE
Second
Aorist.
Sing.
* , .
Dual.
fc
Plur.
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLE.
..
Present.
or
Second
Aorist.
MIDDLE VOICE.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Perfect.
Sing.
Dual.
&,
>v
}
Plur.
)
Pluperfect.
,,
Sing.
^, [
, ^,
, .
Dual.
Plur
First Future.
First Aorist.
,,
The
Obs. 1.
as, slut
present
Eurip.
has regularly the signification of the future

intxsiQijaoiiev,
Demosth.
So
in
the infinitive and participle.
The
imperfect and second aorist belong to epic poetry ; but '

are all that can be found, except in composition.
yov, used by epic poets, and tfeiv,
and ija, in a pluperfect
form, are also found in the sense of the imperfect.
Obs. 2.
and
and
"Hiov and
3.
",
to go.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Present.
Sing.
',
,,
Dual.
Imperfect.
Plur.
j
',
IRREGULAR VERBS IN
117
OPTATIVE MODE.
Present.
Sing.
Dual.
Plur.
PARTICIPLE.
INFINITIVE.
,.
Present.
Present.
livat.
MIDDLE VOICE.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Present.
-, ,
Sing.
&ov
Dual.
f
&,
a&ov f a&ov t
& &&
Plur.
#,
Imperfect.
, ,
o&ov y
IMPERATIVE.
&,
PARTICIPLE.
Present.
Present.
&,
-,
||
Class
",
II.
to send.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Present.
Sing.
&}*,
",
,
,, ,,.
Dual.
)
Plur.
Imperfect.
1,
",
J18
VERB.
First Future.
, , , ,
.
.
, , ,
, ,, ,
Sing.
-,
First Aorist
\.
Dual.
Plur.
Perfect.
Pluperfect.
Second
Sing.
\v f
\,
Aorist.
Dual
Plur.
or
IMPERATIVE MODE.
ftih,
, ,
Present,
First Aorist.
Perfect.
\.
Second
, ,
Aorist.
Dua
Sing.
U,
,
.
Plur.
OPTATIVE MODE.
, ,
Present.
-,
First Future.
Perfect.
Second
-,
Sing.
Aorist.
, , ,
Dual.
Plur.
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
,, ,,
Present.
If ,
if,
*.
IRREGULAR VERBS IN
19
Perfect.
Dual.
Sing.
Second
Plur.
Aorist.
\, \,
j,
I?,
&,
\, *.
INFINITIVE MODE.
First Future.
Present.
\.
Second
Perfect.
\\
PARTICIPLES.
First Future.
Present.
,.
Second
Perfect.
&,
Aorist.
\.
Aorist.
PASSIVE VOICE.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Present.
Sing.
?e-at,
&&
&
&,
&, &
&,
rat,
Dual.
&,
&
Plur.
Imperfect.
-, , ,
-,
u&ov f
&,
&,
&,
#,
&,
&,
Perfect.
rou t
a&ov f
& &, &,

Pluperfect.
, ,
Paulo-post-Future.
First Aorist.
&
&,
&.
First Future.
\\
&.
120
VERB.
MIDDLE VOICE.
Present and Imperfect like the Passive.
First Aorist.
&,
-,
Dual.
ao&ov
&
6& &, &,
*,
Second
& &, .
First Future,
^,
&, ^ .
Plur.
Aorist.
, , &, &0 &, &, &, ,

|
IMPERATIVE MODE.
Second
Aorist.
&, &,
#,
$#6,
&.
OPTATIVE MODE.
&
&
First Future.
-,
&,
&
Second
-,
&, &,
|
^,
&,
Aorist.
9
&, &,
|
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
Second
&uai f
ij,
f^ca,
&,
Aorist.
fy&ov
\a&ov f
#,
#, *.
INFINITIVE MODE.
Second
First Future.
^&.
Aorist.
ia&cu.
\\
PARTICIPLES.
-,
Second
First Future.
ov,
/e^-of,
||
Aorist.
?,
oj>.
IRREGULAR VERBS IN
121
is placed here among the rest derived from ?, whence

formed by an improper reduplication ; but it has scarcely any irregularities, since it conforms almost entirely to iluiui.
Obs. 2. 'Jfuui and iun;r, the present and imperfect middle, signify /
send myself, &C., or / am impelled. Hence they are generally used in the
earnestly wishes, Horn. Odys. ,*'. 3^7.
sense of wishing; thus
Obs. 1. This verb
it is
2.
Hu(u,
to sit.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Present.
Sing.
\,
V nP'>
(,
h a0 i \
\,
&,
\,
Dual.
rpifov,
Plur.
#, ]&, \, \'.
Imperfect.
\
fyis&o,
\, &, #, \&, \.
|
IMPERATIVE MODE.
Present.
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLE.
Present.
-, , .
Present.
Ija#ca.
3.
to clothe one's self.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Present and Perfect
.
,, ,
.
" ,,
,,
- , , & &, & &, &, .
Dual.
Sing.
Plur.
efrat &,
Pluperfect.
ho,
&,
&
First Aorist.
>
PARTICIPLES.
Present and Perfect.
may
?'
This verb
fvruiii, forming
doubled thus
Obs.
First Aorist.
be considered as middle.
The
active
1st Fut., and

1st Aor., Inf. tlaai, with
uiv, I will clothe him, Horn. Odys.
. 79.
11
"
is
or
generally
122
VERB.
Class
1.
III.
to lie
down.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Present.
-, , ,
Sing.
Dual.
&, &,
, , &, &, &, &,
-,
-&,
Imperfect.
-,
, %, , & .
|
#,
Plur.
First Future.
tj,
}
&,
&
IMPERATIVE MODE.
, &,
&, &, &.
Present.
f
OPTATIVE MODE.
-,
Present.
&, &, &, &,
&,
.
J
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
Present.
First Aorist.
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLE.
&.
-,
Present.
Present.
2.
",
ov.
know.
to
INDICATIVE MODE.
Present.
Sing.
-, , ,
,
, &, .
, , , , *&
Dual.
Plur.
&,
Imperfect.
-, ,
,,.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
Present.
-&, & &,
&
INFINITIVE.
Present.
& ^,
&
&,
&>
PARTICIPLE.
Present.
-,
IRREGULAR VERBS IN
123
MIDDLE VOICE.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Present.
-, , , &,
Sing.
&
Dual.
#,
Imperfect.
'
PARTICIPLE.
-,
Present,
Present.
'^*.
The
&,
INFINITIVE.
Obs.
Plur.
&, &,
, , &, &, &, &,
}
passive
is
3.
seldom used.
often occurs.
to say.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Present.
, ,,
-, ,
-, ,
,
,
,
,
Sing.
-,
-, ,
,,.
Dual.
Plur.
*',
Imperfect.
First Future.
,
,
First Aorist.
Second
Aorist.
|
, &,.
,,.
,,.
,,.
)
IMPERATIVE MODE.
&,
Present.
}
OPTATIVE MODE.
, ,
Present.
-,
(fal
~,
Vl^^t
or
V TE t
, .
,, ,,.
First Aorist.
av t
124
VERB.
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
Present.
Sing.
w>
,: ,
Dual.
<*>
, ,
First Aorist.
^-,
V$>
Tt>
, .
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLES.
Present.
Present.
First Aorist.
First Future.
.
.
.
Second
,.
Aorist.
First Aorist.
II
PASSIVE VOICE.
IMPERATIVE.
INDICATIVE.
Perfect,
Plur.
-,
&.
PARTICIPLE.
INFINITIVE.
op.
MIDDLE VOICE.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Second
-,
Aorist.
Dual.
, , &, &, &, &,
Sing.
Plur.
#,
IMPERATIVE MODE.
Second
-,
&.
&ov,
INFINITIVE.
Second
Aorist.
&.
,, ,
Obs. For
bg, said he.
'
So
Aorist.
&,
PARTICIPLE.
-,
,
Second
Aorist.
,
'
as,
are frequently put
say J, Aristoph. Ran. 37
for
ijul,
&.
&.
ov.
said /,
LIST OF DEFECTIVE VERBS.
125
DEFECTIVE VERBS.
Many Greek
verbs are defective in some of their tenses,

which they supply from other verbs of the same derivation and
</Thus,
signification, or of the same signification only.
to bear, are used only in the present
to receive, and
and imperfect the former borrows the other tenses from
and the latter from
Such is the case in some Latin
&,c.
verbs : thus, gigno borrows genui, genitum, from the obsolete
geno.
and
Obs. No Greek verb is used in all the modes and tenses,
others having been given in the preceding pages merely as examples, to
exhibit all the parts in one view but those verbs only are here instanced
as defective which are strikingly so, and which are obliged to borrow
some of their principal parts from other forms related to them in derivation
or signification.
The verbs in the first column of the following list, as also

those whose terminations alone are given, are used only in the
present and imperfect.
The verbs in the next column are
generally obsolete in the present and imperfect, and are followed by such of their tenses as are borrowed by the verbs in
the first column.
)
,
,
h
,,
X,
to admire,
/,
.7
augment being
commonly used instead of the
'
'
ayayo),
&
to please
Verbs
as,
in
&
.
al
>
to take,
'
, . & ,
>?*">
JEol.
to
from
defend ;
m 1
P f
&, ^^-,^&,
<%, |, ^.
W
16*171 "'
K'
'
~
X "
'
to perceive,
io increase >
to
/
wardj off
"',<
poetic derivatives from other verbs
^, ].
>
and
from
to scatter.
ifo}^\
'
'
syllabic
temporal.
to bring,
>
,,,
&,
the
, # ,
alV
,,
,. , , ,--.
,
.
, &.,.
>>
>-,
Vi
,,
*-
'
>
&
,
126
to avoid,
to roll,
&>
to miscarry,
>,, .
Verbs
in
derivatives from other verbs, take their tenses

;
as,
to increase,
}
from their primitives

from
&
,
,
'
),
),
> to order.'
to be hated,
to please,
to increase
-,
to be indignant,
in
Imp.
Imper.
, , ,,
}
& &&&,
desideratives, inceptives or imitatives,

}
and poetic
to desire to learn;
from
to restrain.
-),
*M-
-, ^,
&,
derivatives from other verbs; as,

to he blackish;
&>
,,
,
, -, &,&
,
&&^
&
,,. ,
*X<> *Xj<,
{&,
Verbs
, .&,
{,
-^
\&,
&
to find,
,,
s
&.
by syncope.
&,
to take,
to err,
,
, -,
, ., ,
.
,
.
, . .,
, -,
-, ,, ,
-,
.
.
,
,
.
VERB.
&,
Ion.
to go,
,
,
&
2d F.
&,
>.
,
,.
Pres. Part.
2d
Pres. Part
-, , .
, ,
,&,&.
,
.
.
, , ..
,
,'
-, -,
,,, ,
127
,,,
to throw,
,
,
,
, .,
,
.
, -, , ,
2d
2d Pers.
Optat.
,.
to live,
,
, &.
,
,,
,
,
&,
.
,
-,
,
,
,
. &,
to
&
bud,
to feed,
&,
&&.
to will,
)
>
,&, .
&.
to eat,*
Verbs in
to feed;
,,
.
'
"
\ to
(
,
,
preceded by a consonant, or by
to
as,
^,
honor.
.
,
,
,
.
,
,
.
,,
,
,
,,
.
,
.
,
,
,
~
, ,
,&,,..
'
.*
,)
'
,&*~
to
marry,
*
grow
old,
, ,,
Pres. Inf.
Part.
'
to become,'
>
)
Ion. for
*** \
)
>
to
know,
'
.
".
128
VERB.
J.
, ,-,, ,
,
,
., .
. ,
,
,
,
, -,
,
{, &,
(.
to learn.
2d
from
**
to burn.)
(,
to divide,
,
,
to bite,
&,
,,
,
to sleep,
<
{
>
to
fear,
to
want,
,
,
,
.
,,
,
,
to teach,
\
Poet,
&,
run away
<
,
&,
&.
,
, .,
, '&,
,
, &.
Imperat.
Poet,
,
6
, ., . ,.
, ,,, &,
.
-,
,
],
&,
,
,
&,
\ to
seem,
to be able,
to
go
in,
put
on,
-,
, &,
,
Verbs
in
preceded by a consonant
E.
to rouse,
,
,-,
,
.
.
<&,
3- & ,'&.
to
,
&,
&,-
as,
^\'(
&-
to roll.
,
,
2d
F.
& -,
).&,
-\
M.
for
&,
t0 eat >
& &,,
,,
,
,
,,
Verbs
in
from
to
Verbs in
,
,
*',
,
.
,
, ,, ^,,
,
, ,
,
,,
&, .
&. &
-, , &.
Paul.-p.-
F.
desideratives formed from futures; as,
to desire to
marry, from
Att.
&,
to drive,
\
)
&
,
to
ask '
to
go
to
make
to
come f
{
(
to ruin,
red,
'&
<
from
as,
&,
&
,
Optat.
polysyllable derivatives
Inf.
Att.
to say, to ask,
in
Sync,
Sync,
know,
Plup.
to avoid.
Verbs
\-,
',
,
,
,
,
,. ,
, .
or
&,
poetic derivatives from other verbs; as,

to burn,
to see,
,,
129
to eat,
to sleep,
to find,
^,
&
,,
.& ^-.
'
&,
&,
"
.,
,&, Sync, ty&ov,

Perf.
,
,
%,
^.
&
.,,,
, &,
which
see.
,
&,
.
Sync,
130
%$,
,
-,
&
-,, , -
VERB.
,
.
to have,
to cook,
,,
,
,
..
-, . .
2d
.
to be
young,
to
-,
to sharpen,
&,
mil,
to touch,
f
-&
&.
-,
-,
3-, &, &.

-, &, &-
, &.
&,,
&,
&,
-&
& &^
&,
(-,
-.)
S
Q--,
,
..
&, &,
to die,
]
&,
2d F.
gen.
#ofe
&-,
..
&,-,
Pr.
&,
Imperat.
Opt.
Part.
Inf.
2d
.
,
, ,
,
&.
,.,
,
\ ,,
(
to leap,
,-,
,
&,
,
&,
,
&6
{
|
-t
, , %\,
&,
Imper.
,
,
, &.
to gird,
,
, -,
,
to live,
$
)
-,
&, &, $-
.
C
to place,
to set,
-,
,, ,
,
,
.
,
,
&,
,
&. .
Verbs
in
tion
from
^,
derived from contracts of the same significa-
from
as,
to
wage war.
to
come,
\ ft",
,
.
to propitiate,
,,
,,
.
)
to fly,
to burn,
,
,
to be
angry
'
&,
.,Pr.
.
, &,
,,
,
,-, ,
, &
, .
, -,
,
,
&.
,
, ,.
.
.
, &. &
, ,
,,,-,, ,,&.
,
,.
,
,
,
%xBiot
to
gain,
,,
.
,
,
to overtake,
to
weep,
to satisfy,
to
hang,
&
&,
&.
Imperat.
to hear,
&\-
>
-\-
to mix,
to",
,
,
,
&, &, &.

',
,
to direct,
131
,,
132
VERB.
&
%,
,
,
-,
, ,, . &,
. , ,.
,--
to
2d
Inf.
>
Part,
, ,.
(-&
to roll,
to kiss,'
\
&,
,,
.
,,
,
,
,
,
&,
,
&,
.
,
, ,,,--
Att.
.,
obtain by
lot,
\
/
>
^ 0,/
ei%
W>,
Att.
&>
to receive,
\)
^^,
to be concealed,
&,
-,
,
,
,
&, ,
&.
Imp.
&
-&6,
&,
,
,
.
&, &.
.
to learn,
\
,-
\
to fight,
j
C
to be about to do,
s-
to be
a concern
to,
&,
,, , .
,
,
,, -,
, -,
.
& ,.
&, , &. &
,,
&,
/^
&,
2d F.
&
,
}
,
,,
,
,
.
, -, , -
LIST OF DEFECTIVE VERBS
,
,
(-,
,
,
>
remember,
to
to remain,
)
wipe
to
off,
.
(
to dwell,
, ,,
Verbs
and
in
to sell,
into
as,
),
,&.,
,
formed from others by inserting as,
from
some of which change s
to fall, from
,
.
, .
, , -,
, ,,
,
-,
{, .
, .
&,
&
{&,
&,
,
&.,
, ,
,
&,
(
,
, ,-
,
,
to bite,
),
,,
,
,
,
),
&,
to smell.
Att.
to swell,
>
,
&
to think,
\-
to
>
go away,
to slide,'
&.
&
5,
8/,
^-
,
,.
, ( ,
&, .
//,
to mix,
uly
133
to destroy,
(
12
&,
134
,
,
,
,
I
swear,
),
,
,
-,
, ,
,
,
-,
& , ,
..
,
,
, -, ,,
,
, ,&.
, ,
,
,
.
.
{^ , -,
.
2d F.
to
wipe
off,
to benefit,
&,
to excite,
)
,
,
to smell,
to owe,
,
&,
,,,
,
&,
&,
to suffer,
to spread,
&,
,
,&,, Boeot.
for
&,
&,
&.
&.
, -,&.
,
3~ov f
&>
to fly,
)
to fasten,
to drink,
, -,
,
,
,,
,
,
&.
,
,
&,
, ., , , , ,-&, ,, -
to cook,
;!
,
,
&,
77.
,
.
.
,
,,
.
,
, &, &
, ,
.
.
Imperat.
2d F.
for
&.
,
^
,
,
.
,
,
to
\
to fill%
>
~
,
,
,
-^ .
.
,
,,,, -,
-,
,
&.
,
,
&, -,
, &.
,
,
, .,
,
,
,.
Imp. Pas.
Sync,
to sell,
.,
to burn,
)
to fall,
&,
to sneeze,
to inquire,
Att.
to do,
)
(
to flow,
C
)
to break,
to strengthen.
>
&,,
farewell.
&
1%77\,
,
&. ,
.,
, ,
,
, ,,,
, --. ', ,
, ,
&,
'
, ,,,,
-, &.
.
,,
, ,2d F.
,,
,
'
135
,
,
give to drink,
&6.,
t0
,
,
înguish,
to scatter,
)
&.
&,
.
{,
..
,
,
,
,
, . {,,-, ,),,
, &., ,
,
,
,
{,
,,,
,,
, ,,
136
VERB.
2d
Verbs
in
derivatives from verbs in
tenses from their primitives ; as,
from
to
)
&,
out.
to spread,
-,
>
to find,
,
.,
,
,
.
,
,
!,
.
.
,
.
,
), , ^.
.
{,
,
,
, -,
, ,
{, , &,.
,,
. ,,{, -,
, -].&,
{,
, -, . .
f
>
to bear,
to extend,
to cut,
to
,
,
,&,
,
,
,
,
,
, ,.
See
to have,
,
,
,,
,'}
,
,
,
spread^
to *"*
vu
pure, form their
&.
u,
pour
Inf.
bring forth,
to bore,
'
to
wound,
to run,
2d F.
"J
>
2d F.
to eat,
for
.-
.
,
,
,
/, ,
LIST OF DEFECTIVE VEHBS.
),
to obtain,
'
'
happen,
<
rr
J
'
137
.
'
'/,
, , ,-&
\.
,
.
to promise,
&& &, $1,
Verbs
poetic
in
from
Verbs
from other verbs
as,
to destroy.
in w, polysyllables
,
,
derivatives
as,
to show.
.
\
>
to say,
.
, ,.
,
, . , &
}
, ., ^, \'-,
to bear,
,
,
,
. ?\,
, ,
\&,\.
\.,
^, &.
,,
,,,
.
.
,
{#, & .-,
, #-,
,&.
,
1st
1st
.
,
Sync.
&
&
),
,
'),
. Imperat.
'#-,
2d
to be sooner,
to destroy,
\
>
to
produce,
12*
'&,
#',
'#
'-^,
138
VERB.
,
\,
,
,
,
.
.
,
.
.
~
,.
,
), ,
.
,,,&,
&.
&
,
,
&, &^
for
to receive, hold.
,}
'
-,
-, ,,--
to rejoice.
,)
.
>
t0
Z aP e
tOCOl r
to
>
>
heap up,
&
&
&,
t0
-,
',
&.
-&
push,
:}
IMPERSONAL VERBS.
Impersonal verbs are either used alone, or they are accompanied by an infinitive or part of a sentence with which they
agree.
Most of them are also more or less frequently used
personally, sometimes with rather a different meaning.
The
following are some of those in most frequent use.
,
,
,
,
, ,,,, , ,,
,
,
,
,,
,
,
,
, , , , , ., ,
,-,
it
is
befits,
it
it
belongs,
necessary;
it
it
concern
it
is
is
likely
it
profitable
is
becomes
it
it is
suitable;
is
!\,
happens
it
it
it offers ;
it
wont
allowable
pleases
possible
it is
lawful, it
it occurs,
is
it
seems;
it is
behoves
it suffices, it is sufficient.
Obs. 1. Under impersonal verbs may be comprehended those which

which grammarians
denote changes of the weather, as,
sometimes expressed, as,
or
6
explain by an ellipsis of
Herodot.
Obs. 2. Many verbs are used impersonally in the passive voice, even
neuters which otherwise can have no proper passive, as,
, ,,
139
ADVERBS.
PARTICLES.
The name
of particles
and conjunctions, that
is,
is
given to the adverbs, prepositions,
to the indeclinable parts of speech.
ADVERBS.
I.
The
article, substantives, adjectives,
,,
,
are used adverbially.

1.
,',
pronouns, and verbs,
Substantives and adjectives in the accusative, frequently with the
article;
,,
altogether;
in the quickest manner.
as,
quickly;
at last.
,The
2.
as,
article, substantives, adjectives,
4.
as,
and pronouns, in the dative
,,,
'
,
,
Substantives, adjectives, and pronouns, with prepositions preceding

immediately ;
out of the way, afar off;
just as.
;
come on;
The imperatives of some verbs; as,
nay, indeed, assuredly. So the second aorist indicative
or
be it so, well, from
I wish ; and the optative
universally, altogether
5.
publicly;
hardly ;
privately;
here, or there;
this way, thus.
justly, with justice ;
Substantives, adjectives, and pronouns, in the genitive ; as,
there, here.
henceforth, hereafter ;
,
,
,
'3.
,,
at first ;
finally ;
Particularly neuter adjectives as,
formerly ; ijavjra f quietly;
,, ,
,
,
,
continually;
, , ', ',
.
II. Derivative adverbs come from nearly all the parts of

speech, and are too numerous to be specified, but some of
their principal terminations are >,
}
}
and
, ,, ,
,
,,
1.
Adverbs in
wisely
Those
in
', ',
3.
in fiocks ;
like
Others in
as,
come from
,
,
',
end in
verbs, but
from
secretly ;
Some
unanimously ;
a dog.
generally
from substantives;
4.
, ^,
are formed from the genitive plural ; as, from

suitably, in a becoming manner.
are generally derived from the nominative ; as, from
,
,
,,
,
,
,
2.
here
some
or
in
in a word, summarily
there, scatter ingly
and
,,
according to wealth.
adverbs derived and compounded from substantives and verbs
and
in a body;
and
without
watchfully.
are mostly derived from verbs j as, from
after the manner of the Greeks, in Greek.
come from numerals above
6. Those in
as, from
five times.
7. Adverbs formed from prepositions end in
as, from
without;
below.
fighting
as,
,, ,
5.
Those
in
'
,
,
140
PARTICLES.
Certain adverbs of place, answering to the questions

whither ? whence ? are chiefly derived from nouns
those denoting the place where ending in <,
&,
and a few in
whither, in
and whence, in
III.
where
,,
,,,, ,
&.
,
&,
,
,
,
,
,
, , ,
Where.
Primitives.
on
the
Whither.
ground,
to the
Whence.
ground,
from
,
,
&, &, ^,
', ^',
&,
',
ground.
thence.
,
'^^,
home, or towards home, from home.
home,
at
the
&,
thither,
there,
,
, , ,&,
,
,
,, , ,
, , ,,
,,
in the same place, to the
at Athens,
to
same place.
from the same place
Athens,
from
Olympia,
from Olympia.
Athens.
ava,
at Olympia,
to
in Heaven,
to
above,
upwards,
from
above.
every where.
to every side,
from
every side.
from Heaven.
Heaven,
Obs. Adverbs derived from prepositions have but one termination for
the place where and whither ; thus,
stands for below and downwards.
stand for here and hither;
Likewise
elsewhere, to another place ; and
where, whither ;
Moreover some adverbs in
sometimes
there, thither.
denote the
place where, as
&,
, &, &,
&
&.
IV. Some adverbs have such an affinity, that, beginning

with a vowel, they are indefinites ; with n, interrogatives ; with
redditives.
nterrooative.
Indefinite.
C
'ho
r
**'
which way,
by what means.
,^-
hoto far,
,
,
'
66
>
\when.
whence,
odi, where.
,
,
*l
after xohat
'
m
'
manner.
often.
which way ?
(by what means
T
i
Redditive.
,,
tfor what
'
reason
when ?
whence ?
;
where ?
;
;
;
hoto
after
;
much
often ?
way.
by that means.
^
,
,
,
so far,
for that reason.

>
,,,
&,
what manner.
how
this
or
how far?
&
6-9 1
how much,
how
71
ifor what reason.
&,
,.
then.
thence.
there.
so
much
after that manner.

so often.
ADVERBS.
,
,,
141
,, ,,,
ADVERBIAL PARTICLES USED IN COMPOSITION.
, ,,,,,,
prefixed to words, increase their signifiloudly roaring;

very manifest;
very rich;
very shady ;
vo;
loudly shouting.
very bad ;
difficult
Jvc signifies trouble, difficulty, or misfortune ; as,
which, howIts opposite is
to be unfortunate.
to be borne;
easy to be borne
ever, is not an inseparable particle ; as,
to be fortunate.
having no feet, or very short
denote privation; as,
and
innumerable: but sometimes
incurable;
feet;
widely flowing.
increases; as,
invisible.
From
signifies privation ; as,
from
or
it implies
vary woody. From
ayavxi denotes increase; as,
Sometimes
the
same
bed,
a
as,
one
union and collection;
wife.
of
an ear of corn. It often
the same as
it is redundant ; as,
unworthy.
assumes before a vowel; as,
tqi,
,
,^,^, , ,
,
,
",
,
cation ; as,
exesssive hunger
racious ;
/.,
'.,
>[$,
",
INTERJECTIONS.
Interjections are included in Greek
are the principal.
which the following
..
,
,
.
,
..
,
2.
Rejoicing ; as,
Grieving ; as,
3.
Laughing;
4.
5.
Bewailing ; as,
Wishing ; as,
6.
Rejecting
7.
Praising
; as,
8.
Condemning; as,
Admiring ; as,
1.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
as,
a.
,'#. ,
Deriding ;
Calling ; as,
Enjoining silence
Threatening ;
Raging ;
,,.
,
.
.
as,
or
oT,
as,
under adverbs of exclamation, of
; as,
.,
as, oval,
as, svot.
Obs. The Greek grammarians seem to have improperly reckoned as

adverbs, what in the Latin, and other languages, are called interjections;
since the latter are mere sounds excited by strong emotion, and have no
close connection with the rest of the sentence, for the cases joined with
some of them may be easily explained by an ellipsis, except the vocative,
which is always placed absolutely; while, on the contrary, adverbs, properly so called, always qualify the signification of some verb, participle, adjective, or other adverb.
It may be further observed, that many words
are considered as adverbs by some grammarians, and as conjunctions by
others.
COMPARISON OF ADVERBS.
Adverbs derived from the genitive plural by changing
;, form their comparative and superlative in the same
manner from the genitive plural of the comparative and superinto
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,.
,,
142
PARTICLES.
lative
from
wisely,
as,
the genitive plural of
wise,
, ,.. , ,
, ,
, ,
,
Obs. Instead of the comparative and superlative in

the adjective is
frequently used adverbially in the neuter singular of the comparative, and
as,
the neuter plural of the superlative
After the same analogy are compared
basely,
very,
adverbs not derived from adjectives ; as,
near, dooov,
ay
, ,',
Adverbs formed from prepositions, as well as some

above,
and
as,
Yet instead of these we as often find
&c.
in
'
others, are
near,
compared
PREPOSITIONS.
The
,, ,
,
,,
, ,,, , ,
,,.
syllables, viz.
eighteen,
are
prepositions
syllables, viz.
six
of
&v,
or
which are monoand twelve dis-
and,
Their meaning and construction
will
be given
in the Syntax.
CONJUNCTIONS.
Conjunctions
may
be divided, in reference to their signification, into
the following classes.

1.
,,
Copulative; as,
Poet.
;Je,
,
,,', ,,
,
,
, , ,, ,
neither, nor.
2.
3.
4.
to
,, , , ,
Disjunctive; as,
Concessive; as,
Adversative; as,
indeed;
Poet.
although.
but;
but,
which answers
,
,,,
,,,,
for;
Causal;
6.
Illative or rational; as,
7.
or.
yet, nevertheless.
5.
likewise,
),
,,,,
and;
as,
ovv }
because; on, that, because;

since, for as much as.
wherefore;
therefore;
therefore.
Final or perfective ;
that, in order that.
as,
,,
,,,
lav, T\v, av, if.

Conditional ; as,
in rendering which use is commonly
9. Potential ; as, av, Poet,
made of may, can, might, could, would, or should.
or
10. Expletive ; as,
which are not easily translated into other languages, but have a
,
peculiar expression, the loss of which would be discovered by a critical
judge of the niceties of Greek composition.
8.
, ,,
,,
,,,,
SYNTAX.
Every
sentence, even the simplest, must contain a subject
and a predicate.
&
,
,
,-,
The subject is that of which any thing is declared, and the

predicate that which is declared concerning the subject, as,
the soul
the sun shines;
\
yu /, are the subjects, and
is immortal;
where
the predicates, the substantive verb,
which is commonly called the copula, being considered as
forming a part of the predicate.
Words in sentences have a two-fold relation to one another,

namely, that of concord or agreement, and that of government
or influence.
Concord
is
when one word agrees with another
some
in
accidents, as in gender, number, person, or case; and government, when one word requires another to be put in a certain
case or mood.
CONCORD.
Agreement of one Substantive with another.
Rule I. Substantives signifying the same thing

agree in case
as,
"
ij
,,
7; 6
Homer thepoet ;
the city Thebes;
' ,^,
of Homer the poet.

of the city Thebes.
,
'. ,
,
, , , ,' ,,
,
m
Obs. 1. The substantive added to another

the same case contains
generally an explanation, or fuller definition, but not unfrequently it denotes character or purpose; as,
using me as a
counsellor, Plato.
Obs. 2. Sometimes one of the substantives

supplied by an infinitive or part of a sentence
sc.
Thucyd.
is
understood
or
as,
,
its
Eurip.
*
Orest. 1103.
place
'
Hither are to be referred the following and similar examples, where

&c. stand in the accusative, in apposition with
the rest of the sentence
aXXu
but,
as the poet says, no labor is a reproach;
,
but do we, as the saying is, come after the feast? Plato
;
J
:
,,,
144
greatest of
you
all,
CONCORD.
x) v a) v
see your own territory increased,
Plato.
t
but what is the
Xen.
Agreement of an Adjective with a Substantive.
An adjective agrees with a substantive in

II.
gender, number, and case ; as,
- ,,
),
,',
a just man.
a beautiful woman.
,,,
?,
,
,
), , ^
This rule applies
ciple
to the article, adjective, adjective-pronoun,
my
as,
chariot;
the soldiers
Obs. 1.
large rivers.
high mountains.
these
and
two laws ;
parti-
oi
having heard.
Sometimes an adjective does not agree in gender and number

to which it is joined, but with another of equivalent
with the substantive
/,
of Hector, Horn.;
signification; as,
Thucyd.
for
Dionys. Halicar.
Sometimes an adjective
ing word;
is
Herodot.
(sc.
Obs. 2.
adjectives
,The
,'.
feminine dual
as,
&
referred to a substantive implied in a preced-
as,
Hesiod.
is
IV. 110.
'
often joined with masculine
Isocr.
197.
Sometimes also masculine adjectives are found with the feminine singu467.
tsQOij, the suck-giving dexo, Horn. Odys.
and plural ; as,
lar
&^,
tragedians use the masculine for the feminine, especially when the
plural instead of the singular of a female is used ; as, oi
spoken by Alcestis of herself, Eurip. Also when a chorus of women are
speaking of themselves.
The
,-\,, ,^,
Obs. 3. An infinitive, or part of a sentence, often supplies

the place of the substantive, and then the adjective is put in
Theophrast. ;
as,
the neuter singular
;
Thucyd.
on
in the neuter plural
Herodot.
Thucyd.
.
}
38.
as,
88.
Sometimes
Frequently a substantive verb takes for its subject, instead

of an infinitive or part of a sentence, the subject of an infinitive or part of a sentence, with which the adjective agrees in
for
as,
gender, number, and case
I am right to punish you, Aristoph.;
,,
for
\,
Herodot.
ol
,
;
for
],
&Demosth.
;;
AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES.
Obs.
An
4.
adjective in the neuter gender
145
-,,-
must often be
understood as,
or
is powerful, iEschin.
man is naturally deceitful, Aristoph. ;
Menand. Sometimes the substantive is expressed ; as,
a poet is a light thing, Plato. Thus in
Latin, triste lupus stabulis, Virg.
The neuters
&c. may be joined with substantives
he
of any gender, number, or case as,
ov
wili bring not less tlian twenty thousand horse, Xen. ;
Iv
|
referred to
truth
,,,
,
,,
&,
, ,
,,,
;
Plato
Id.
Proper names in the singular are often accompanied by the neuters
and others; as,

first rank amongst the Athenians, Lucian;
Thucyd.
keep thou the
may have an adjective plural

Also a substantive plural may have
an adjective dual, when no more than two persons or things
are alluded to
as,
Horn. II.
428, where
two vultures only are meant.
Obs. 5.
substantive dual
Horn.
as,
Obs.
The
6.
adjectives
,
,
',
)
same kind, usually

thing; as,
and others of the

any
in the middle of the lake, Herodot.
signify the middle, the summit, &,c. of

Id.
Obs.
often used as adjectives ; as,

she taught the Greek language,
Sometimes one of the substantives is put in the
as, &
Aristoph.
for
for
Eurip.
Substantives
7.
are
, ,, ,
,
,
,
,, ^,. ,
Herodot.
genitive
Obs. 8. Adjectives referred to substantives are often used

adverbs, or for substantives in the dative, particularly
adjectives denoting time ; as,
for
he gladly goes to Cyrus, Xen.
for
they slept all night, Horn.
for
for
%&,
Id.
for
So
also
%,
,
,
&
,
,,,
-& &,,
;
participles in
Herodot.
Demosth.
some instances
at last he said,
as,
at last they derided me,

choose boldly, Aristoph.;
let
us quickly consider, Id.
Obs. 9. An adjective may be used without a substantive, the

one from which it takes its gender, number, and case, being
understood as,
the wise man;
sc.
the desert, Herodot.
Aristoph. So the pronouns
&,c.
Also participles as,
the spectators laugh, Aristoph.
Anacr ;
13
,
&
,,,
, &,
&, ,
146
CONCORD.
Neuters
Isocr.
way
quently used in this

thus, Plato
sc.
the truth is
beautiful things are

to
the cavalry, Xen.
Id.
in particular are fre-
as,
Thucyd.
difficult,
nob
literally, before the
Trojan affairs, before the Trojan war, Id.
after the battle of Leuctra, Strabo
the future is unknown to all men, Dem.
if you remember the past, Isocr.
Words thus taken are said to be taken substantively.
the Greeks,
;,.
Frequently adverbs with the article prefixed are

adjectives
as,
the upper city,
ot
the men of that time, Herodot.
Obs. 10.
equivalent
Thucyd.
to
,&,
:
ot
they acquire the character of substantives; as,

neighbors;
sc.
the morrow ;
ol
ol
,
,
,
],
,
,
,
illustrious.
Neuter adjectives, with and without the
Obs. 11.
quently used adverbially
for
,
,
Hence
the nearest relations, Aristoph.
article, are
the
the
very
fre-
first, at first ;
as,
the future,
henceforth;
diligently;
unexpectedly.
Agreement of a Verb with a Nominative.
verb agrees with

III.
ber and person ; as,
,
,,
its
nominative in num-
I write.
you two hear.
Obs.
1.
,,,
The
nominative
is
,
,
. , ,,
stress is
it
is
the form of the verb, or from the connection, and

I love, thou lovest,
laid on it; as,
known from
no
the poets say.
commonly omitted where
he loves.
In particular, verbs indicating the employment of a definite

person are often used without a nominative expressed ; as,
the trumpeter gave a sigsc.
or
nal,
sc.
Xen.
So frequently the plurals

Also verbs whose subject
preceding verb
Marcellum quam tardus
An
sit,
infinitive,
\, and
others,
construed with the
as,
Xen.
Obs. 2.
is
for
as in Latin, nosti
Cres. ap. Cic.
or
some part of
sentence, often
as,
supplies the place of a nominative
it was base to betray your benefactors,
;
Thucyd.
AGREEMENT OF VERBS.
on
&,
Thus
Xen.
manifest,
147
was
fy, that the king was terrified
as, e'lfaii
also with impersonal verbs
;
lawful for me to depart, Plato; which otheryou have need of

as,
wise have no nominative
wings, Aristoph.
, it rains.
it is
Exc.
The
1.
nominative of the neuter plural
commonly joined with a verb singular

tqI /, animals run.
,,
the chariots fled

many arms icere taken.
/3
Exc.
,,
Sometimes, though
2.
nomina-
rarely, the
masculine and feminine plural
tive of the
is
as,
is
joined
with a verb singular
mony of
serves as a prelude to the verses
as,
the soft .har-
for
hymns
the
that follow, Pind.
Exc.
3.
,
-,
nominative dual
$()
often put with a
is
tivo men came

as,
verb plural
Also a nominative plural, meaning
hither, Aristoph.
but two persons or things, may be put with a verb
my two
in the dual; as,
;
,
,
& ,
horses excel, Horn.
Exc. 4. A collective noun may be joined with a

verb either of the singular or of the plural number
or
as,
the multi-
tude decreed.
plural verb
is
and
often joined with
on
of plurality which is involved

as,
rrj
Herodot.
Plato.
This construction may be explained by the following
passage, where the plural is placed first, and then the singular,
~,
denoting its parts
Horn.
account of the
notion
,^
'
Accusative before the Infinitive.
IV.
it
as,
The
infinitive
mode has an
accusative before
I think that you are
rich.
;;
CONCORD.
148
, ,
, & ^,&
Obs. 1. The pronoun accusative before the

sometimes understood
as,
;
infinitive
is
qiov
sc.
if any one should seize you,
and lead you away to prison, saying that you acted unjustly,
Plato.
Thus in Latin, nos abiisse rati, sc. eos, Virg.
&
,
, , ,
An
adjective or participle expressed
pronoun understood
as,
he gave
is,
Xen.
truth,
to assist us,
I entreat
agree with the
and
that
represent the
you, remembering what has been said,
Lys.
The accusative with
Obs. 2.
leave to come
sc.
me
may
the infinitive
is
put especially after the verbs
and similar verbs of speaking.

sive, either the accusative remains before the
into the nominative of the leading verb
as,
, ,
Id.
When
these are in the pas-
changed
Xen.
infinitive, or it is
videtur, has the
same construction.
&,
Obs. 3. Use is very frequently made of

or
with the indicative or
optative, instead of the accusative with the infinitive ; as,
Xen. ;
Herodot. Both constructions
are sometimes united; as,
it is said that the daughter of Nisus fell
in love with Minos, and that she sheared off her father's hair, Pausan.
or
as,
Sometimes even the accusative with the infinitive follows
they relate that the fates said, Diod. Sic.
&
-9 ,
,
&,
stances
Exc.
-dai,
Xen.
In a few
in-
has a similar construction.
The
infinitive
same person
takes before it the same case

verbs relate to the
&,
,
as the preceding verb,
when both
as,
he says that he was the cause.
Obs. 1. As the infinitive takes before it the same case as the preceding
verb, when both verbs relate to the same person, and the accusative when
they do not, it sometimes takes both the nominative and accusative ; as,
he said that not he, but the other, had
the command, Thucyd.
'
When
the infinitive and the preceding verb relate

infinitive is generally
omitted, but expressed when an emphasis lies upon it; as
oh;
he said that he heard, Xen. ;
sc.
you said that you alone warded off desc.
Thus also before the infinitives of verbs
struction, Horn.
Obs.
2.
to the
same person, the subject of the
,,
,
which take the same case

sc.
after as before
them
Aristoph.
Obs. 3. This rule obtains also, when the

ceded by the article to, or by the particle
as,
infinitive is pre
as,
,
" , ,
SAME CASE AFTER A VERB AS BEFORE
I am
);
he brought
sailed out governor to
proud of having escaped
not
when accused, Demosth.
it
14U
IT.
pass, that he himself
to
Abydus, Xen.
infinitive has before it an accusative, and the

preceding verb a nominative, although both verbs relate to the same person as, oiiial
I think that I shall be filled with
wisdom Plato ;
Jia, Apollod.
Sometimes the
Obs. 4.
;
The same Case after a Verb as before
Any
V.
may have
verb
,
,,
,
' , ,,,
before
thing ; as,
as
when
it,
both
the
it.
same case
words
refer
to
after
the
it
same
I am Socrates.
you remain a slave.
-, you say
'
the river is called Euphrates,

that you are a god.
they begged him to be zealous,
he forbade them to be navigators,
we think
the earth to be a sphere,

instead of being a city, it becam*
a castle.
,,
, , ,,, ,,, -
Obs. 1. The verbs which most frequently have the same

case after them as before them, are,
,,
Substantive and neuter verbs
1.
The
2.
as,
&,c.
passive of verbs of calling or naming,
appearing,
&-C.
as,
&,c.
% To
Obs.
called; as,
'
Theocrit.
choosing,
signifying to be
belongs also
Soph.;
So in Latin, rexque paterque audisti coram, Hor.
this rule
Epist.
i.
7, 37.
% ,,
)
,
When
Obs. 3.
tives of different
former
as,
(Vc->
any of the above verbs are placed between two nominanumbers, they are commonly governed in number by the
sxizrov
the division was a hundred men, Xen.
Demosth. but sometimes by the latter; as,
'
Thucyd.
in. 112.
ing between two substantives of different genders

the former, but sometimes with the latter; as,
Pausan.
',
,
'&
Obs. 4.
An
participles stand-
having the genitive or dative before it, governed

be followed by the accusative ; as,
rr
she granted yuur petition to be young,
being under-
may
that
Lucian
& , & &,
infinitive
by any other word,
So
commonly agree with
is,
Stood, they entreated the Athenians to assist them, Herodot.
13*
150
CONCORD.
Obs. 5. The Latin poets, in imitation of the Greeks, sometimes put the
nominative instead of the accusative after the infinitive, when it relates to
the same person with the nominative to the preceding verb ; as, rcttulit
Ajax esse Jovis pronepos, for se esse pronepotem, Ovid.
The Construction of Relatives.
VI. The relative

, , agrees with the antecedent in gender, number, and person and is construed through all the cases as the antecedent would
be in its place
as,
;
,/,,
,,
;
you who saved me.
eiis
'
Iv
the soldiers
he commanded.
which they encamped.
which he wrote.
the letter
ij
whom
the villages in
If no nominative come between the relative and the verb,

the relative will be the nominative to the verb.
But if a nominative come between the relative and the verb,
the relative will be of that case, which the verb or noun following, or the preposition going before, usually governs.
Obs.
and
antecedent often stands in the same clause,
,
,
,& ,
same
case, with the relative
this is the
,
SC
,
. ,
The
1.
in the
Xen.
Xen.
ov
,,
as,
man whom you saw;
Plato
&
Plato.
Obs. 2. The relative frequently stands alone, the antecedent

being understood ; as,
for
Sometimes the relative is expressed in
one case, and must afterwards be supplied in another as,
,
,
for
invented,
and
is
by means of a certain engine, which Archimedes

named cochlia, for and which is named, Diod. Sic.
,,
Obs. 3. When the relative comes after two words of different persons, it agrees with the first or second person rather
'
than the third
Horn.
as,
;
,
&
, , ,
Obs.
word
4.
as,
The
antecedent
is
,, '
implied
often
in a
preceding
is referred to the personal

where
pronoun contained in
Xen.
is the antecedent
where
contained in
to of, Hesiod. Theog. 450.
;
CONSTRUCTION OF RELATIVES.
151
,',
,,
Obs. 5. The indefinite adjectives oroc, oJoc, &c. are also sometimes construed like relatives ; as,
Herodot. But these have
commonly other adjectives either expressed or understood, which answer
i'}0&is, Xen. ; and are often
to them; as,
applied to different substantives ; as,
'
Demosth.
Exc.
case of
The
1.
its
relative is often attracted
antecedent
vavalv
,,
gave you.
into the
as,
with the ships which he had.

let him partake of the joy which I
&,
,
, ,
Obs. 1. The antecedent is often found in the same clause

with the relative attracted
as,
Xen.
I enjoy what goods I have :
for
Frequently it is understood
as,
Lucian
and this for
;
vav;
,,
Thucyd.
', ,
,
&
,
'
,
9'&,
,
, ,
' &'^,,
'
,
'
'
,' , '
}
as,
Other relatives also undergo a similar attraction
fewer of such evils as we have now
Frequently
with the substantive belonging to it, is
attracted into the case of its antecedent, instead of standing in the nominative with
as,
for otot
Obs. 2.
mentioned, Plato.
Thucyd.
Xen.
Also when
it
for
stands for
In like manner
Demosth.
',
~,
as,
as,
Aristoph.
Obs. 3. The relative
is sometimes used in phrases which seem to
have been originally formed from two clauses referring to each other ; as,
thus,
Oe
instead of
Plato, Alcibiad. II. pr. fin.
exceedingly great,
Aristoph. Plut. 750.
Obs. 4. The phrase
is usually considered as one word, in
the sense of the Latin nemo non, every one, in which case
is put in
the same case as the pronoun relative following; as,
they underwent every danger, Demosth. ;
tcpaaav
for
1-
/'
',
for
they said that every one returned weeping,
Obs. 5.
Xen.
The antecedent is sometimes put in the case of the relative, and

omitted, when the former is a demonstrative pronoun, with or
,,
? '', ,
the latter
without a substantive, and would otherwise be joined with
'
what you ask

for
.%
is
for
~>'
not icorthy of an ansicer, Plato ;

; who are these strangers
Eurip.
as,
whom I see?
Exc. 2. The relative frequently differs in number

from the antecedent, when the idea of plurality is
, ,
, ,
involved in the singular
men who approach
them, Horn.
as,
they fascinate all

he
152
CONCORD.
whom he meets, Plato;

whom I apply will take part
salutes all
every one to
Obs.
The
'
',
me
with
,.
the less,
, ,,
is
&
is followed by relatives both singular and plural,

regarded altogether as one word, equivalent to the
singular
and the phrase
Thucyd.
-,
some; as,
and
Xen. ;
have you admired some men for their wisdom? Id.
In the same manner
is often used with a relative adverb following,
in which case the two are put for an adverb; as,
ore, sometimes,
Thucyd. ;
somewhere.
adjective
some
breastplates,
hit
;
When
Exc. 3.
the relative
is
substantives of different genders,

in
gender with the latter

ijv
placed between two

it sometimes agrees
as,
the constellation
which they
call the Goat,
, , ,,
, ,
Pausan.
Obs. When the antecedent is part of a sentence, the relative is put in

the neuter gender; as,
Demosth. Someb
times the relative does not agree in gender with the antecedent, but with
',
some synonymous word implied;
',
which
is left to all mortals,
as,
for viol
sc.
remains with me,
Eurip.
for nttther hope,
Id.
Agreement of an Adjective, Verb, or Relative, with Substantives coupled by a Conjunction.
Substantives singular connected by a copu-
VII.
(
lative conjunction,
tive plural
immortal.
Obs.
plural
1.
have an adjective, verb, or rela-
as,
who
are
If the substantives be of different persons, the verb

first person rather than the second,
must agree with the
&,
Castor and Pollux,
,
;
aal
and with the second rather than the third; as,

Plato.
Xen.
If the substantives are of different genders, the

plural must agree, with the masculine
rather than the feminine or neuter; as,
but this is only applicable to beings
Horn.
Obs.
2.
adjective or relative
which may have
&
life.
If the substantives signify things without life, the

adjective or relative plural must be put in the neuter gender
Obs.
3.
as, <d
and
riches are desirable on account
of honor,
Aristot.
powers
md
USE OF THE ARTICLE.
\,
153
a
1 will put on board
xul olvov
bread and water and wine, which shall keep off hunger from
you, Horn.
Obs. 4. The adjective or verb frequently agrees with one of

the substantives," mostly with the nearest, and is understood to
as, uiel
the rest
for
9
contention is always agreeable to you, and wars, and battles,
xal
\/., the strangers and the rest
Horn.
;
the multitude came,
of
xul
trates
and people
Obs.
for
The
5.
Thucyd.
tui;
are there in the other cities both magis-
Plato.
plural
as,
sometimes used
is
taken up the corpse, convey
;
D
The
put
or
after
eiphontes and his children, having

this place, Pausan.
it to
The Use of the

VIII.
article
is
Article.
used
before
substantives
which represent determinate individuals,

But more particularly,
classes.
whole
or
1. The article is used especially before substantives which

denote something that has been already mentioned, or that is
& ',
, ,
,
commonly known
as,
'
{'
'
they pursued as far as a certain village; there they halted

above the village icas an eminence, Xen. ;
the
the child (that
is,
for
herdsman having heard this and having taken up

which mention had before
j
the herdsman and child of
Again,
the poet, it being commonly understood that Homer is intended thereby ;
the Stagirite,
that is, Aristotle.
Hence proper names often receive the article ; as, 6
3
Socrates ;
Athens.
been made), Herodot.
'
$,
2. The article is prefixed to substantives which denote, not

determinate individuals of a class, but the whole class
as,
6
-9(7
foxes have holes,
-&', man
Luke
ix. 58.
mortal; al
Hence it is put with abstract nouns as,
virtue is not produced from riches, Plato.
is
; , , ; ; , &,
,,
3. The article is generally prefixed to substantives

are accompanied by the demonstrative pronouns
or the adjectives
as,
}
w hich
T
this river ;
this
man ;
that
al
day;
these islands;
all
6
the
men;
154
CONCORD.
,
,
', ,
the whole city

a whole year.
but
men
all
generally
ivi-
, ,,
used with the possessive pronouns

&c. ; as,
like
means thy son, but
like
oov, a son of thine.
Also with the interrogatives
but
only with reference to something preceding as,
; what sort
things
are
these?
that is, to which you refer, Eurip.
of
It is likewise
,
',
The
4.
tion,
article is generally
and omitted
happiness
put with the subject of a proposi-
in the predicate
as,
pleasure ;
pleasure is
happiness.
In some cases it is used in the predicate only as,
peace is the abstract good, Philem. Sometimes both subject and
predicate receive it, and sometimes neither of them ; as,
6
the light of the body is the eye, Matt. vi. 22.;
is the vieasure of all things, Plato.
ijSovij
is
-,
6?7.,
'&,-,
,
The
5.
neuter article
is
used with
punishing
the
infinitives, to
the
6.
The
cases
adverbs,
pai ticiples,
as,
the
the
Red
word
thyself, Plato.
from
its substantive by
prepositions with their
article is often separated
adjectives,
doing ill ;
Also with words and
maxim, Know
it
as,
admiration follows joy, Plut.

sentences taken materially, or for themselves as,
the
which
, , '
gives the signification of substantives
or
,
,
Sea, Herodot.
",
3,
the
nations that had been subdued, Xen.;

the Greeks of that
time, Plato ;
you sustained the war
against them, Demosth. When these words, for the sake of greater emphasis or clearness, are put after the substantive, they are preceded by the
article ; as,
I associate with good men, Xen. ;
to make war against Tissaphernes
tcho injured you, Id. ;
this excessive negligence,
Demosth. ;
the water in the lake, Herodot.
When
the article is put with an adverb or a preposition, grammarians suppose an
or
ellipsis of some convenient participle, particularly of
,
) , ,
,
,
, ,
,
,
', ,
-,
,,
,,
sometimes expressed;
Eurip.;
as,
Herodot.
Xen.
In like manner genitives are placed either between the

and the substantives by which they are governed, or
as,
after the substantive with the article before them
article
the king's ships, Thucyd.

and
the former case two and even three articles may stand together as,
the temple of Diana, Thucyd. ;
;
Very frequently the
,}
lv
sc.
iEschin.
Plato;
expressed
In
article
is
used without a substantive
as,
sc.
in the land of the king, Thucyd.
the affairs
of the Arcadians, Xen.
>
oi iv
the
,,
USE OF THE ARTICLE AS A rRONOUN.
fcoph
d.
.,
Thucyd.
in the city,
eg
the affairs
Herodot.
155
of Pausanias,
Xen.
The neuter
signifies
article standing alone with the genitive of a substantive,

every thing that pertains to the person or thing denoted by the
3,
it is necessary to bear what co?nes

substantive ; as,
from the gods, Eurip. It signifies particularly that which any one has
done, or is wont to do, or that has befallen him ; in which case it is put in
what fishermen are accustomed to do, Xen.
the singular; as,
Sometimes it is
the sciyi?ig of Homer, Plato.
Similarly
merely a periphrasis of the substantive in the genitive ; as,
fortune, that is, the things of fortune, Soph. ;
Plato.
In the same manner the possessive pronouns with the article are
as if
for
put instead of the personal pronouns ; as,
for
Eurip.
Herodot. ;
'
The
the
,,
,
',
,
,
, ,
^
of neoti
*'
as,
,,
with a proper name in

of the person named; as,
the companions of Archidamus, Xen. ;
2. the person
Priam and Panthous, Horn.;
or
plural article, followed by
accusative, signifies, 1. the companions
alone;
&,
the person and his companions ; as,

But when followed by
with his soldiers, Thucyd.
appellative, it signifies office or relation; as,
3.
,
,,,
TJirasybiilus
or
with an
,, ,
,
',',
^,
the priests.
Frequently the neuter article, with whatever it is attached to, is used

and
at first ;
adverbially; as,
for the fuimmediately;
Iv formerly ;
ture ;
now;
entirely ;
from henceforth;
as far as lies in me,
before this;
Also with an infinitive ; as,
to-day;
in you.
as far as regards him.
,
is rather a demonstrative pronoun,

Obs. In the old Greek poets 6, ,
and the substantives for the most part stand alone, as in Latin, where we
use the article
the.
Later writers also very frequently omit
The Use of the Article
as a
it.
Pronoun.
IX. The article is often used for the relative and

demonstrative pronouns.
'] ,,
1.
'
as,
Edtion who brought me up, Horn.

the chamber in which we sleep, Herodot.
2.
/,
For the relative pronoun
For the demonstrative pronouns ;
as,
J^$s,for he came, Horn.

'
but I will not release her, Horn.
ov
Obs. 1. The article is very often used as a relative pronoun in Ionic and
Doric writers. Of Attic writers the tragedians only use it in this sense,
and these only in the neuter and the oblique cases ; as,
-,
Eurip.
Obs. 2. The use of the article as a demonstrative pronoun is likewise

chiefly confined to Ionic and Doric writers, though it is found in this sense
in Attic writers also, but for the most part in the neuter and the oblique
156
GOVERNMENT.
cases ; as,
'
but he said, Xen. ;
'
but this is
not so, Plato ;
Thucyd. ;
Soph. Especially in the accusative with the infinitive after
as,
and that he commanded to give it him, Xen. In the
nominative the relative Jog is used in this sense; as,
and he
said, Xen.
Thus also '
said he, which is very frequent in Plato.
, ,,,
,
Obs. 3. The Attics moreover use the article as a demonstrative pronoun

before the relatives ',
as.,
oioi
concerning those arts which treat of these things, Plato ; but particularly
are opposed to each other, this
in a division, where
6
that, the
,
,
one
the other,
these
&c.
as,
of
many were wounded, of
those not one, Xen. ;

the other is rational, Plato
the one is mad,

;
(otherwise quite as often ol
other
Greeks, some were subject to you, some to them,
of the
commonly refers to the nearer of
Demosth. In this construction
two things, but sometimes to the more remote ; as,
"),
'
admonish than to reproach ; for the former is mild and

and
friendly, the latter harsh and affronting, Epictet. If
be used
in speaking of one thing alone, they may each be rendered partly, or in
part.
Sometimes the relative pronoun is used instead of the article as,
it is
better to
',
ing some of the Greek
cities,
and bringing back
destroythe exiles into the others,
Demosth.
GOVERNMENT.
GOVERNMENT OF SUBSTANTIVES.
X. One substantive governs another in the genitive (when the latter substantive signifies a different
thing
from
the
former)
as,
the chariot
, ,
of Cyrus, or Cyrus's chariot.
Obs. 1
The genitive most commonly indicates that which does somer
iEschin.
thing, or to which something belongs ; as,
But frequently the genitive is also taken in a passive
sense; as,
the accusation against Socrates ;
good-will towards the Athenians, Thucyd. Sometimes one

substantive governs two genitives, one of which has an active and the
other a passive sense ; as,
they lament the insults which the relations offer to old age, Plato.
Obs. 2.
is
frequently used instead of the genitive;
for
The substantive which governs
Obs. 3.
as,
Herodot.
,,
, '.,
possessive adjective
as,
the shades below.
sc.
the genitive
Plato;
to the shades below ;
sc.
,, ,,
is
often understood;
SC^
sc.
in
GOVERNMENT OF SUBSTANTIVES.
,
,
157
,,
Obs. 4. The dative is frequently used for the genitive, particularly by

for
no longer do
the poets ; as,
*
nor did it
your children see the light, Eurip. ;
Sometimes both cases are put ; as,
please the mind of Mjax, Horn.
yij-dti,
the slaughterous
heart of Achilles rejoices, as he beholds the slaughter of the Greeks, Horn.
>
Obs. 5. Prepositions with their respective cases often serve as a circumlocution of the genitive ; as, ai
ro
the pleasures of the body, Plato ;
6
for
-9, Demosth.
Substantive pronouns are governed in the genitive like substantive nouns; as,
our city.
So
also adjective
understood;
as,
fathers.
The
genitive
pronouns
is
The
likewise governed by the relative and demonstrative

this is what I commend in
I admire this in him, Xen.
'
as,
Socrates, Plato;
,
,
, ,, [,
pronouns when used as substantives, or having a noun

whose
his daughter;
oi
possessive pronouns are equivalent in signification to the genitive

is the
Thus,
6
same as
Sometimes also, like the genitive,
they are taken passively ; as,
longing for thee, Horn. ;
through good-will and friendship towards me, Xen.
?/
of the personal pronouns.

/;
The
/;
,'
possessive pronouns have sometimes nouns, pronouns, and partiLucian

them in the genitive ; as,
ciples after
Horn.
The
XI.
thing
Soph.
is
genitive is used to express that one

the quality or circumstance of another ; as,
ference.
, ,,
& ^,
,,
tree
man
of many years,
of great virtue.
a lake of twenty stadia in circum-
Obs. This genitive frequently stands alone,

or the like,
being understood ; as,
I am of this disposition,
;
he died when eighty years of age,
Lucian.
Aristoph.
Adjectives taken as Substantives.
XII. An adjective in the neuter gender without

a substantive governs the genitive as,
,,,
to
put
to flight.
14
most of the time,

such a pitch of boldness.
that part of the barbarians which had been
the
GOVERNMENT.
158
Plural adjectives of the neuter gender also govern the genitive;
Obs. 1.
as,
rum, Diod. Sic.
Obs. 2.
takes the
Thucyd.
Instead
Xen.
of the
neuter,
the
adjective
frequently
genitive ;
as,
gender of the substantive in the

}
Herodot.
angusta
Thucyd.
GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES.
Adjectives governing the Genitive.
XIII. Adjectives of plenty, want, diversity, propworth, cause, also verbals, compounds of
a privative, and those signifying an affection of the
mind, govern the genitive
as,
erty,
,
'
' &, ,
,,
destitute of men.
full offear,
he is different from my father.
worthy of praise.
peculiar to man.
he was the principal cause of the victory.
subversive of the state.
childless with respect to male children.
you are skilled in geometry.
,,
,
,
,
&,
Xen.
Herodot.
Demosth.
Lys.
,
1.
Plato
- ),
Eurip. ;
Herodot.
Herodot.',
./Escnin.
Lucian;
Obs.
,
,
,&,
,,
Herodot.
Soph.;
iEschyl.
Xen.
*?
,-
,,
-
Xen.;
'
"
Adjectives of worth and cause govern the genitive
and dative ; as,

honor of us, Eurip.
Achilles deserves
they toere the authors of
things to the
Greeks, Isocr.
Obs. 2. Adjectives of
as,
ern the dative ;
Hesiod.
many good
plenty
and want sometimes govabounding in fruits,
,-
Obs. 3. In the old poets participles also are construed with

well
as,
the genitive like adjectives
acquainted with all the modes of fighting, Horn.;
Id.
159
XIV. Partitives, and words placed partitively,

comparatives, superlatives, interrogatives, and some
as,
numerals, govern the genitive plural
,
,
,,
,, ' ,
, ,
;
'
Eurip.
some one of the soldiers.

the younger of the sons.
the icisest of the Greeks.

which then of the gods?
one of the islands.
the fourth of the rivers.
;
&,
Xen.
uv
'
Plato
./Eschin.
Obs. 1. Other adjectives in the positive degree frequently

take their substantives in the genitive, where otherwise instead
as,
of the genitive the case of the adjective would be used
:
good men,
for
ol
,, ,,,
,
Aristoph.
Obs. 2. The genitive plural is also put with some adjectives

which have the positive form, but the force of superlatives; as,
the most excellent of women, Horn.
Herodot.
Horn.
;
Obs.
stood
Plato
The
3.
genitive
of
sc.
, ,
of the Lydians
Obs.
to
The
4.
genitive;
Delphi, Herodot.
,,
Lucian.
are used
Lucian
case of the partitive
as, ol
,
, ,
often governed by
is
as,
is
sc.
underor
Thales was one,
sending some
these
Plut.
often put instead of the
for
of those present, some were ashamed, some laughed,

Sometimes prepositions with their respective cases
as,
Herodot.
Aristoph.
Obs. 5. Partitives, &c. are put in tiie gender of the substantives which
are in the genitive ; but when there are two substantives of different genders, the partitives, &c. are sometimes put in the gender of the former,
though almost always in that of the latter; as,
the boy of all wild beasts is the most difficult to
manage, Plato.
-9-
Obs. 6. Partitives, &c. govern collective nouns in the genitive singular,

and are of the same gender with the individuals of which the collective
noun is composed; as,
Thucyd.
k
XV.
tive
The
as,
comparative degree governs the geni-
,,
whiter than snow.

he was better than his father.-
160
GOVERNMENT.
&,
,
Obs. 1. Instead of the genitive, comparatives are also construed with the conjunction 3) or
followed by the same
case with that of the thing compared
as,
I have associated with braver men than you,
,.
'
Horn.
better horses
But sometimes ) is followed by the

or some other verb may be supplied
as,
(sc.
he might give
Herodot.
nominative, if
10.
},
than
Horn.
these,
genitive commonly follows the comparative instead of ij, only where

Sometimes, however,
?! would be put with a nominative or an accusative.
the genitive is put for
with the dative ; as,
The
for
Thucyd.
Sometimes the genitive is used instead of

where
would be put with
a different case from that of the word to which the comparative is joined ;
as,
Aristoph.
and by
as,
Lucian.
Obs.
'
The
Obs. 2.
genitive,
&v
When
3.
&
,
,,, ,
i)
for
ij
not
comparative is sometimes followed both by the

clause explanatory of the genitive
*) with a
^
is
are followed by a nunot
as,
often omitted
less than ten years old, Plato.
neral,
as,
placed between two comparatives
he married a wife
)
or
more noble than wealthy, Plut. Or it is followed by
)
as,
with an accusative
more arms were taken than the number of dead led one
Sometimes
&,
to
is
$)
expect,
Thucyd.
\ Or
?)
,,
think the honor inferior to the merit of the

by an infinitive, commonly with, but sometimes
action.
)
as,
before it
or
without,
ij
too great
they are too young to know, Lys.
to endure, or to be endured, Soph.
to
,,
Obs. 4.
,
\,
Substantives are sometimes used elliptically for prop-
, ,,,
ositions in
for
as,
comparison
greater than can be expressed, Aristoph.
iEschyl.
Xen.
In a similar manner the comparative

when
pronouns
at different times ; as,

The superlative
Plato.
i)
is
followed by the genitive of the

any thing is compared with itself
for \
frequently used instead of the comparative}

\oda, when you even surpassed yourself, Xen.
is'
],,
as,
,
,, ,
, ,, ,
;,
Obs.
tives
numbers are construed
Proportional
5.
as,
greater than ours, Herodot.

to give him twice as
the commanders, Lys.
Obs.
dative
The
6.
Lys.
any
as
other
of
defect of measure is put in the

older by a year, Aristoplirp^
excess or
as,
61
like comparaan army much
much
^*
^'^'
by how much the more temperate, by so much

JEschin. t Also with
the happier, Plato ;
Herodot.
superlatives
as,
;
Adjectives governing the Dative.
,
,,
XVI. Adjectives signifying profit or disprofit, likeness or unlikeness, &c. govern the dative ; 'as,
-profitable to the country,
tjJ
*
hurtful to the enemy,
like to Achilles.
To
this rule
belong
Adjectives of profit or disprofit; as, ?/
1.
',
Demosth.
3.
Of pleasure or pain; as,

Of friendship or hatred
4.
Of clearness
5.
Of nearness; as,
Of fitness or unfitness
2.
6.
',,
,'-Xen.
as,
Herodot.
or obscurity
Xen.
as,
>\,
;
7.
ease or difficulty;
t'jui fan, Plato.
''
as
&,
9.
10.
Aristoph.;
these add
of likeness or unlikeness; as, ,*
Isocr.
ticularly,
&,
many
' ,
,& ,
other adjectives of various significations
, Lys.
,
,
,
,
;
Compounds of
and
also
14*
verbals
>par-
as,
taken
in
he
\s
accus-
of the same language with

suspected by the Greeks j
"
unknown
Herodot.
Demosth., &c.
passively, govern the dative; as,
tomed to me
the Carians
"
Demosth.;
Of obedience or disobedience; as,

Rom. i. 30.
Of trust; as,
iEschyl.
To
Eurip.
Thucyd.
Horn.
as,
Of equality or inequality; as, ov

many blows as I, Aristoph. Also
8.
,,,,
as,
Pausan.
Of
to us
Soph.
GOVERNMENT.
162
Obs. 1. Substantives have likewise sometimes a dative after

them, and, among these, substantives from primitives governing
a dative
as,
you are father and
mother to me, Horn.
Plato
', ,
,
,
you behold
the giver
offire to mortals, iEschyl.

Obs. 2.
the same, governs the dative
as,
the country has the same name as
e river, Herodot.
you have suffered
Sometimes
the same things as I, Aristoph.
has a similar
construction
as,
who was born
of the same mother as I, Eurip. In Latin, invltum qui servat,
idem facit occidenti, Hor.
eddem Hits censemus, Cic.
&,
'
&-,,
,,
,
Obs. 3. Many adjectives which usually govern the dative,

as,
are sometimes found with the genitive
&
ij
'
Xen,.
Isocr.
Plato;
Id.;
Lys.
',
,
'
as,
Xen.
',
Particularly
Plato.
Xen.
compounds
Plato
of
and
oi
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS.
Verbs which govern the Genitive.
XVII.
and
signifying possession,
property, or duty, govern the genitive
, ,,
as,
they belonged to Cyrus.

,
it is
the part of a good man.

Messene was under the dominion of the Locrians.
,,
&,c. are used in this sense,

Obs. 1. The neuters
instead of the genitives of the personal pronouns
it is my duty.
as,
&lc.
,
,
Obs. 2.
The
Sometimes
So
Isocr.
XVIII.
genitive
ceasing,
is
expressed;
as,
ruling,
desiring,
remember
as,
Aristoph.
Verbs of remembering,
',
,
ginning,
before it; as,
genitive often takes
Aristoph.
forgetting,
be-
&c. govern the
Orestes.
he ceased from his anger.
Psammetlchus reigned over Egypt.
/
,
,
, , , '
Verbs govern the genitive, which
To remember,
1.
T 'i?
signify,
to forget; as,
"(?/'/
I will not forget him.

Isocr.
Horn.
These verbs are often construed with the accusative as, Tvdia <T
Eurip. SomeHorn. ;
c
Obs.
or
163
&,
times
at, to
joined with
of, is
as,
Plato.
&,
,
'.,
,
' .,
To
2.
make mention
care, to neglect
as,
to take care
of health.
, ,, '
&
they neglect their brothers.
Isocr.
Horn.
'
Isocr.
Aristoph.
Id.
oro*f
Xen.
it
Obs. The construction of these verbs is also varied; as,

Xen. Sometimes
is found with the accusative; as,
Herodot. So
to slight, in Homer has the
accusative, but elsewhere the genitive.
To
3.
&,
admire, to despise
I admire you.
as,
,
,,
,
,
,
,
9
,,/, ,,
&,,
,
,& &
,
he despised the laws.
Plato;
JSschin. Socr.
Xen.
Obs. Verbs of admiring and despising frequently take the accusative
as,
Aristoph.;
Eurip. So
is governed by
J admire this in
where
Gorgias, Plato.
To
4.
desire
as,
unless you desire peace.
iUv
Xen.
',
Obs. 1.
To
Herodot.
Thus
Aristot.
also
Likewise
Horn.
this class
'
$
Isocr.
Xen.
belong
Horn.
.
,
\
,
,
,,
and
Obs. 2.
govern the accusative, and sometimes
other verbs of desiring.
To
5.
Obs.
6.
enjoy
as,
to
~&,
enjoy costly perfumes.
Hippocr.
*$
sometimes governs the accusative

Isocr.;
and
always.
,.,.
'&
To
abound, to want;
as,
,*
Hom.
as,
,,
<f
was full of ships.

they were in leant of money.
the harbor
Theocr.
Xen.
Luke
Plut.
XV.
17.
,
, ^,
GOVERNMENT.
164
Aristoph.
;
;
ov&
Xen.;
iEschyl.
,,
,,
JEsch.y\.
Horn.
Plut.
Obs. 1.
and
in the derivative sense of to entreat, to desire, are likewise construed with -the genitive ; as,
I entreat you to stay, Plato.
Verbs of abounding are also found with the dative
Obs. 2.
To
7.
,,,
lay hold of, to let go
',
Obs.
Some of these
To
8.
as,
as,
he laid hold of the man.

he lets go of the spear.
Plut.
Demosth.
Polyb.
Eurip.
,,,
verbs are also used with the accusative
obtain, to miss
-,,,,
Hom.
as,
to obtain this
honor.
we have missed the way.
Herodot.
Theocr.
Likewise,
Herodot.
,,
Obs.
1.
as,
Obs. 2.
9.
takes the genitive ;

In like manner
Demosth.; but in later writers, the accusative;
Diod. Sic.
hear, to touch, to smell, to taste
,
,,
,
Hom.
as,
as,
as,
hear me.
to touch a corpse.
they smelt the camels.
they taste not of this wine.
,, ,
Eurip.
Verbs of obtaining are very often construed with the accusative

Soph.
iEschyl. ;
To
Plato;
Also,
Thucyd.
-&,
,
Demosth.;
Xen;
Eurip.;
y.Xvuv
Aristoph.
In like manner,
,
,
,
.
Herodot.
to smell, that of which any thing smells is put in the

Obs. 1. With
he smells of ointment. The part likewise which
genitive ; as,
emits the smell, is at the same time put in the genitive ; as,
Aristoph. The verb is also used impersonally ; as,
there will be a smell of dexterity from
to breathe, sometimes,
your clothes, Aristoph. In the same manner
Anacr.
takes the genitive of that which is breathed; as,
6]
,,
Obs. 2.
as,
10.
Some
To
& ,
'
of these verbs are frequently joined with the accusative

Aristoph.
Demosth. ;
,,
begin, to crease
as,
to begin the discourse.

they ceased fromJhe chase.
,
,
,
,
&
/, Herodot.
Obs.
;;
Demosth.
Xen.
Also
Herodot.
1G5
Verbs of beginning sometimes take the accusative
as,
Eurip.
,
,
,
,
,
&,
]
,
,
,
;
&,
&,
',
,
,
^, '&,
'
,
,
,$,&, & ,
,
,
11.
To
rule
as,
he reigned over the Medes.
commanded
they
Horn.
Mschyl.;
Soph.
Thucyd.
Xen.
Soph.;
Some
,&,
of these verbs are also construed with a dative or accusative
Thucyd.;
,, Soph.
Horn.;
as,
12.
Herodot.
Polyb.;
Obs.
army,
the
Xen.;
Horn.
Horn.
To
Thucyd.
Herodot.
and the contrary
excel,
as,
they excel the Greeks in wisdom.

he is inferior to no one in prudence.
Demosth.
Xen.;
Isocr.
&, ,,
,
, ,
,
,&, , ,
&,,,,& , &
Horn.
So verbs derived from comparatives and superlatives;

Isocr.
&'
Xen.;
Xen.
Obs. The construction

other senses ; as,
is
the
as,
Xen.
Herodot. ;
Polyb.
same when any of these verbs are used in

he came after the battle, Xen.
;
they do not miss the right opportunity, Isocr.
13.
To
abstain, to be distant
as,
they were distant
from
each other
about thirty stadia.
Plato
Thucyd.
'
Obs.
14.
Polyb.
This genitive frequently takes
To
before
it
as,
Thucyd.
try, to spare, to differ
as,
to try one' s friends,
they differ in nothing from
Xen.;
women.
Eurip.;
Lucian.
Obs.
Verbs of trying are likewise joined with the accusative.
15.
Origin
as,
js
of whom he was born.
,& ,
GOVERNMENT.
166
To
preposition
is
the accusative
Horn.
'
,
,
,
;
as, 1%
as,
Thucyd.
,.
Likewise some which more

Soph.
Polyb.
commonly take
Ji ,
often expressed before this genitive
Isocr.
these add several verbs of various significations
Horn.;
Plut.
,
&,
,
The
()
Eurip.
Horn.
Obs.
as,
Mem.
III. G.
17.
XIX. Transitive verbs govern the genitive, when

tne action does not affect the whole of any thing,
but a part only
as,
;
'
,,
to
drink some wine.

they ate of the honey-combs.
I gave you of my wealth.
Obs. To this, in connection with Rule XXVII. Obs. 1., belong such
literally, / am broken as
phrases as the following
to a part of my skull, my skull is broken, Lucian ;
Aristoph.
:
Verbs governing the Dative.
verb may govern the dative in Greek,

which has the sign to or for after it in English;
XX. Any
,
,
as,
he beckoned to the boy.

I labored not for you.
, ,
as the dative after Greek verbs is not always rendered in English

and as these particles are not always the sign of the dative in
Greek, it will be necessary to be more particular.
But
by
to or for,
, , &,
', ,'
,
,
and
to have,
govern the dative
in the sense of
as,
I have three daughters.
havethou nothing
sc.
just
man, Matth.
xxvii. 19.
therefore, is equivalent to I
31
am
called,
to
do with that
Thucyd.
and the name
and_not in the genitive or dative,

itself stands in the same case with
as in Latin, est mihi nomen Tullii or Tullio ; as,
*
Herodot.
verbs compounded with

as,
often govern the dative
Many
or with prepositions,
',
Syria borders upon Egypt.

he comes to Xenophon.
'
,,, ,
;
^ ,,
'
Plato; TCvnog
Plato;
107
Herjodot.
Aristoph.
Isocr.
ttlhcug
Xen.
Thucyd.
,
, ,
,
,,, , , '
, ^. [ ,
&, , , *,
&&
,
Verbs govern the dative, which
in.
To
1.
signify,
order, to exhort, to obey, to disobey; as,
he ordered his servants.

I will obey God rather than you.
Xen.
Horn.
Aristoph.;
Eurip.
Xen.
Xen.
imaxoveiv
-&-8,
Aristoph.
Isocr.
Plato.
Obs.
and
1.
take not only the dative, but also the

Plato.
On the
&c. take only the
accusative with the infinitive;

other hand,
accusative.
Obs. 2. Verbs of obeying and disobeying are sometimes followed by the

genitive; as,
Ken.;
aihov, Herodot.
To
2.
^schyl.
be angry
reproach, to threaten,
as,
,
*&
,
,
,
, ,^, ,',
.'& ',
', ,
,
,&
,, , ,
*
' ,, ,.
,
).,16 reproves
, they
',
Plato
Isocr.
Achilles.
were angry with
Herodot.;
Horn. ;
>
dative
Id.
Plato ;
usually takes the accusative, but the middle
Jii, Aristoph.
as,
Xen. ;
',
To
3.
commanders.
are also found with the accusative
and
Obs.
their
Demosth. ;
Xen. ;
Thucyd.;
assist, to profit, to
hurt
as,
Id.
the
as,
he assisted the Greeks.

he corrupts the youth.
',,
Xen.
Horn.
iEschyl.
Plato
Obs.
4.
Herodot.
Aristoph.
Thucyd.
Some
of these verbs often take the accusative ; as,

Aristoph. ;
Herodot. ;
Plato ;
Herodot.
and some others, the accusative only.
To
, &,
contend, to serve
Ju
to
as,
contend loith Jupiter,

I serve the gods.
Plato.
8c
/irti,
,
&
,
&,
,, -,,
,~
,
&,
Ja
*
168
GOVERNMENT.
Plato;
Horn.;
Xen.;
-dai,
Isocr.
Aristoph.
Eurip.
Bion
Isocr.;
Demosth.
' , ^,
Obs.l. Frequently verbs of contending, instead of the dative, take

with the accusative ; as,
Herodot.
likewise takes the accusative, in the sense of to attack; as,
Apollod.
Obs. 2.
is
sometimes found with the accusative
as,
Eurip.
To
5.
approach, to meet, to follow

ry
,
,,
],
Xen.;
Lucian
,
, ^
1.
Attica,
&,,
he meets Xenophon.
Crito followed him.
Herodot.;
iv-
Aristoph.;
Hesiod.
Obs.
as,
we approach
Verbs of approaching sometimes take the genitive;
as,
'-
Polyb.
Obs. 2.
&',
Obs. 3.
as,
likewise found with the genitive

with the accusative ; as,
is
Horn. Also
Herodot.
To
6.
Verbs of following are often construed with
' ,&
Plato;
pray, to converse
-,
&,,
is
-&,
as,
', ,
Soph.
as,
9,
Aristoph.
To
also joined with the accusative by the Attics; as,

Aristoph.
use, to trust, to associate

H'V
$& ,, , ,
& &,,
,
,
,
,
7.
&c.
he prayed to the gods.

he converses with Alcibiades.
Soph.
Theophrast.
Obs.
as,
^/, not to use
^7 ^
oil.
to trust the
Demosth.
good.
Isocr.
Pind.
8.
To
befit, to
be like
as,
a freeman,
Xen.
this befits
Polyb.
To
<7>,
ever,
these add several verbs of different significations ; as,

Thucyd. ;
Apoll. Rh. ;
Xen. The accusative,
Matth. ii. 11. ;
is
also put
as,
Xen.
how-
1(59
Verbs signifying motion or tendency
iv.
\&
, ,I
to a thing often
or nqbg, with the accusative ;
will come to you, Lucian ;
for
JEschyl.
,, ,
take the dative instead of

for ngog
as,
.
frequently take the dative of a personal
and
pronoun, with a participle agreeing with it, where the whole is
as,
translated by the verb from which the participle is derived
'
fi'
I had not hoped
&,
if you please, Id.
this,
,
;
if you are willing to answer, Plato;
"
Horn.
vi.
Verbs of all kinds are sometimes accompanied by the
dative of a personal pronoun, which might have been omitted
without injury to the sense ; as,
Lucian.
do not await
man, Horn.
this
Verbs governing the Accusative.
",
XXI.
Verbs of a
the accusative
govern
signification
transitive
as,
,
, ',
,
',,
'
,
,
',
,
', . , &
they honored Achilles.
Obs. 1. Any verb may govern the accusative of a noun

having the same derivation, or a similar signification as,
Lys.
Horn.
',
Eurip.
',
Plut.
Isocr.
',
Xen.
Plato
] .,
,
,%,
,
,
dative
is
tively
Also
Obs.
2.
Id.
jEschin.
often put for the accusative; as,

Id.
Horn.
~>}c,av
-dai
Plato;
Aristoph.
Herodot.;
Obs.
Soph.;
Horn.
Eurip;
&
**
'
,
,
;
Plato ;
jEschin. ;_
Thucyd.
Several intransitive verbs are sometimes used transi-
as,
'
'
he thrust his hand, Soph. Ajac. 40. ;

he placed men upon them, Herodot. i. 80. ;
let Himera floxo milk instead of loater, Theocr. v. 124.
Eurip. So
to call any one ; as,
to look; as,
to look fearful, iEschyl.
,
,
&'
,
;
Svo
Xen.
Several intransitive verbs which express an emotion, and in which an action is implied, though not described,
govern the accusative as,
3.
15
;;;
,
,
,& , ;
& ,
,, , , ,
,,, ,,
,
"
,
' ,, '
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
',
170
() ' ,
Horn. II. . 77.

Hipp. 1339.
Also
GOVERNMENT.
Soph. Ajac. 790.
&1
}&
. Soph.
Eurip.
Philoct. 1314.
&'
Demosth.
Plato.
Verbs of swearing govern the accusative of the
Obs. 4.
object sworn by
The
Obs. 5.
'
sc.
as,
accusative
, Xen.
is
"
Demosth.
sc.
sc.
river.
Aristoph.
often understood; as,
make an
to
Xen.
irruption, to overflow, of a
Verbs governing the Dative and the Genitive.
XXII.
Verbs of giving way, with

and
govern
the dative of a person, with the genitive of a thing.;
as,
I give way to you from the

to share with them the danger.
I impart to you of my'riches.
Herodot.
Xen.
Xen.;
Lucian
Isocr.
To
and some others;
these add
iEschyl.
Eurip.
'
Obs.
as,
before
'
,
^
.
Frequently verbs of giving way have only the dative after them
it
iEschyl.
as,
their construction
Sometimes the genitive has
Some
Tyrt.
,,
or
of the other verbs also vary
Aristoph.;'
as,
Xen.
oftener
as,
Also
or
much
Verbs governing the Accusative and the Genitives
XXIII.
depriving,
Verbs of reminding,
delivering,
filling,
and
prohibiting,
,,
,,
govern the accusative and the genitive
emptying,
restraining,
as,
do not remind me of these things.

he filed bottles icith wine.
I deprived Thetis of Achilles.
lie freed Alexander from the disease.
to keep them from the sea.
3?.,
they
made him
desist from his insolence.
,
,
,
,
,
,',
, , ,
-'
,
Plato;
Isocr.
Herodot.
'
Isocr.
Eurip.
>,
Herodot.;
Soph. ;
Soph.
Hom.
'
Eurip.;
'
171
Herodot.
Polyb.
,,
To these add verbs of separating, repelling, begetting, and

esteeming worthy ; as,
,,,
&
*
Aristot.
Eurip.
,& ^ ,
Several of these verbs are also construed with

Plato
Obs. 1.
^schyl.
Hom.
Eurip.
^,
Soph.
Obs. 2.
&
&'
Plato
' ,
or Ix
Verbs of reminding often take two accusatives
Demosth.
Also
as,
Xen.
as,
as,
Isocr.
,, &
Obs. 3. Some verbs frequently take the accusative of a

thing, with the genitive of a person or thing from which it
proceeds as,
;
&& ,
Herodot.;
from me, Xen.
of the accusative
The
An
;
the
I heard from
rest
Aristoph. ;
infinitive or part of a sentence
may
oi"
as,
,'
Xen.
genitive often has a preposition expressed before
&&-, Herodot.
Thersander,
learn this
supply the place

it
as,
Verbs governing the Accusative and the Dative.
XXIV. Any
of the
we
which
*,^
govern the accu-
(ivhen, together with the object
express the. person or thing with
,,
,,
action,
relation to
may
transitive verb
and the dative
sative
it is
exerted)
show me
as,
Socrates.
my father.
they selected the tent for Cyaxares.
that you may avert destruction for (or from) me.
he compared our chief to Achilles.
with which you reproach
'
Obs.
as,
or
The
,, ,
dative is often used for

he brought you to me,
with the genitive ; as, ol
him, Horn.
Hom.
or
;
with the accusative
and sometimes
for
he took the spear
from
172
GOVERNMENT.
Verbs governing two Accusatives.
XXV.
Verbs of doing, speaking, asking, taking,

clothing,
and concealing, govern two
accusatives, the one of a person and the other of a
teaching,
,
,,,
,
,
^'
,
,,
' ,
,
',
,
&,
& ,,
thing; as,
aya&a
he did you
many
services.
what they will say of us.

they ask food of me.
you took Troy from Priam.
he taught
me
all this.
they took off my clothes from me.

do not conceal this from me.
Aristoph.
Horn.
Thucyd.
Aristoph.
Xen.
Herodot.
& ,
,
tives
Soph.
Xen.
Thucyd.
Obs.
Thucyd.
Xen.
, Lucian;
Demosth.
Id.
Plut.
Several other verbs are also found with two accusa-
1.
as,
&, instead of
Id.
Demosth,
,,
Xen.
Soph.
&,,.
Obs. 2.
Verbs of doing and speaking often take the adverb
or
instead of the accusative of the thing
*'
,
,
,, .&
Soph.
Plato
,
,
Demosth.
Id.
In like manner
Thucyd. Also
as,
Verbs of doing sometimes take the person in the dative ; as,

Lys.
Plato;
,
\\
So
which is also construed with the genitive of the person and
the accusative of the thing, and sometimes with the accusative of the person and the genitive of the thing ; thus,
Ohs. 3.
,, ,,
or
, -
Obs. 4. Some verbs take the accusative of a person, with the accusative
neuter of an adjective in the sense of an adverb; as,
Plato ;
Thucyd. ;
Demosth.
Obs. 5.
preposition
the thing; as,
sometimes expressed;
must
as,
often be supplied before the accusative of

or
Aristoph., sc.
%
, ',
Thucyd.
Verbs of dividing, especially, are construed with two accusatives, one

of which is governed by
understood; as,
173
CONSTRUCTION OF PASSIVE VERBS.
The
Plato.
,,
,
,
preposition
'
is
often expressed
as,
Polyb. Sometimes the whole, which is divided, is put in

and the word
&c. governed by the verb as,
Jvdwv
for
()
for
So in the passive,
Xen.
the genitive,
Herodot.
{)
Obs. 6. Some verbs take the accusative of a person, with the accusative
of an adjective or substantive which expresses a quality or property attributed to the person by the verb.
These verbs are those which signify
to call or name, to make, to choose, and when in the passive take the
iEschyl.
same case after as before them. Thus,
>
Xen. ;
Eurip. ;
,
',
,
,
', ,,,
,
Herodot.
it
Thucyd.
Likewise,
Soph.
Plato;
Plato.
,'
These verbs frequently take the infinitive

from which, however,
does not follow that this word is to be supplied where it does not ap-
pear;
as,
7ruija,
eivai
Herodot.
Plato
Id.
The Government of Verbs having a Causative
Signification.
XXVI. Verbs signifying to cause one to do something govern the accusative, with the case of the
included verb as,
;
,,
^,
Obs.
you made me taste of happiness,

I caused you to drink milk,
I adjure you by the Lord.
Verbs signifying to taste govern the genitive ; hence those

to taste govern the accusative and the genitive ; and
fying to cause
the others.
signiso
of
THE CONSTRUCTION OF PASSIVE .VERBS.
XXVII. When a verb in the active voice governs

two cases, in the passive it retains the latter case
as,
,
^
>\& &,
,
they were kept from the sea.

he was taught the heali/ig art.
they were stript of their possessions.
Obs.
and the
1.
Some verbs in the passive

made their nominative
latter is
"Mars
&,
. "'
for
.,
retain the former case,
as,
with the decision, Lucian ;

my hands, Eurip. ;
let the tyrant's liver be torn by the vultures, Lucian.
is intrusted
this is snatched from
15*
;;
,
174
GOVERNMENT.
The
may
accusative with the passive
understood
,
&
often be referred to
as,
he is wounded in the thigh, Herodot.
,,,
Obs. 2. Verbs passive, or of a passive signification, are fol

lowed by a genitive governed by (5,
or
as
nesians,
Thucyd.
Lucian
;
,' ,
spectators,
and
-&,
, '&
'
now
Eurip.
in Latin periit ab Hannibdle, Plin.

cadat, Ovid.
The
',
preposition
is
am
Thus
Herodot.
iorqueor infesto ne vir ab hoste
sometimes understood
I
they were besieged by the Peloponto be praised by the

he was killed by you, Xen.
they are banished by me, Id. ;
as,
overcome by Juno, Eurip.
Obs. 3. Passive verbs-are often followed by a dative, sometimes with, but frequently without, a preposition
as,
' ,,
vn'
this
Thus
also impersonals
men, Apoll. Rh. ;

has been done by me, Demosth. ;
they were not seen by the Corcyreans, Thucyd.
as,
we have danced, Aristoph.
the city is not inhabited by
THE CONSTRUCTION OF IMPERSONAL VERBS.
,,
An
XXVIII.
tive
impersonal verb governs the da-
as,
ttj
profitable for the state.
it is
!\
agree with an infinitive preceded by

Obs. 1. Jtl and
the accusative, one of which is often understood, and not unfrequently both
as,
,
),
&-9 ,
;
you must
endure as
it
sail, Soph. ;
becomes kings, Isocr. ;
(sc.
Eurip. ;
&
&), &,
(sc.
si
(sc.
{),
Soph.
Other impersonals likewise, which more commonly govern the dative,

sometimes agree with an infinitive preceded by the accusative, and hence
both constructions are sometimes united ; as,
it happened to me to marry at eighteen years of age, Demosth.
it is in your power to live in the enjoyment of what belongs to you, Xen.
,>
,
,
, , ,,,
with their compounds, also

govern the dative of a person,
with the genitive of a thing; as,
Obs. 2.
Jel and
and
Demosth.;
ov
i'uiv
'
,,
you have need of a hundred galleys,

did he care for this, Lucian;
the poor have no share in the government, Plato
Isocr.
Thucyd. ;
if
;;
CONSTRUCTION OF THE INFINITIVE.
An
infinitive or
&, ,
some part of a sentence often supplies the place of the

I did not take care
genitive; as,
or/, ore
it repents
are used personally ; as,
Or they
your son, Xen.

Horn. ;
175
to inquire,
me
Horn.
",
not that I killed
Thucyd.
and
take the accusative of a
Obs. 3. Sometimes
as,
person with the genitive of a thing
(Ion. for
I have no need of much trouble, Eurip.
The
; what is thy business ? Horn. Odys. d'. 463.
substantive
frequently has the same government as,
Horn. Odys. '. 634.
) ,,,
;,
THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE
& -, ,
XXIX. One
tive
as,
verb governs another in the

I
Obs.
The
1.
an action
infinitive is often
as,
to
be
questioned,
Plato;
order to sup, .huc'u.

This
infinitive, after
infini-
desire to learn.
& ,,
used to denote the purpose of
the Trojans to carry, Horn.;
myself
INFINITIVE.
he gave the armor to
I offer
came in
verbs of giving, corresponds to the Latin gerund in
dum, or to the participle in dus ; after verbs of motion, to the supine in

um, or to the participle in rus. Sometimes the Latin poets imitate the
Greek construction
as, dederatque
comas diffundere vends, Virg.
semper in Oceanum mittit me quarere gemmas, Propert.
;
Obs.
,
lence,
The
2.
infinitive is
ability, or quality
fitness,
, ,-
governed by adjectives expressing
as,
not powerful in speaking, but incapable of keeping
Epicharm.
women
are skilful in finding devices, Eurip.
The
,,,,,, ,
;
Obs.
it
infinitive active frequently stands for the infinitive pas-
corresponding to the Latin supine in u; as,

easy to understand, to be understood, Plato ;
pleasant to hear, Id.
Demosth.
sive,
fore
si-
for
The
3.
as,
ovx
-,
infinitive is often
*&,
when
put for other modes with

and
going be-
, *$
for
iv
',
when Agaiho saw, Plato;

he is not so swift as to escape, Eurip. j
before Philip came,
Demosth.
they were marching through the sand, Herodot.
Uvai
176
GOVERNMENT.
The
'
or
put after oh; and
is
for
for
a slave
to
any
and
as,
he
to be
'
'
,
, & ,,
infinitive
is
such a person as not
-9
was so -much
thing, Plato;
]
the former galley
'
sooner, that
aches
had read the decree, Thucyd.

they
were chosen on condition that they should make laws, Xen. The abbrevi'
ated expressions
and
are more common, the former
of which usually signifies to he wont, and the latter, to be able; as,
ijv
for he was not one that profited by any
thing, Xen. ;
I was not able to stay within,
Aristoph.;
Demosth. Thus also
as far as we knoio, Lucian.
;'
',
Frequently
or
simply, Lucian
(,
as,
sc.
omitted
as
little,
sc.
or
sc.
as,
,,
,
wanting but
as,
wanting;
is
,
-&,
it
appears
to
, ,
for
me, Soph.;
to
speak
almost, Isocr.
Sometimes the infinitive
iEschyl. Prom. 46. Sometimes both are
speak
to
briefly, Iseeus
I am almost gone, Aristoph.
;
Obs. 4. Sometimes the infinitive is governed by a verb of

saying or thinking understood, or contained in the principal
verb as,
as many as acquitted him of the

aifrbv
charge of being a thief Herodot. ;
contained
they ordered him to de(sc.
In like manner in Latin, senpart, for that they commanded noxo, Xen.
quamdiu
jurejurando
hostium teneretur, non
tentiam ne diceret, recusdvit :
esse se senator em, sc. dicens, contained in recusdvit, Cic. Off. in. 27.
4),
',
Obs.
The
5.
used
infinitive is often
by the poets
hither, Horn.
the same wine, Lucian.
ticularly
as,
When
,
, ', ,
for the imperative, par-
do thou return
drink of
let all
the infinitive is used for the second person imperative, its subject
the nominative ; in the other cases, mostly in the accusative. In the
&c. is supposed ; in the latter, of
former case an ellipsis of
The infinitive is put in a similar manner also in supplicais in
, , &c
tions
354.,
where
as,
Obs. 6.
-,
ocra,
,.,
or the like,
The
infinitive
is
nor do
Thucyd.
48.
',
is
Hom. Odys. '.
supplied.
often redundant ; as,

loiUingly touch'fire, Xen.;
Plato, Lach.
fin.
CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES.
&
177
XXX. The
fixed
infinitive with the neuter article preas,

used as a substantive in all the cases
is
than
better
to live basely.
&,
,
-dai
%,
to die
honorably
is
he underwent every dan-
ger for the sake of being praised,

treated,
tlvai
'all.
they were not sent out to be
ill
he delighted in being easy of access to
&,
', because the way was narrow.
is baser
than
to be injured.
he grants that to injure
Obs. 1. The rule applies, whether the infinitive be used singly or in connection with phrases, with or without a case before it, as in the examples
given.
, &,, &
& &
Obs.
as,
o\v
The
2.
article is often
-],
for
wanting before the
want of
for
an army, Xen.
infinitive
&<, if death approach, Anacr.
ov
for
-,
leisure to
march
Eurip.
unObs. 3. The infinitive is frequently governed by

who
derstood
as,
;
was absent from you, that he might not follow you 1 Xen.
;
THE CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES.
XXXI.
verbs
govern
Participles
as,
the
case
of
their
having missed the way.

doing us many injuries.
],
Obs. The same case is put after participles derived from

verbs which take a nominative after them, as that of the participles themselves ; as, fy
if he dishonor us, who are goddesses, Aristoph. ;
about a place called Thyrea, Herodot.
XXXII.
The
is used instead of the

knowing, perceiving, showing, remembering, persevering, desisting, and such
as signify an emotion of the mind
as,
infinitive
&,
participle
after verbs of
',
know
>,
that you are come.
I shall show
they perceived that Antony

am wise.
that 1
had fled.
&,,,
GOVERNMENT,
178
, remember
that you are a man.

they continue to preserve peace,
cease to sing,
I am ashamed that I did this,
nor does it repent me that I thus
when he should
ale
defended myself.
After a verb governing a reflective pronoun, the

agree in case either with the subject of the
verb, or with the reflective pronoun
as,
I am conscious that I am wise, Plato
you were conscious that you did wrong, Demosth. ;
Obs.
1.
may
participle
&,
ibv,
Sent.
Gnom.
&
,
&, ,
where we might
438.
also say
&,
When
a participle is used with

or
rendered by its own verb, and the verb annexed
signifying unpcrceivedly or unconby an adverb
by chance ; and
previously ; as,
sciously ;
Obs. 2.
it
is
&,
%&
,
&
,&,
,
,, , ,
,
&,
, ,
they entered unperceivedly, Thucyd. ;
he was unconsciously feeding the
murderer of his son, Herodot.

for by chance he had a sword, Id.
that we may arrive before them, Xen.
they no sooner heard of
;
'
&-
),
it
than they
came, Isocr.
is
'
used in the same manner as
as,
which
by the poets
Soph.
for
, \,
Participles often form a periphrasis witji

to express the verb either in the tense of
they are participles, or in that of the verb annexed; as,
for
he has ruined some,
Obs.
tiav,
3.
Aristqph.
had not yet sold himself, Demosth.
will you not be silent ? Soph.
r)v,
he
for
I admired,
Id.
),
for
you bring,
for
for
Aristoph.
,
,
,
to
'-
Frequently also instead of a simple verb in the sense of

as,
with the participle is used
go away,
for
he few away, Horn.
Obs.
4.
you
Obs.
5.
Sometimes
trifle,
The
participles
Aristoph.
seem redundant as,

you jest, Lucian.
;
participle frequently expresses the
means by
,(,,
CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES.
which an action
by plunder, Xen.
is
performed
So
as,
179
tlicy live
Herodot., where the

participle is thus far redundant, that it is not necessary to the
more extraordinary redundancy is in
sense.
Soph.
& ;,
,
Obs. 6. The participle of the future

purpose of an action; as,
Horn.
is
used to express the

I came to inquire,
The participle is often joined with the adverb

whatever case the construction requires, in the sense
inter sacrificanof the Latin gerund in dum ; as,
dum, ichile lie was sacrificing, Aristoph.
regent inter lavandum adivit, he came to the
king ichile he teas bathing, Diod. Sic.
Clitum inter ccenandum interfecit, he killed
Obs.
7.
in
.,
^&,
Clitus while at supper.
, ,',,*
A
XXXIII.
7(
ovdhr
this,
Obs.
enemy approaching, he fled.

when God gives, envy prevails
the
&,)
The
1.
as,
)., while
messengers arrive.
),
stantive
(f$oioc,
genitive of the
often understood; as,

ing come, he said, Xen.
&v
oldu otl
sentence
and participle are put
substantive
absolute in the genitive
may
*),
not.
is
doing
,-
substantive or
(sc.
Cyrus
a
pronoun
is
they hav-
(sc.
Sometimes the
rest of the
be considered as supplying the place of the sub-
Id.
&
as,
it
having
been fabulously related that the bulls breathed fire, Diod. Sic.
-,
Sometimes
ing
as.
also,
though
rarely, the genitive of the participle

is wantSoph. CEd. Tyr. 966., as in Latin quibus duclbus.
&,' -,
-
Obs. 2. Nominatives and accusatives absolute are also used,

and sometimes datives; as,
they having entered, Critias said, Xen.
Tty.i
]
wonder not, if, my children
having unexpectedly appeared, I protract my discourse, Soph.
'
**'
qoovQCcv
as the
year elapsed, they make another demonstration against Elis,
Xen.
Obs. 3. The absolute case of participles from impersonal

verbs is always the nominative ; as,
l^hv
',
when
it is
in his power to have pcace 1
180
GOVERNMENT.
,
-,
he prefers to he at war, Xen. ;

when it is lawful for me
to rule, Eurip. ;
tv
although it has been told them to meet here, they sleep and do not come,
Aristoph.;
Thus also the neuter participle of
as,
ov
being impossible io give a signal, Thucyd. Sometimes an infinitive is omitted; as, of ' ov
(sc.
others not having assisted, when they ought, came off sound,
Plato;
e.
(i.
;
ov ^,) shall we make them live worse, when it is possible for
them to live better ? Id. ; which perhaps is the case where a participle in
the singular seems to be joined with a noun in the plural ; as,
(sc.
it having been resolved to do this,
they gave orders so to do, Xen.
],
\,
&),
--^,
\,
^ ,,
& ,, ^,
,
),
Obs. 4. The particles

&,c. are often put with
absolute cases, for the most part in order to express a reason
as,
went
to
him
it
belonged to punish, Plut.
, &
to
they neglect
not made of
their brothers, as if friends could be made of citizens, and

brothers, Xen. ;
(sc.
what you will, in the persuasion that I shall tell the truth, Id.
Junius, as
";
),
ask
Obs. 5. Sometimes the absolute case refers to the same person or thing
that is expressed before or after by another case ; as,
tyio^y^,when Pericles had already
crossed over, news was brought him that Megara had revolted, Thucyd.
)&
THE CONSTRUCTION OF VERBALS
IN TtOV.
govern the dative of a

XXXIV. Verbals in
person with the case of their primitives ; as,
,,,
&
they must abstain from drunkenness.

young men should imitate the old.
youmust impart virtue to the citizens.
are used in the nominative, or the accusative

Obs. 1. Verbals in
in the sense of necessity or propriety, like
before the infinitive, with
the Latin gerund in dum ; as,
we must take care of. The verb is commonly understood, instead of which
ov, Xen.
Sometimes
the participle is sometimes used ; as,
they agree with the substantives, like the Latin participles in dus ; as,
Xen.
served
by
you,
the state must be
Obs. 2.
a person
,
/;
Sometimes verbals
govern the accusative of
in
as,
he who wishes to be
cultivate temperance, Plato.
happy must pursue and
CONSTRUCTION OF CIRCUMSTANCES.
181
Verbals are often put in the plural, particularly by

I must sail, Aristoph.
Obs. 3
the Attics; as,
is sometimes imitated in
The construction of verbals in
cctcrnas
Latin; as, quam [viam] nobis quoque ingrediendum sit, Cic;
Obs. 4.
quoniam pcenas
in morte
timendum, Lucret.
THE CONSTRUCTION OF CIRCUMSTANCES.

PRICE.
XXXV. The
tive
,,
,
price of a thing
as,
r[v
oiy.lar
to
,
&
,
- ,
,
;
Horn.
Plato
Isocr.
talent,
,?
Solon.
forrj' v
Obs.
,
,' ---
he bought the house for a

exchange silver for gold.
(,
put in the geni-
is
This genitive sometimes has

before it; as,
Plato.
Also instead of the genitive the dative is used ; as,
Chariton. Or
with the accusative;
Athen.
as,
CRIME AND PUNISHMENT.
XXXVI. The
the genitive
crime and punishment are put in
,
,
as,
,(, ,
Aristoph.
Plato
Demosth.
Aristoph.;
,
&
,
,
- ,
,
,
he accused me of impiety.
having convicted Cleon of bribery
Plato;
iElian.
Obs. 1. This genitive is often accompanied by substantives or other

words on which it depends; as,
lest
any one bring an action of impiety against us, Lucian
Demosth.
Xen.
&,
'
Obs. 2. The crime or punishment, after verbs compounded

with y.uru, is commonly put in the accusative, and the person
in the genitive
as,
they condemned all to death, Thucyd. Sometimes, however, the crime
;
also
is
in the genitive
Likewise the person
as,
Demosth.
as,
put in the accusative
Lys.
has the person in the
'
dative, and the crime in the accusative
as,
Soph.
16
is
GOVERNMENT.
182
MATTER, AND PART TAKEN HOLD
OF.
XXXVII. The matter of which any thing is

made, and the part by which any thing is taken,
,,,
'
are put in the genitive
a pillar made of brass,

they took him by the foot.
,,
genitive of the material often has
it; as, Tug
tive
as,
/ hold a wolf by the ears.
The
Obs.
The
Herodot.
,&
as,
dative
expressed before
or
Theophrast.
sometimes used instead of the geniAnacr.

is
CAUSE, MANNER, AND INSTRUMENT.
XXXVIII. The
cause, manner, and instrument,
',
,
, ,
are put in the dative
as,
he did this from good will,

-dov, they came in this manner,
he struck with his sword.
'
,
,
,
]
,
,
,
,
,
,,,, ,-,
],
,
,
&,, , ^,,
Soph.;
Eurip.
Xen.
Soph.
Eirr>i
Herodot.;
Lys.
,
Thucyd.
Plut.
ovx
Plato;
Also,
Plato.
Demosth.
Isocr.
ovx
Xen.;
;_
Plato;
Lys. ;
Plut.;
Aristoph.
Plato;
Obs. 1. Prepositions with their respective cases are sometimes used inAnthol. ;
stead of the simple dative; as,
Aristoph.;
<it'
Plato ;
Lys.;
Soph.;
from fear,
Plato ;
Demosth.
iEschyl. ;
'
'
Obs. 2. The instrument of an action

by the genitive as,
ships are burned with hostile fire, Horn.
is
sometimes expressed
until the
MEASURE AND DISTANCE.
XXXI X.
sative
Measure
or distance
as,
stadia distant from Thebes.
is
put in the accuPlataza is seventy
CONSTRUCTION OF CIRCUMSTANCES.
diti/ov
sixteen feet from each other.
Measure
Obs.
or distance
Strabo.
ten.'
>[,
183
sometimes put in the dative;
is
they were distant about
as,
PLACE.
XL.
The
question Where ?
or
as,
',
tv
Obs.
The
1.
dative without
thon, Thucyd.
at
Rome.
' &,
to Athens,
he marched from Sardis.
"
,
&,
place where is sometimes

or by the genitive
as,
iv
with the
with the
or
genitive
answered by
is
with the dative

Wliither ? by
accusative
and Whence ? by
expressed by the
,
at
Mara-
; was he not at Argos ?

$
Horn.
Likewise the place whither is frequently expressed by
annexed,
the accusative alone, or with the termination
especially in the poets ; as,
Horn. ;
they came to Telemachus, Id.
to his house, Horn.
to Marathon, Demosth.
;
-,
,/,
Obs. 2.
where ; in
Adverbs
and
are used to denote the place
and &s t
the place whither; and in
in the country;
to
&,
'&&,
the place whence;
Thebes
in *
, , and ,
as,
from Athens.
XLI. Time when, if indefinite and protracted, is

time
put in the genitive, if definite, in the dative
how
,,
>, ,
long, in the accusative

xal -dfoovg xal
as,
loth in summer and icinter.

they arrived the fifth day.
,,
he reigned seven months.
Obs. 1. Time when is sometimes put in the accusative,

and time how long in the genitive or dative as,
acfr^/.ev
at the seventh hour the fever left him,
John
iv.
52.
or
, /$,
;
having reigned fourteen years, Herodian.
Obs. 2. All the circumstances of time are often expressed with a prepytuton oc, Xen. ;
osition
as,
tjitoag, Lucian )
;
teuton,
Soph.
'
^'
Herodot.
;;;
GOVERNMENT.
184
PART AND CIRCUMSTANCE REFERRED TO
The
XLII.
circumstance reis put in the
particular part or
ferred to after .a general affirmation
accusative
as,
,,,
,
,,
he was large in person.

he is distressed in his finger.
Thucydides by name.
a Syrian as to his country.
he strikes me on the back.
they differ someiahat from each other.
Obs. 1. This accusative is said to be governed by

understood, instead of which sometimes
or
is rather
as, |
to be supplied
(sc.
they used the fountain for the most solemn purposes, Thucyd.
for what shall you wish to employ us ?
Xen.
(sc.
for such things I
commend Agesilaus, Id.
,, ,
),
Obs. 2.
),
dative might be, and sometimes
is,
\\, Xen.
as,
cases are used;
as,
i]
put for the accusative

In some instances both
Plato.
Obs. 3. This is the Greek construction so frequent in the Latin poets

as, os humerosque deo similis, Virg.
THE CONSTRUCTION OF ADVERBS.

XLIII.
Adverbs are joined to verbs and

and to other adverbs; as,
,
(,
,,,,
,
,,
,
partici-
ples, to adjectives,
he did rightly.
Obs.
verbs
1.
be pleasant to all, Isocr.
to
Obs. 2.
very prudent.
Adverbs of quality are elegantly joined with the
&C.
as,
do and to receive favors, Xen.
Two
or
as,
more negatives strengthen the negation

you no where did this, Demosth.
nor let him ever fill any
,
;
JEschin.
nothing that is necessary will ever be done, Demosth. Except
when they belong to two different verbs as,
I cannot forbear laughing, Aristoph. So in the phrase
office,
,
Obs.
, nemo
3.
non ;
as,
Id.
Plato
often seems redundant before the infinitive, after words

ikaim%
as,
Containing a denial;
', ,
CONSTRUCTION OF ADVERBS.
Plato
Xen.
iEschin.
')
185
, Eurip.
Thucyd.
The modes required by particular adverbs are as follows, with

Obs. 4.
the exception of the infinitive, for which see Rule XXIX. Obs. 3.
",
'$
& ^,
&,
as long as, take the indicative or subjunctive ; as,

1.
9
as long as you please, Horn.
as long as he lived, Demosth. ;
In the sense of until, the indicative, optative, or subjunctive ; as,
Plato;
Horn.;
Horn.
^'
, &,
'
'
'-
,
,',
' &\,
,
,
'
'
,
,
,", , , ,,,,, ,
',
,
,
'
31
'
ji
,,
as,
as long as, take the indicative ; as,

In the sense of until, the indicative or subjunctive;
,
&
Athen.
ov
Thucyd.
Xen.
until, takes the indicative
as,
commonly
Apoll. Rh.
&
the subjunctive
&^,
Horn.
before, is joined with the indicative, optative, or subjunctive;

Demosth. ;
with the indicative ; as,
Xen. ;
Hesiod.
,
-,, & '
when,
,
,,
',
2.
after or ichen,
take the indicative or optative, and sometimes the subjunctive
Thucyd.;
Horn.;
",
as,
Horn.;
usually the subjunctive, sometimes the optative,

Plato;
the indicative rarely; as,
,,
Demosth.;
Plato.
when
,,
or after, take the indicative or optative ; as,

Herodot. In the sense of as, how, they
Thucyd.;
take the indicative, optative, or subjunctive ; as,
Horn.;
,
", ,
,",
Theocr.
'
Eurip.
as soon as, are joined with the indicative

as soon as I saw him, Herodot.
where,
Aristoph.
M\, when
3.
generally followed by the indicative
is
, ],
it
as,
as,
' * <,
,, ,&
expresses a wish, takes the optative
when
a prohibi-
tion, the present imperative, or the aorist subjunctive; as,

may Jupiter not make thee king, Horn.;
speak out, conceal
it
,
&'
', '&,
not in your mind, Id.
^,
,
& ,',
&,
,, -', .
'- ,
4.
as,
Horn.
lv
as,
-3
it is
Aristoph.
'
construed with the optative ;

Herodot.;
Soph. So
"uv in like manner; as,
Soph.
Sometimes ? is used alone; as,
not
Eurip. Hec. 830.
is also put with the infinitive ;
Epigr. When the wish relates to any thing past,
that, utinam,, are
joined with the indicative; as,
'^
&, , are often prefixed
with an infinitive following;

Id.
Xen.
-&oai
16 *
,&
Xen.
to the imperfect
as,
Later writers use

Callim.
and second
,-<.
'&'
Sometimes the
of
Horn.;
aorist
,
particles are omitted
as,
adverbially; as,
, Apocal.
iii.
15.
186
GOVERNMENT.
XLIV. Adverbs of place, time, cause, quantity,

concealment, separation, exception, exclamation, and
adverbial nouns, govern the genitive
as,
,
,,
' ',
as far as the mountain.

until the battle.
,,,
,
on account of Helen.
abundance of such.
without the knowledge of his father.
without labor.
,
,
, ,, ,
,,
,
,
, ', , !
except the names.

alas Greece !
like rivers.
Horn.
ay
Xen.
iEschyl.
Herodot.
-dv
Plato;
Thucyd.
Matth. xxvii. 64.
Plato
Id.
Soph.
'
Lucian;
Horn.
Aristoph.
Eurip.
Herodot.
Plut.
20.
i.
Thucyd.
Galat.
Horn.;
--
Horn.
Obs. 1. The genitive is often governed by

on account
}
with respect to, understood ; as,
esteemed you happy on account of your disposition, Plato
angry on account of this deception, Horn.
happy by his fortune, Aristoph.
,
,
of,
'
Soph.
,, && ,, ",,
'
Herodot.
,
,
IV
Aristoph.
Herodot. ;
Aristoph.
-dsv
To
?
,
seem to belong such examples as the following ;

as I am with respect to memory, as far as I remember, Plato;
they followed as fast as they could run, Herodot. ;
ov
for I know not how he is
learning
and justice, how learned and just he is, Plato
with respect to
being pretty drunk, Herodot. ;
By some, however,
to be well with respect to riches, to be very rich, id.
is understood.
this place
&,
,
,
,
&
,
?,
Obs. 2.
Some
Herodot.
iEschyl. ;
Pind.
'
,,
[,
-",,
of these adverbs are also joined with the dative

as,
Herodot. ;
Xen.;
Find. ;
>}, Plato ;
Eurip. ;
And a few with the accusative; as,
Horn.;
Horn. ;
Herodot. ;
,,
Herodot.
Obs. 3. Many adverbs of exclamation are frequently joined

with other cases besides the genitive, and some with other
!
Xen.
!
ah
as,
cases only
V,
wretched me ! Soph.
:
,, .,
CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS.
Lucian
",
el rbr
t)
Herodot.
Soph.
tuh
,;,
as, ol'uoi
a understood
added
to it is often construed with the nominaInstead of

uoi is often used
as,
;
Sometimes a genitive accompanies, governed by

na*Sn
BS }
Similarly ('
Soph.
Pint.
Callim.
Aristoph.
Horn.
ItTr;,
ir ;
Matth. xxvi. 24.
odul
OV with the dative

tive
Bion
1ST
',, Eurip.
Eurip.
Adverbs of exclamation are sometimes omitted as, >~

'/re !) the misfortune ! Xen. ;
/;?
Jupiter ! the acutcness of his mind! Aristoph.
I
;
Tr;
Obs.
'
1.
Other adverbs have
4.
also a
'
, '
-
,
2.
3.
Adverbs of showing are construed with the nominative

&vI'd
behold thy son, John xix. 26.
}
behold the man, Ibid. v. 5.
;
Adverbs of swearing take the accusative

val uu
by Hercules, Demosth.
/.eu,
this sceptre,
as,
as the horse did this, Herodot.;

together with the cavalry, Polyb.
as,
(for
government of cases.
Adverbs of accompanying govern the dative

uua
go in icith me, Aristoph.
euol,
.,
as,
by
Horn.
' ",
, on the contrary, generally denies, except when

Sometimes uu is omitted; as, ov,
Soph.
always affirms
joined with
Antig. 758.
XLV. Some
derivative adverbs govern the case
of their primitives
as,
^,
',
,&,
he has spoken worthily of himself

you knoic in like vianner as I.
loving you more than me.
the most of all men.
luvrov
THE CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS.
XL VI.
Conjunctions
&
modes and cases
1.
generally
couple
similar
as,
, .
^, he rose up and spoke as follorcs.
y.ai
Obs.
To
this rule
he desires neither glory nor riches.
belong, not only the copulative and
188
GOVERNMENT.
', , ',, ,
, , ,,
', ,
,, ,
, ,,
,
- &
,,
' ,
' ',,, ,
,' ,
,,
,
,
.
, , , ',
,, , ,, '
disjunctive conjunctions, but several others, as also adverbs of
likeness ; as,
Hom.
Theophrast.
Xen.;
Horn.
Obs.
Sometimes
2.
modes and cases
different
are coupled
together; as,
Orpheus;
Herodot.
Plato;
XL VI
I.
The
Xen.
e.
conjunctions
commonly take
ocpQa,
when
the leading
verb denotes past time, and the subjunctive when
it denotes present or future
as,
the optative
I came that I might see.

I come that I may see.
I feared that something might befall you.
I fear that something may befall you.
,
,
Obs. 1. Sometimes these conjunctions take the subjunctive when the

preceding verb denotes past time, and the optative when it denotes pres'?,
Thucyd. ;
ent or future; as,
Lucian. They are likewise frequently found with the indicative of the
past and future tenses; as,
that you might hear, Plato;
she fascinates him that he may forget
especially [, which is sometimes put with the present
Ithaca, Plom.
Theocr. ;
lest
indicative; as,
some one appear, Eurip.
;
that, so that,
take the indicative or infinitive
Demosth.
;
joined with
all
'
1.
tive
if,
which
With
therefore,
is
Id.
takes the indicative or optative, and sometimes the subjunc-
],
a.s,
2. ^
But-
'
Other conjunctions are variously construed.
Plato
to
Lucian.
words or sentiments of another, takes the inas,

Xen. Likewise
Xen. Also in the sense of because;
Plato
as,
2,
as,
the modes.
that, in quoting the

dicative or optative ; as,
Obs.
Hom.
Theocr.
is put with all the

or
in the poets
gives a potential sense.
it
the indicative
would ask you, Lucian

perished there,
Hom.
as,
It often
'
modes and
participles,
if ke toere present ha
for we should have

expresses the repetition of an action ; as,
whenever this happened, they came immf
-,
',
CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS.
&,
,, ,
Xen.
diatcly,
came, he assumed a Grecian habit, Herodot.

>
as,
f/'m9sT
bloic,
Eurip.
sentence; as,
With
uv
we
the future
uv,
ability in past actions ;

could hear the sound of the
every one
to soften the decisiveness of the
I will
iycov
shall dine the
as often as he
Also
seems
it
189
these,
select
more pleasantly, Xen.
Horn.;
you would
With the optative ; as,
It often expresses volition ;
not knoio, if I should tell you his name, Plato.
uv
I would gladly hear, Plato.
Or ability ; as,
as,
for now he might take the city, Horn. ;
could you not withstand Mcneldus ? Id. Sometimes it
/ zcill stay, Soph.
gives to the verb the sense of the future ; as,
Also of the imperative ; as,
go in quickly, Soph.
uv
' ,
;
With
ability
,,
which
the subjunctive, to
as,
as,
With
',
'
it
often gives the sense of the future

;
the imperative, though rarely

it, be assured, Soph.
would have done
', '
' ,
'
as,
'
Plato.
With
'
Plato.
participles
as,
who woxdd
and bring
readily kill
,,
&'
>
hpaaav
With the infinitive ; as,
"uv
for no consideration would they do this, Herodot.
you think that you can answer
; do
gias?
ovv uv
I myself will take it, Horn.
what will the laws say ? Plato.
Sometimes it expresses
you cannot kill the tyrant, Eurip.
they said that
better
than Gor-
' ~uv,
to life
again if they were able t
',
After the relatives ?,

&c.
has mostly the signification
of the Latin cunque, soever, in which case it is generally followed by the
subjunctive, sometimes by the optative, rarely by the indicative ; as,
, whomsoever they persuade, Thucyd. ;
to go whithersoever you please, Xen. ;
whosoever
whatsoever he will, Id.
marries her, Horn. ;
&
&,
_
is
i/V,"
Homer
*,
' , ''
often repeated in the
made
icould never have
think perhaps, Eurip.
same member of a sentence

JYestor
,
Sometimes
it is
for
,
,,,
y
3.
Eav, by contraction
the subjunctive; as, lav
?jv
or
as,
, ,
omitted
"uv
God, he could do nothing, John ix. 33.

two men coidd not carry, Horn. ;
you at all obey me ? Id.
if it were dishonesty
an orator, Aristoph. ;
I cannot save you by
you
as,
if this
'
force, as
man
'
ov
vv
in the Ionic poets
were not of
which
indeed would
' ',
',
or
if, takes
if you examine, you will find,
, if we grant this, he will
but if they
,
,
,
, , , \, , '
Demosth.
laugh, Plato;
do not give it, J will take
it
myself, Horn.
Sometimes, however, the indicative is found as,

Cebet. Tab. 33. Also the optative, particularly with
;
Isocr.
stay,
4.
'
or
if
asj
you voluntarily
Horn.
}.,
commonly take
the indicative, the optative rarely
since, for as
as,
much as
"
190
Hector, Horn,
his, since they
GOVERNMENT.
do not
etui,
belonged
to
kill
am
me, since
When
not ike brother of

he says they are
, , , &,
Cyrus, Xen.
Obs. 3.
the relatives
&c. refer to indefinite persons or things, they commonly take the optative without av if
the verb in the preceding clause denote past time, and the subjunctive
with av
if it
-,
Herodot.
Demosth.
, Thucyd.;
Horn.;
',
"
is put with the optative; as, '

Also the subjunctive is frequently used without
Sometimes
Plato.
, 3,
denote present or future; as, snti&ov

Pind.;
When
Plato
,"
as,
it;
Id.
definite persons or things are referred to, the relatives are fol-
lowed by the indicative.
THE CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS.
The
XLVIII.
the accusative
Fori
uQ'
>,
",
you thank him for

wealth, Isocr.
'
Herodot.
Against
'
From;
'
jit;
Of;
should
Xen.
to
choose glory before
having whips instead of arms,
he went against Ajax, Horn.
,
'
, ,,
'Apb, from.
they came from Argos, Pind.
from this day, Plato.
Acts
By ;
this benefit?
, ,,
after supper, Herodot.

at the third
After ;
and
for.
,
,
Before;
Instead of;
the dative
&',
as,
, , , , ,,
prepositions
govern the genitive
Of time,
hour of the night,
xxiii. 23.
'
they were wasted by war,
Thucyd.
of a hundred children
,,
one only escaped, Herodot.
For, by reason of;

With ;
and he could not for
crowd,
-doc
Luke
'
',
xix. 3.
the stone with
the fire, Aristoph.
Without;
<~
without their
the sea, Diod. Sic. ;

shalt be farther removed
me, Horn.
Stoics, Academics
;
Platonics, Plut.
nesians, Herodot.
which they light
'
,,
&
,
the
arms, Thucyd.
forty stadia from
from my
Lucian;
thou
heart, shalt be hated by

the
the
of
the Pelopon-
;;;
191
CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS.
/ ,,,
,
,
, &9,
&
'Ex, out of.
Out of;
(/
having draicn up water
out of the well, Plut.
From,
lx
from
made of xcax, Lucian.
time, ix
lx xrjQov
lx
Of;
After;
For, in conse-
lx
af'cr noon, JEschin. Socr. ;
after the war, Thucyd.
for this he was condemned to
lx
quence of;
Xen.
death,
By;
Of
from sea to sea, Herodot.

our yovth, Horn.
lx
by which of her friends per-
suaded? Soph.
With
Aristoph.
they cried out icith one voice,
,,
TTgo, before.
Before, of place
,,
standing before the door, Eurip.
&,
,
S
Of
Of
time
preference;
;
before the rear,
Thucyd.
to
choose tear before peace, Dionys. Hal.
For, in behalf of;
to fight
for
wives and children, Horn. Instead of;

to die for him, Eurip.
,
,
; ,,
,
,,
,
in.
'
In;
ing in
Among
Before;
iv
Iv
the
I happened
he sat
among
the suitors,
thousand witnesses, Plato.
On;
During
Iv
power of;
thirty
he icrote on the walls, Aristoph.
iv
plague they called

In the
walk-
Horn.
more than
before
Iv
to be
garden, Plato.
Iv
to
,
mind
during
the
Thucyd.
power of God,
this prediction,
the end
was in
the
Demosth.
With;
Into
iv
Iv
'
with shields and darts, Xen.

having passed over into Samos,
Pausan.
At;
after the naval fight at
Iv
Saldmis, iEschin.
According
By;
to ;
according
Iv
Iv
Of;
'
Against
our laws, Isocr.

by
no law, Demosth.
t]
; wot ye not what
the scripture saith of E/ius ? Rom. xi. 2.
to receive Cede Syria for
a dowry, Polyb.
On account of;
iv
celebrated for his poetry, Herodot. Vit. Horn.'
bold against me, Soph.
Iv luoi
they were angry with,
iv
they blamed Pericles, Thucyd. ;
Iv
; is it
agreeable to you
Eurip.;
-dai, to
esteem equally, Herodot. ;
Iv
to
these magistrates enact
For ;
to
$-9
,&, ,
make
light of, Id
\
&,
192
GOVERNMENT.
,31,
,
^,
with.
" ,
,,
With;
Horn.
On
the side of;
With the assistance of;
Mend dus,
he came hither with
to he on the side of the Greeks, Xen.

he overcame with the. assistance of
Minerva, Horn.
Against;
even he himself
that
would fight against htm, Xen.

Besides
According
In, at the
Into
,,
besides all these things,

according to the law, Xen.
to ;
time of;
Luke
xxiv. 21.
in drinking, Anacr.
,,
,
",
'
To;
Till;
into.
they drove into the city, Herodot.

he came to Creon, Hesiod.
I could certainly bear
eg
it
till
morning, Horn.
Towards;
Isocr.
&,
&,
Against;
Demosth.
In;
,,,
iEschin.
Within
Greeks, Polyb.
Before
sitting
come within
speak before
in the assembly,
boto-shot,
Xen.
seeking reputation
all,
among
the
Soph.
falling upon one another, Aristoph.

Of number;
about evening, Aristoph.
about sixty men, Thucyd.
he furnished money for
Upon ;
About;
For;
,
,,
account of;
tice,
With respect
to ;
Concerning ;
to
',
XLIX. The
;
praised on account of jus-
be
happy with
respect to children,
I have nothing
to
, ,,
say concerning
neither by Jerusalem, Matth. v. 35.
prepositions
the genitive and accusative
and accusative
to be
Aristot.
Eurip.
athbv
him, Pausan.
By;
Thucyd.
the naval forces,
On
they offend against the temple,
",
to
Among ;
good-will towards the Greeks,
imtQ, govern
and
the dative
as,
Jia, through, on account of
,
,
,,
With
Through,
"
'
By;
terpreter,
With
During
the Genitive.
going through Libya, Thucyd.

he treated with them by an in-
Xen.
he wrote with ink, Plut.

during the whole night, Herodot.
,
,
,
" &,,
, &, _
193
After
&
Above,
have in ones hand, Athen.

Homer has honored him
among men, Pind.
he encamped near the
city, Polyb.
In;
A mono
after a long time, iEschyl.

above all icorth seeing, Herodot.
JVear
to
'
trove, every
continually, lsocr, ;
thai, to fear, Thucyd.
third year, Herodot. ;
to be suspected, Plut. ;
to be angry with any one, Thucyd. ;
&,
'
,,
to
the Accusative.
Jaaovo
account of;
commiserate, Eurip.
to give battle, Herodot.
,
',
,
&,
-& &,
With
On
'
'
they were banished on account
of the Lacedemonians, Xen.
By means
he escapes by means of Crasus,
of;
Herodot.
By;
he is honored by the good,
Aristoph.
Through;
the spear penetrated
through
six folds, Horn.
'
In;
laws made in heaven, Soph.
,
'
} &,,
'
,
At;
Of;
according
at,
With
to.
the Genitive.
to shoot at
,
,
,
'
,
a mark. Herodian.
the
same must
to
produce
be said
of virtue, Plut.
Against
witnesses
against me, Plato.
Upon
In;
Under ;
xa&'
From ;
Through ;
to
upon
ground, Dionys. Hal.

living in the water, Lucian.
go under the earth, Plato.
they leaped from the wall, Xen.
they were dispersed through
to fall
' ,
the
the island, Polyb.
Bysje
xx vi.
63.
With
According
to ;
&'
During;
",
I adjure
thee by
the Accusative.
according
voyage, Herodot.
to
Homer,
Plato.
they pipe during the whole
', he says
In the time of;

that
Through;
In;
Meges governed
the
,,',
Echinades in the time of the
Trojan war, Strabo.

through the whole
'
'
Horn.
17
God, Matth.
city,
Dionys. Hal.
he dioells in heaven, Eurip.

we lay among the thick bushes f
By ;
Nea?'
,' . ,,
GOVERNMENT.
194
Before;
by land and by sea, Isocr.

near the tomb, JEschyl.
that he may speak to you be-
fore your face, Aristoph.

Opposite to
At
To ;
Towards ;
After;
,,,
,
,
,
,
mild towards the
Herodot.
On
Jay.idatîoviovg
he placed the Persians
opposite to the Lacedcemonians, Herodot.
he continually looked at them, Horn.
they came to the army, Horn.
'
'
account of;
citizens,
him
after
Herodot
others ascended,
having slighted him on
account of his youth, Thucyd.
Concerning
'
'
questioning the en-
voy concerning his coming, Herodot.
With;
i.
,
'
he
27.
commands with
authority,
Mark
about six thousand men, Herodot.

put with the accusative to denote the end of an
action ;
having sailed out in
order to collect plunder, Herodot. Also to serve as a
circumlocution of the genitive ;
the rising of the sun, Polyb.
by himself, Demosth.
every
xa&' s
every year,
month, Aristoph.
Plato;
four thousand at a
by tribes, Horn.
time, Xen. ;
About
siav.ia
It is often
,
,
'
,
,
%,
above.
,
, ,
&&
,
,
'
,
&,
With
the Genitive.
the water
Above;
of the river
appeared above their breasts, Xen.
leaping over the trenches, Soph.

from JEthiopia which is
Over ;
Beyond;
beyond Egypt, Thucyd.
On
'&,
'
For ;
account of;
on account of you, Xen.

I pray by
By ;
Concerning ;
oaa
to
my
the gods, Apoll. Rh.

what he falsely laid
Demosth.
peace,
charge concerning the
in order not to suffer, Demosth.
With
Above
Greeks, Plato.
being, hated by Seuthes
to fight for the
Ssv&y
,, ,
,
the Accusative.
in the plain above Selymbria,
lv
Xen.
Of number;
above twenty thousand men, Herodot.
they throw
Over;
Herodot.
Beyond;
Lucian.
Against;
it
over the house,
to have a spirit beyond his
against destiny, Horn.
purse f
;; ; ;
195
*Aru, upon, through.
With
the Dative.
, >\,
, ,
',
& ,,,
Upon;
leva.
sitting
upon
the
summit of
mount Gargarus, Horn.
in ships, Eurip.
In;
With;
with a golden sceptre, Horn.
With
Through;
During
In;
ava
Horn.
Among ;
At
To
ava
', they were among
the first, Herodot.

the hollow ships, Horn.
)?.9,
ava
aihbv
Uj.on;
According
came
to the
Latmian forest, Theocr.
to sail up the river, Herodot.

he hung them upon a tamarisk, Horn.
according to the same manner, Polyb.
they not discovering them by
reason of the darkness, Thucyd.
with all his might, Xen.
ava
ava
by
turns, in succession, alternately, Eurip. ;
in
ava
the midst, between, 1 Cor. vi. 5. ;
yearly, Herodot. ;
Up ;
By
the Accusative.
through the army, Horn.

during this war, Herodot.
having kings in your mouth,
ava
to ;
>
reason of;
&,
, ',
,
,
,
neither have two coats apiece,
L.
nQoq,
tive
The
prepositions aucpi,
,,
ix 3.
naqa,
govern the genitive, dative, and accusa-
as,
*,
Concerning;
For
the Genitive.
to
dwelling about this
city,
Herodot.
sing concerning
love,
they fight for a
tain,
By;
about.
,
,
&, ' ,
With
About
Hom.
little
foun-
Horn.
by Phozbus, Apoll. Rh.
With
the Dative.
About;
,,
body, jEschyl.
Concerning
For ;
With ;
Near ;
'&,
Hom.
' '
',
ing
Upon
Luke
my
*'
husband,
he rends the robes about his
I intended
to inquire concern-
you fought for Helen,
he fell near him,
his back a Sidonian
Hom.
pierced with his talons, Hesiod.
woman, Anacr.
Hom.
for he Carries upon
; ;
196
GOVERNMENT.
, ' '(
he uttered speeches, some against the Atrida, some

against Ulysses, Soph.
With
About
the Accusative.
,
,&
I am, commonly about
the
Lucian. Of time ;
about the
setting of the Pleiads, yEschyl.
Of number;
about sixty stadia, Xen.
the sword was broken
stove,
Near ;
'
near the
To;
Concerning ;
hilt,
Horn.
,
,,
,
,
,
, ,,
to confine the
there
was no
other
Greeks to the sea, Horn.
memorial here of the fables
concerning Jason, Arrian.
For;
away
the oxen,
a contest arose for driving
Horn.
*Enl, upon.
With
the Genitive.
'
Upon;
Over ;
they stand
upon an eminence, Herodot.

over these he
left
Nicarchus,
Polyb.
having in his hand a mouse f
In;
Herodot.
By;
Before
they stood by the sea, Polyb.

before so many witnesses, Lucian.
he sailed towards Jtfiletus, Thucyd.
Towards ;
Against
In the time of
he went against Phrygia, Xen.

in the time of Saturn, Hesiod.
speaking of the beautiful boy,
Of;
'
their
the
Lycians had
name from Lycus, Herodot.
,^
descent
by themselves, apart, Herodot.
'
deep, Thucyd.
was by one at a time, Xen.
;
With
the
the Dative.
Upon;
',
,
, ^
,,,
&" , ,
,
,
Plato.
From ;
having a vessel upon her
head, Herodot.
I did not
Over ;
leave a keeper over
'
In;
any other
With
my possessions,
business,
Horn.
both in
war and in
Horn.
they eat meat with their bread,
Xen.
At;
To;
Ephes.
Against
ii.
-,
at the riven Halex,
Thucyd.
good works,
created to
10.
stirring
up
the
Arcadians against Sparta, Herodot.
Before ;
After
'
before these judges, Aristoph.

after him Pher aulas rose up, Xen.
;:
&
,
,
'
197
irrl
besides these we sufother misfortunes, Horn.
uvtov ini
they admired him for his wisFor,
dom, Plato.
ini
they consulted the oracle conConcerning ;
cerning the country, Herodot.
'
it is in the power of the gods, Plato.
In the power of; ini
It is often put with the dative to express condition ;
come on condition of receiving presents, Horn.
ini
ini
aniivui, we shall seem to
Also design;
depart in order to make war, Xen.
Besides;
many
1&~
fered
,
& ,
'
With
,,
the Accusative.
he leaped upon his horse, Xen.

ini
ini
he shall reign over the
house of Jacob, Luke i. 33.
ini /, olxiav a^[yutda,we are come to the house, Aristoph.
looking towards the purple sea',
ini otvona
Upon;
Over;
To;
Towards;
,
'
&,
' &,
,,
Horn.
he marched against the

Ethiopians, Herodot.
you became celebrated among men,
in'
Against;
Among
Hom.
By ;
ini
For, during;
they ravaged the country for
&',
I slept till morning, Horn.

about three hundred, Herodot.
It is often put with verbs of_ motion, in order to show the
object of them ;
ah
I came to
you to get money, Xen.
in'
Till;
About;
ini
with,
With
With
among,
Among ;
'
among
of;
ii.
,,
the dead ?
'
Ajainst
16.
'
you,
In;
With
ae
;
',
tmv
Luke
the Dative.
&'
am
the youngest
Hom.
'
',
their
icere
the Accusative.
,
manes
Hom.
after
the
death of Darius,
Herodot. Of rank or degree; 3v

whom I love the most after you, Aristoph.
17*
among
carrying you in her arras, Callim.

him Apollo
shaken by the blowing of the wind,
With
the living
by means of virtue, Xen.

I will fight against them, Apocal.
Hom.
After;
why seek
the
io be first
caught with his hands,
By;
we commonly spent
xxiv. 5.
',
With
Among
after.
the Genitive.
day with him, Plato
By means
Theocr.
sitting by a fountain,
two days, Thucyd.
;;
198
To;
GOVERNMENT.
'
), ' ,
(Ion. for
"
Horn.
In
Into;
,
,
&'
Among;
among your
_ the best
Besides;
'
,
chiefs there are
coevals, Horn.
among
gods, Hesiod.
By;
Sometimes it
of an action
&'
{,
is
',, ,
,,
from,
With
From;
Agamemnon,
Near ;
By;
At
Through;
Against ;
jiaqa
'
aihbv
the Genitive.
to receive
presents from
,
,
the Dative.
the Accusative.
,,
,,,
he came to us, Plato.

they slept near him, Horn.
during the whole time, Demosth.

they do these things at their
entertainments, Herodot.
through the whole army, Thucyd.
'
)
;
him a
From;
to.
remaining at the ships, Horn.

they lodged with you, Demosth.
in Homer Diomedes says, Plato.
to go to Tissaphernes, Xen.
Xen.
By reason of ;
at,
he sailed in or-
' .] ,
, * {,
'
Above, more than
Below;
what
near the Cyanean rocks, Soph.

let this be shown by you, Xen.
With
Near ;
During ;
'
Plato.
With
To ,
they say that you are
put with the accusative to express the end
With ;
son.
neither by night nor by day,
der to get the golden fleece, Theocr.
In;
To
my
Greeks besides Achilles, Horn.

he sinned against the immortal
the
Plato.
At
to
having a club in his hands, Alciphr.

the Oxus falls into the Caspian
sea, Dionys. Per.
Against ;
,'' ,
us go
let
,
,
,
',
against the laics, Demosth.

he labored above the others,
'
aihbv
below the angels, Psa.
little
thou hast reduced
viii. 5.
they have confidence by

reason of their experience, Aristot.
I think that safety is from
this, Plato.
,
,,
there are not others besides these,
Besides;
Aristoph.
Except
(oisave) one,
'
I received forty stripes except
'-
xi. 24.
every fourth day, Polyb. ;

I came within a little of dying, Isocr.
they esteemed Cleander
consideration, Xen.
\X9ov
of little
2 Cor.
,;
199
IJeoL about.
,,/,
,
With
About
the Genitive
;
Plato.
For;
this land, Tyrt.
us fight for
let
From ;
what do you say about Achilles?
bring
letters from
Dccria-
nus, Lucian.
to be
Above ;
Plato.
,,,
,
With
About
By;
'
Of time;
the Dative.
about their necks, Herodot.

fearing for Potidaa, Thucyd.
they fled through fear, Find.
transfixed by the spear, Horn.
For ;
Through ;
About
above all others, Horn.

will greatly esteem you,
they
oi
,
,
With
the Accusative.
dwelling about the marshes, Herodot.
,
,
,
them about dinner-time, Thacy .'
Towards ;
uv, they overtake
Of number
about forty talents, Lys.

they are just towards the people,
Aristoph.
to offend
from, near,
& ,
,
,&
With
From;
By ;
to.
the Genitive.
Jib
all
are from Jupiter, Horn.

governed by one man, Eurip.
by the gods, Soph.
to be
,
,&,
,, ,
In obtestation
you seem
For ;
Near ;
Towards ;
Against;
Before
against the gods, Isocr.
Under ;
speak for me, Plato.

Herodot.
inhabiting towards the toest, Herodot.
ipijcpov, giving his vote
against an enemy, Dionys. Hal.
impious before the gods, Xen.
you may weave the web under an~
other, Horn.
it is the part of a man of sense,
Aristoph.;
on the father's,
mother's side, Êschin.
oi
the relations
by blood, Soph.
-9-, they are near
to
the sea,
',
With
Near;
nence,
In;
Upon;
Thucyd.
the Dative.
they
encamped near a certain emi-
to carry the children

in their arms, Plut.
they lay upon the ground, Horn.
&,
; ;
200
,& ,
GOVERNMENT.
'
Besides;
rotg
besides
what has
been said answer this also, Plato.
For ;
ov
they do not thii.k that virtue is naturally calculated for
,
Xen.
their good,
With
To;
Towards;
the Accusative.
',
Of dispositions
they went to Olympus, Hesiod.

he sailed towards the west, Herodot.
how is he disah
;
,,
,,
,
,
;
posed towards you
Against;
Plato.
do not kick against the pricks,
iEschyl.
According
to ;
they gave to each according
&
to his desert,
In comparison
with ;
On account of;
Xen.
in comparison with a
an ape,
will appear
%'
vision I hastened the nuptials, Herodot.

they
With;
god he
Plato.
on account of this
made an
alliance
with the king, Thucyd.
,
,
Between;
that is between us, Isocr.

lav
Besides;
,
,
them, Xen.
For
Thucyd.
About
it v
it
&,
from
By;
it
tea,ch
for the trophy
,,,
the Genitive.
deliver the sons of Greece
the darkness,
Horn.
,,,
'
,
,
,
,
',,,
'
Nicander, Xen.
to ;
they used
you
under the earth, Hesiod.
tude, Plato.
According
if besides this
was about day-break, Lys. Of number;

about seven hundred, Xen.
From ;
the friendship
Ynb y under.
With
Under ;
a proof of
they are praised by the multihe was slain by
according
to the
command of Jupiter
Horn.
For, by reason of;

With ;
To;
to dance for joy, Aristoph.

convey with pomp, Herodot.
to sing to the piper, Theog.
they dug under the strokes of whips,
inp>
to
Herodot.
Under ;
&,
Near, close under;

In;
With
under
the Dative.
Hom. Subject to ; imb Jans

they are under the Lacedamonians, lsocr.
the earth,
near the
city,
Thucyd.
concealing them in her bosom,
Hom.
Before
By ;
before such a witness, Herodian.

struck by my spear, Hom.
,
,
201
\,
For ;
With,
crying out for fear, Apoll. Rh.

he went forward icitli much light, Plut.
dancing
To;
'
"
With
Under ;
the Accusative.
horse's feet, Herodot.
/,
To;
that came to Troy,

utv
,&,
he was
Horn.
a dog ran under

most
the
xa't
About ;
&,
Obs.
'Slg is often
1.
Tt v
t
used
for
or Fig
he came to me, Demosth.

they sent ambassadors to the Athenians,
Obs. 2.
cases ; as,
,}
,)
Prepositions
. 69.
Herodot.
Hom.
&-,
as,
'
,
Thucyd.
from their
are sometimes separated
'
Hom.
as,
They
(for
(for
are also frequently placed after;

Eurip.
;
Plato.
Obs. 3. The poets sometimes join a preposition with the

only of two nouns, where it should stand with both
as,
Horn.
)
latter
4)
the
abject icrctch
and she conceals him

behind the door, Herodot.
about this time, Thucyd.
Behind;
Anacr.
to the lyre,
Obs. 4. Prepositions are frequently used as adverbs, without

as,
a case
Eurip.
Herodot.
,
;
Obs.
, ',} ,
(sc.
,)
Horn.
Herodot.
man, Soph.
),
'];
,
,)
,
Prepositions are often understood; as,
5.
(sc.
this
(sc.
al
the ships were lost with all on board,
,)
you shoot at
(sc.
Xen.
,)
(sc.
he returned with the army, Thucyd.
(instead of
;) why are you angry with me
;
Xen.
LI. A preposition in composition often governs

the same case, as when it stands by itself; as,
,
' ,
'
he leaps from the chariot.
tJ
isthmus.
throwing the leaves at one another,
&,
J/urjoi, he played at dicexcith Ceres.
having carried
their ships over the
;;
,, ,
GOVERNMENT.
202
Thucyd.
Plato
*, Lucian
Herodot.
Plato.
Obs. 1. This rule takes place only when the preposition would have the
same sense and the same case if standing immediately before the noun.
Sometimes the preposition is repeated ; as,
Xen.
,
,,
Obs. 2. Sometimes a case different from that required

in composition is used; as,
Obs. 3.
'
Herodot.
Soph.;
-dov
by the preposition
Plato;
Id.
,' ,
Eurip.
Prepositions are often separated from the verbs with which
they are compounded
as,
(for
,)
Herodot.
Horn.
VIII. 33.
Obs. 4. The prepositions with which some verbs are compounded are
for
not un frequently used for the compounds themselves ; as,
'
for
'
for
or
&,
arise thuu.
GRAMMATICAL FIGURES.
Figures which relate to Orthography and Etymology.
I.
Prosthesis
.
.
the prefixing of one or
is
more
letters to a
word
Epenthesis is
the insertion of one or more letters in the middle of a word
'.
as,
for
'
for
as,
for
for
&
addition of one or
for
more
the
letters to
for
Paragoge
is
end of a word
the
as,
Aphceresis is the taking of one or more letters from the

for
as,
for
beginning of a word
for
Syncope is taking from the middle of a word; as,
Apocope is taking from the
for
from
as,
for
for
end of a word
;
.
&
.
Tmesis is the separation of the parts of a compound word

for
by the insertion of another as,
as,
Metathesis is the transposition of letters
for
from
Anfor
as,
for
tithesis is the putting of one letter for another
;
&,
~.
for
, .
Synceresis is the contraction of two syllables into one, withas,

Crasis is the
out a change of letters
for
contraction of two syllables into one, with a change of vowels;
for
Synaloepha is the uniting of syllables in
as,
different words, either by dropping vowels
as,
for
or by contracting them
as,
for
Diceresis divides one syllable into two ; as,
for
for
..
II.
Ellipsis
Figures which relate to Syntax.
is
when one
The
plete the sense.
more words are wanting to comwhat have been else-
or
following, with
where given, are some of the principal examples of
this figure;
,, }, ,&,, ,, ,,,
,
,
but its limits are far from being accurately defined, some allowing it a wider field than others, and indeed than seems to
belong to it.
Ellipsis of substantives,
,) ,)
or
(sc.
or
(sc.
or
,)
Horn.
(sc.
(sc.
(sc.
Thucyd.
Plato;
],)
&,)
Herodot.
Thucyd.
,
,
,
&,
,)
,)
,
,
,)
,,)
, ,) , ,) ,
, , ,))&, &
,
,)
, ,),, ,)
,
204
, ,
,)
&,
,)
(sc.
Thucyd.
,) Xen.
(sc.
Luke
47, 48
xii.
Demosth.
Xen.;
(sc.
Herodot.
(sc.
JEschin.
(sc.
(sc.
Andoc.
Thucyd.
or
Ellipsis of verbs,
(sc.
(sc.
(sc.
,)
Plato;
(for
,
, ,[
,),),) ,
(i. e.
Horn.
Plato
Xen.
Frequently
Horn.
(for
must be supplied before
or the like,
,~\
Thus,
In some cases, however, instead of

being supplied,
is rendered otherwise, alioqui
Horn.
you
will be blamed,
The
(sc.
,
'
is
Or
(.
, ,)
as,
,)
Id.
of the adverb
ellipsis
Horn.
, , &,
Asyndeton
,
%,
as,
otherwise,
as,
& ,
,,-
the omission of conjunctions where they are
is
often takes place before ^
Id.
usually inserted
,
,,
do not do this
sometimes omitted;
Lucian;
(sc.
An
,
Xen.
participle
,)
Aristoph.;
(for
(i. e.
,) Plato
,
,,
bv, (for
Lucian
Plato;
(sc.
(sc.
(sc.
(sc.
as,
,
,
, ,)
Demosth.
Xen.
Synesis is when the construction is referred, not to the gender or number of the word, but to the sense as,
",
Zeugma
is
) ,
when two
common, which
Pleonasm
is
is
Thucyd.
more substantives have a verb

applicable only to one of them
as,
or
'
the use of
(sc.
Horn.
in
'
^schyl. Prom. 21.
more words than
are necessary to
&,
express the sense

Soph.
Lucian.
;
as,
ffisv
Horn.
205
Horn.
Polysyndeton is the use of conjunctions where they are not

grammatically necessary; as,
*%
Xen.
Horn.
Hendiadys
,)
(for
as,
,
',
Thucyd.
,,
Periphrasis, or circumlocution,
as,
express one thing
;
,)
,,
;
is
Hyperbaton
,
,
&,
common
Soph.
Hysteron proteron
when
is
to the sense, should be first
that
ffixre,)
or the placing of that

(for
Horn.
(for
,)
;
order or
(for
&,) ,
Anastrbphe is the inversion of words,

word last which should be first as,
;
put
is
Horn, (for
strength or power.)
-]&
as,
Thucyd.
Plato
,
Horn.
the transgression of the
is
in reality one,
(for
(for
Pind. ;
but with the collateral idea
arrangement of words;
is
the use of several words to

Êschyl.
(for
,) Herodot.
(for
yEschyl.
,
,) ,
",)
which
the expression of that
is
were two;
as if there
as,
last,
which, according
\,
, ,)'
'
&,,)
, ,
,) ',
(for
Hypallage
is
spective cases
Synchysis
the sense
is
is
Hom.
when two words mutually exchange
Soph.
arrangement of words, by which
a confused
obscured
their re-
(for
as,
as,
(for
Pausan.
Anacoluthon takes place, when the
latter part
does not agree in syntax with the former;
, ',
the
Thucyd.
of a sentence
as,
or
(for
Syracusans were surprised when
they
or
but the Assyrian,
of Babylon and the rest of Assyria,

than twenty thousand horse, Xen.
18
saw
who
(for
possessed
think will bring not less
is
PROSODY.
QUANTITY.
The
quantity of a syllable
pronouncing
is
the space of time taken up in
it.
Syllables, with respect to their quantity, are either long or

short.
long syllable in pronouncing requires double the time of
a short one
Some
as,
-.
common ; that is, sometimes long, and

sometimes short; as the second syllable in
syllables are
vowel is said to be long or short by nature, which

always so by custom, or by the use of the poets thus
and
are always long,
and always short.
is
,,'
,
some
t,
and
v,
are called doubtful, because they are long in

short
syllables,
The
in others,
or
'.
and common in others
as,
may be divided into those which apply

long by nature or by position; to the doubtful
vowels in the first and middle syllables, 1. before vowels or
diphthongs, 2. before single consonants
and to the doubtful
vowels in final syllables.
to
rules of quantity
syllables
SYLLABLES LONG BY NATURE.

Circumflexed syllables, diphthongs, and single
I.
vowels produced by contraction, as well as ty and
, ..,
are long
-du,
by nature
as,
for
for
, ,
for
for
Exc. A long vowel or a diphthong is generally shortened

end of a word, and sometimes at the beginning, before
as,
another vowel or diphthong
at the
'
~'
^,
-daX
Horn.
-/1>, Id.
207
QUANTITY.
,
' .
*
Obs. Sometimes also a long vowel or a diphthong is shortened before

'/.>\'
Horn.
as, ft" dt
a consonant
But such readings are generally thought to be false, and others have been
;
substituted for
them;
thus, ni
SYLLABLES LONG BY POSITION.

A syllable in which a short or common vowel
II.
, ~,
precedes two consonants, or a double consonant,

as,
long by position
Exc.
1.
,,
'
'/
', ,
)[\,
^,
Phocyl.
Hesiod.
mute followed by
short vowel before a middle
short
Horn.
short vowel before a mute and a liquid, or before

the last even with
following, is common
as,
or rough mute followed by

comic writers.
onog
is
any
liquid,
o, and before a smooth

generally continues short in the
, ',
, , ,
vowel before a middle mute followed by
is
generally
made long both in the comic and tragic writers.

Exc. 2. A final short vowel sometimes remains short before
a word beginning with a double consonant or two single ones
as,
Id.
Horn.
&;,
'
Also a short vowel sometimes continues short before a

by a word beginning with a consonant ; as,
Arat. But such passages are differently read ; thus,
being used adverbially.
Obs. 1.
consonant,
Horn.
Obs. 2.
particularly
Obs.
(for
}(
Id.
; ,&
is
xo-
When
Id.
oqiv, Id.
sometimes made long before a
,)
(for
as,
and
Horn.
(for
&,)
rroo";
Id.
three short syllables come together, one of

made long in heroic verse for the sake of
3.
them must be
measure
as, a&avuzo;
;
;,
Id.
short syllable
digammated vowel
followed
is often made long before a single

before a liquid
as,
short vowel
, ;,
final
Horn.
;, 3-,
THE DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN THE FIRST AND

MIDDLE SYLLABLES.
1.
III.
diphthong
Before \t owels and Diphthongs.
doubtful vowel before another vowel or a

is generally short.
PROSODY.
Exceptitions.
long in
is
2.
3.
4.
for
^ &.
.
Words where it is used in Doric for

as,
The oblique cases of
lag for
The Êolic genitives in o and
as,
The second and third persons singular present
1.
indicative
ionic of verbs in
if the preceding syllable be long
as,
but otherwise it is short; as,
5. The present and imperfect of verbs in , when the digamma is supposed to be inserted as,
or vafca.
6. Nouns in
whether they increase short or long as,
Except
and a few
,.
,.
'
,
,
,
,
^
,, ,
, , '^ , ,, ,,(,
,
,
,
,
,
,, , , , , , ,
,,, , , . , , ',
,
.
others.
,
,
,
,
,
,, ,.
,
., ,, , ,
, , , , , ',
7. Most feminine proper names in

masculines are short as,
But
as,
noxious,
8.
^,
or
and
with
and compounds, as, ',

aiy.i
and several other compounds of
and other compounds of
tives
its
its
deriva-
&c,
&c,
derivatives, as,
the perfect middle

with other compounds of
good,
and other compounds of
i
of
common
is
and
in
and
for
gen. of
?,
or
1.
Nouns
2.
and
Comparatives
',
,
,,
are
as,
short),
are
in
mv
2.
3.
4.
,,
.
', ",
,
and
in ia
as,
is
.
vv
Chios,
common
as,
as,
,,
an arrow, poison, with

&c. (but Xov, a violet, and its compounds, as,
I
Nouns
common.
but in the Attic dialect only
of Chios, Chian, (but
1.
long in
increasing short
in
-&,
3.
compounds,
is
its
in
, ..
, ,, ,',, ,-,,', ,
Verbs
in
The improper
of exclamation,
as,
reduplication of verbs in
r ia,
t
or
!>
is short).
as,
, an adverb
209
QUANTITY.
, ,,,
,,
', ^, ,
,^,,,
, $.
,
.
,
,,,.
is
long in
or
common
is
1.
Most verbs
2.
The
in
as,
oblique cases of
in
&.
some nouns
vog
in
as,
3.
2.
IV.
Before Single Consonants.
doubtful vowel before a single consonant
is short.
Exceptions.
,
.
,,
; ,, , , ,,,,
, , , , ,&.,
,,
,
, -\, , - ,
,,,, ,
is
1.
Nouns
in
long in
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
, ,
,
,
,
*, ,
,
,
. , , ,.
. , ,. ,
pure and
derived from verbs in

2.
The
oblique cases of masculines in
Also of K&Q,
3-,
3.
as,
and
all
others in
names
Gentiles and proper
as,
pure.
in
and gentiles
in
'
as,
Except the gentiles
and some Others, as
with
also
likewise the proper names

those in
as also
and several more,

and a
all
few others.
4.
Nouns
5.
Numerals
6.
The
.
singular
7.
8.
9.
is
The
in
as,
with
of verbs; as,
Likewise the dative plural of nouns whose dative
long by position; as,
in
third person
first
future in
of verbs in
as,
plural in
first aorist
pure and
The feminine in
Words which have
18*
of participles
a Doric for
,, , ,
in
as,
as,
as,
and perfect
in
..
for
210
PROSODY.
,
,
,.
,.
,^ , , ,
,,
,
,, , , , , ,,, &, , , , ,
.
is
'
break, and
In
also long in the following words, before
is
&C,
common.
to
.,,
to
'
derivatives, with those of
its
lead, as,
satiate,
,
-,
,
,
-,
,
,
,
,
,
,
*,
,
,
,,
,.,, ',
,
,^,
,
,
,,
,
,, ,., .
,,,^,
,
,
,
,
,
',
,
,
,
,,
,
,
,, ,
,,
, , ,., , ,,,
, , ,,
,
,
.
,
,,
,
,
,
,,,
,
,
,
,
,
, ,,
",
-,
,
',
',
,,, , ,,
,.
,
. ,
',^',
,
,
,
.
,
,
,',,
,
',,
,,
'
',
,
,
,
',
,
,
,"
,
,
,
,
,,
', , '.
'
wood,
to collect,
'
'
common
JVL
--
unwilling,
for
But
is
as also in
in
'
'
or
'
beautiful,
}
or
is
in the nominative singular, but long in the oblique cases

is long in Homer, but short in the Attic writers.
'
,
mon
'
'
'
'
'
,.,
The
or
prayer, imprecation,
1.
Nouns
2.
The
common.
Dor. for
following are com-
,*'
for
',
for
or
.
- ,, ,
, ,.
is
long in
derived from verbs in mw as,

in
oblique cases of monosyllables, of nouns in
-&,
is
breakfast,
agreeable,
[,
in
Likewise
IT'
common
and
,,
&,
or
in
as,
and
-,
Except
, , , , , , , , -
Jig,
3.
The
oblique cases of the following nouns in
:, ,
&, ,
,
,
,- ,
,
&
,
,
,
,
,
.
,,,,,
,
,
,
,
,
,,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
, ,,,, ,
QUANTITY.
211
Also of those in
',
The
oblique cases of
Nouns
4.
as,
Except
,
,
, &,
,, ,, , ,
,^.,
,6
long
as,
-d
-,
but a few of those denoting time are sometimes
^,
sometimes
Xvi\,
as,
sometimes
Except also adjectives of matter, time, and some
squalidness,
Others
common.
are
in
.
,
,. ,
,
,
^,
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,,,
,.
,,
,,. ,,,
, ,',
,, .,
&,
, &, ,
&.
,
, ,,
,,,,,,,
Nouns
5.
in
-,
Except
and
pure
compounds.
-,,-,
, &, , ,.
as,
Verbs
7.
their
from genitives whose
Diminutives in
6.
as,
&), ),
in
Except
last syllable is
&,-, ),
as,
which are
and
long in Homer, but short in the Attic writers.
The
8.
as,
first
future in
and
first aorist
in
*,
of verbs in
/,
is
also long in the following words, before
^,,',
'
",common
These
'
,
.
'
,^, -
-, '&, &,
&, &,
&,
&,
[,
&, &^ -9
,*, ,'"
', ', '', ',
,, ,
.,
., .,
., ,/,,
.
,
,
,
,
,^',
-,
-,
,
,
, ", ~,
',
.,
,
'/,
&,
.,
}
,
,
, , ', , ', &,
are
or
and others from
, , ,,,. , , ,,,
, ,, , ,,
.
,
, , ,,,, ,,
,,
,,
(
with
ccTxl,
'
many
other
compounds of
In
is
common.
or
'
or
and*'
is
common.
'
and many more of the same beginning with
But
is
common.
this last
,,
, ,,,
,
,'
,
,
,
,
,,
,
,
.
,
,, ,
,
^
^,
,
,
,,,,
,
,
,
*,,,
,
,
,&,
,
",,
.
,
,
,
,
,
&,
,
,
,
,
,
',
, , , ,,., , . ,
,
,
,,,,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
',
,
,
,
'
'
,
.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,,., , , , .
,,
,,
,,
,,
,
,
,,.
.
212
PROSODY.
&,
, ,,
,*' ^,
,
or
iV*
Trior,
}
and
others in
'
'
~.
or
~, ~,
for
'
simple, mean,
~,
These
are
com-
',
with
many
is
Nouns
in
others beginning with

are common.
long in
in
common.
are
and
from verbs
),
-
',
1.
common.
or
is
*'
'
mon
a mousetrap,
or
derived
as,
But there are some exceptions,

which shorten the penul-
particularly of derivatives from verbs
-, ?,
-, ,
,
,
, , ,&-,
,.
&.
tima of the perfect passive

2.
The
and
Diminutives in
pure as,
3.
.
is
4.
'
&-,
Verbs
6.
The
in
first
first
dissyllables throughout.
&
-,
as,
as,
is
common.
last syllable
&,
and first aorist in

of verbs in
But with some exceptions as,
and third singular and
active of polysyllables in
as,
third
plural present
and
in
,'. , ,, ', 6 /, ],
,
1" is also
'
'
future in
as,
The
from genitives whose
, ,,,,
5.
as,
oblique cases of nouns in vv or

Also of
long in the following words, before
,,,,,,,, ,,,., ,
) "', , , , , ,
,*,
.
213
QUANTITY.
IS
common.
'
,,
,,,,, &,,,, , , , ,
,
,
,
,,
,
,
, ,,
',
,
,
,
,
', , , .
,
,
,
9, ,,
,,
,,
&,
,
,
,
,
',
',^,
,
,
,
,
,
,
&, ,
,
,
,
,
,
&,
&,
,
,
,
,',,,,,,,,,,,31,.
.
,
,
,
'.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
',
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,,,.
-,
,
,
^,, ,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
.
,,
,
,,
,
, , ,, ,.
,,,,,
,,,,,
, ,,.,
,,,
,
,,
,,
}
&,&,&,
. &,,&,',&,,&,,
&,
, ,.
In
is
common.
and
'
is
Dionys. Perieg. 855., but elsewhere
it is
long in
alwaj^s short.
*'
'
',
'
-, &,
'',
&,
common.
'".
In
the penultima
is
&,
,
""
Dor. for
These are
common
round, curved,
circle,
hammer,
But
and
are
common.
'
-d
'
the reins,
'
, .
bridle,
,, ,
)
and
214
PROSODY.
THE DOUBTFUL VOWELS

The
V.
IN FINAL SYLLABLES.
word
doubtful vowels in the end of a
are short.
Exceptions,
long in
is
,
&, ,
&,,, , ,,
, , ,, ,
,
Nouns
1.
in
,,,,
oa,
\,
,
.
, ''
and polysyllables
in aia
and the adverbs

verbals in
as
names of more than two

and nouns
&,
syllables in
aia, as,
'~,
2.
in
4.
.
as,
5.
6.
7.
as,
, ,,
Duals of the first declension as,

Feminine adjectives in pure and
from masculines
IU,
as,
Except
Nouns in
if of two syllables, or from verbs in
from
Accusatives in
from nouns in
as,
from
;
3.
as,
But the
some proper
preceded by a diphthong, a long v, or

with
except
in
with
,, ,.,,.
following are short
Vocatives from proper names in

Words in Doric for or
for
But those
as,
in a iEolic are
,,.,
for
as,
short
as,
Horn.
,,.
1.
The
2.
The names
long in
is
demonstrative additions of the Attics
of letters
is
1.
2,
as,
ccq,
aorist
Av,
,,
with
w,
as,
long in
The imperfect and second

The names of letters as,
VI.
of verbs in
S
with
in the
as,
is
common.
end of a word,
are short.
Exceptions.
Av
1.
Masculines in av
pounds are
short, as,
is
as,
long in
Tixav
with
nav t whose com-
215
QUANTITY.
,,.,
Accusatives of the
2.
are long
as,
The
3.
Uav,
adverbs
Aq
long in
is common.
is
Kag and
declension, whose nominatives
first
Iv is long in
as,
Nouns in tv
Words of two terminations as,
when circumflexed.
and
1.
2.
3.
is
, ..
.
.
long in
but
Monosyllables; as,
Words of two terminations
Nouns in /c increasing long;
1.
2.
3.
is
short.
and
as,
as,
Yv is long in
as,
Nouns in w
Words of two terminations; as,
1.
2.
and
and
Accusatives in
from long nominatives in vg
The imperfect and second aorist of verbs in
with i'Cv, but
enclitic is short.
3.
'.
as,
4.
is
as,
long in
with
as,
Monosyllables
2. Words of two terminations; as,
and
3. Nouns accented on the last syllable, and declined in og
But some of them are common, as
pure as,
4. The second person singular, as also participles, of verbs
1.
6>?.
, ,.
&.
in
as,
and vq
VII.
final are long.
Exceptions.
,.
Nouns
as,
short in
is
increasing
as,
except those in avog and
,.
2. Accusatives plural of the third declension

as,
Likewise of the first in Doric as,
Theocr.
3. Second persons singular of the first aorist active, and of
the perfect active and middle
as,
4. Adverbs in ac, as,
;
.
;
H VIII
common.
The
last
syllable
of
every verse
is
21G
PROSODY.
THE QUANTITY OF DERIVATIVE AND COMPOUND WORDS.

Derivatives.
I.
,,, ,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
.
tX.
Derivatives follow the quantity of their primi
tives; as,
&]
from
from
from
-,
from
),
from
the second aorist of
Exc. 1. In verbs of the fourth conjugation, the

lengthens the short penultima of the first future
as,
first
aorist
In verbs of the first and second conjugation, the penultima

of the perfect is short, if the vowel in the penultima of the
first future be long merely on account of the
or
following
In some verbs also of the third conjuas,
from
gation, the long vowel in the penultima of the first future is
from
shortened in the perfect passive as,
Exc. 2. In some verbs which are long in the penultima of

the present, the perfect middle lengthens the short penultima
to break,
as,
of the second aorist active
,, , &,
,
,
,
',,
&,
-&
, ,, , ,
,,.
Obs.
^)^
short doubtful
becomes long
in the
vowel
at the
augmented tenses
2.
', ".
beginning of a verb
as,
Compounds.
&],& , . ,
,
,
&
, .
X. Compounds follow the quantity of the simple

words which compose them as,
;
from
from
from
Obs.
The
are short
long
for
from
from
the second aorist

the perfect middle of
inseparable particles a privative,
as,
, , , ,.
Unless a be made
as,
the sake of measure before two short syllables
- or before a consonant which may be supposed to
have been doubled in pronunciation
as,
as if
217
VERSE.
VERSE.
A
verse
is
a certain
number of long and
short syllables dis-
posed according to rule.
..
.
. .
. ,.
Verses are divided into parts of two, three, or four syllables,

which the following are the most common.
called feet, of
The
Spondee, consisting of two long as,

as,
a long and a short
Trochee,
Iambus,
a short and a long; as,
two short as,
Pyrrhic,
a long and two short as,
Dactyle,
two short and a long; as,
Anapest,
three short; as,
Tribrachys,
;
When
ccesura,
a single
which
syllable
taken by
is
commonly
is
itself,
called
is
it
a long syllable.
SCANNING.
The measuring of verse,
feet of
which
it is
When
or the resolving of
into the several
it
composed, is called scanning.

just the number of feet requisite, it
is called versus
a verse has
acatalectus, or acatalecticus, an acatalectic verse :
If a syllable be wanting, it is called catalecticus ; if a foot, brachycatalecticus : If there be a
syllable or foot too much, hyper catalecticus, or hypermeter.
Frequently two vowels meeting together in different syllables

pronounced in scanning as one syllable, which is called
synizesis, or synecphonesis ; as,
Horn.
Id.
Soph.
$)
Horn.
In these examples,
is pronounced
,, ,,
',
,
,
are
as five syllables
and
as also
as a monosyllable
*)
thus,
,.
as
two
syllables
DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERSE.

Hexameter.
I.
The hexameter
these the
rest
verse consists of six feet.

Of
a dactyle, and the sixth a spondee ; all the
be either dactyles or spondees ; as,
fifth
may
vy v/
or heroic
is
- - -,
v/
w|-
%j
\j
-fo-oi
A
verse
spondee
"
is
is
- - -,
often admitted in the fifth place,
called spondaic
v/vy|
19
Horn.
whence the
as,
v_/\_/|
v/\y|
Horn.
218
PROSODY.
What
verse
is
deserves particular attention in scanning hexameter

the ccesura.
Caesura
when
completed, there remains a

It is called triemimeris ,
penthemimeris, hephthemimeris or enneemimeris, according as
it falls on the
third, fifth, seventh, or ninth half-foot of the
hexameter verse in which it is found.
All these different
species of it sometimes occur in the same verse
as,
is
word
syllable in a
a foot
after
is
new foot.
to begin a
v/vy|
i
--
"~|
^ U
C\> |
v>
\j
I
a~r\vav,
Hom.
But the most common and beautiful caesura is the penon which some lay a particular accent or stress of
the voice in reading a hexameter verse thus composed, whence
they call it the ccesural pause ; as,
themim
^,
-^-,
When
ders
it
the caesura
long
falls
on a
Horn.
syllable naturally short,
as,
'
it
ren-
Horn.
Pentameter.
II.
The pentameter verse consists of five feet. Of these the

two first are either dactyles or spondees the third, always a
spondee and the fourth and fifth, anapests
as,
;
But
V/
V>
-&]-
&,
\J
Jv> \J
\j>
Solon.
more properly divided into two hemistichs

or halves
the former of which consists of two feet, either
dactyles or spondees, and a caesura the latter, always of two
dactyles and another caesura thus,
this verse is
;
- -- ^
;
III.
-og
xa&o-Qa.
Iambic.
The
iambic, trochaic, and anapestic verse, is measured by

metres or pairs of feet, and is therefore called dimeter when
consisting of four feet, and trimeter when consisting of six feet.
On the other hand, the Latin names quaternarius and senarius
refer to the number of feet.
The iambic
consisted
verse,
which
is
most usually trimeter acatalectic,
originally of iambic
feet
only, but afterwards ad-
219
VERSE.
mitted a tribrachys, spondee, dactyle, or anapest, in the odd

and a tribrachys,
is, in the first, third, and fifth
or sometimes an anapest, in the even places, that is, in the
second and fourth, for the last foot must always be an iambus
places, that
---
thus,
-H-
'
-
-|
)
&---,
-I - -II
-II-
-gog
4>
-dv^
Soph.
Aristoph.
tetrameter catalectic is also very common in the comic

writers, and admits nearly the same variations as the senarius
The
thus,
'
^ hi -
-, -_|
;-
|Aristoph.
Trochaic.
IV.
The most common
trochaic verse is the tetrameter catalecconsisting of seven trochees and a syllable, but admitting
a tribrachys in the first, third, fifth, and seventh places ; and
a tribrachys, spondee, or anapest, in the second, fourth, and
sixth ; as,
tic,
- "-
- [%v
- |
-|t-v| - -II -
_||
\>\
\j \j
c|
%J
-I
\j
1|
\\
-I --II
dactyle of proper names

and sixth places.
-&
|
admitted in the
is
Aristoph.
\j
first,
Eurip.
second,
third, fifth,
V. Anapestic.
The
anapestic verse properly consists of anapests only, but

admits a dactyle or spondee in all the places, though an anapest rarely follows a dactyle, on account of the concurrence of
short syllables which would be thereby produced.
The most common
is
the dimeter acatalectic
\j
\j

1|
o|
as,
-&,
\j
Soph.
The
dimeter catalectic, called a paramiac, of which the

third foot must be an anapest, closes a series of anapestic
verses
as,
>
& -,
\\j \j
Soph.
220
PROSODY.
The monometer
acatalectic, called a base, for the
precedes the paroemiac
&
7
The
,
\
-,
- -
HI
I"
||
- -
w v-
-,
v|
k
w - Jj uw - -
-, Aristoph.
wv
I
IJvr
Aristoph.
Anacreontic.
VI.
The Anacreontic
used by the
&' -
|w
||
||w
Eurip.
also frequently
is
II
most part
as,
w w
ww
tetrameter catalectic
comic writers
ww
as,
iambic dimeter catalectic, consisting of an iambus or spondee, two iambuses, and a syllable; as,
verse
is
- -, -,
7tai
-|
-||
-|
Anacr.
Another kind of Anacreontic verse differs from the above by

having an anapest in the first place as,
w-
-,
-I
nod'''
Anacr.
But this last verse is also divided into a pyrrhic, two trochees, and a spondee ; thus,
-- .
.
w
] H~
**
~~
7T0&*
VII.
SrAPPHIC
AND
The Sapphic verse consists of five feet, a trochee, a spondee

or a trochee, a dactyle, and two trochees ; as,
-
An Adonian
-w
- --,
-
Sappho.
verse consists only of a dactyle and a spondee;
Sappho.
221
ACCENTS.
ACCENTS.
I.
There are three accents, tne acute ('), the
grave ( ), and the circumflex (~), one of which must
stand on some syllable of every word.
v
Exc. The ten words
6,
at,
,,,
/), ;,
(or
),
called atonies, have no accent : Unless they stand

at the end of a sentence, or after a word to which they are
or
as,
naturally prefixed
;
or
.& ,
unless they precede an enclitic
as,
An
enclitic is a word which throws its accent on the

of the preceding word, in which case alone can
but
as,
a word have more than one accent
Obs.
&,
last syllable
--
The
acute stands on one of the three last

and the
grave, on the last only
circumflex on one of the two last.
II.
syllables
the
Obs. 1. The acute on final syllables is changed into the

grave, when other words follow in connection, and in no other
case is the grave expressed
but when such final syllables are
followed by an enclitic, or by any stop besides the comma
(and, according to some, even by the comma), they retain the
acute ; as,
;
&
&.
Words acuted on
the last syllable are called by the

Greek grammarians oxytona; on the penultima, paroxytona
and on the antepenultima, pr op ar oxytona;
Those circumflexed on the last syllable are called
Obs.
2.
..
^,-,,
,,
and on the penultima, properispomena ; as,

words which have no accent expressed on the
S
last syllable are called barytona ; as,
and hence the barytona comprehend the paroxytona, proparoxytona, and properispomena.
perispomena
^,
III.
AH
The
of
, , ,, ,,
acute and the grave stand on long and

the circumflex only on syllables long
short syllables
by nature
as,
Obs.
Hence
itself,
and not merely by position, as
it
appears that the in
19*
in
is
long
222
ACCENTS.
, . ,
,,
,
,
, ,, ,
.
, , &, .,
>, , .
,,
IV. The acute can stand on the antepenultima,

and the circumflex on the penultima, only when the
last syllable is short by nature
as,
but
;
but
Exc. The
in the Ionic genitive in
and in the Attic terminations
of the first declenof the second and

third declensions, as also in the
of
and
admits an acute on the antepenultima; as,
,,
compounds
sion,
from
Obs. The terminations on and

accentuation
as,
ov
are considered as short in
Except opta-
tives
as,
and the adverb
distinguish
it
from
at home, to
houses.
V. If the last syllable be short by nature, and the

penultima long by nature and accented, the accent
must be the circumflex as,
;
Obs. 1. This rule shows that the last syllable is short by

and others increasing short, and long
nature in
and the like.
by nature in S
-,
,,
Obs. 2. This rule does not apply to those cases where an

nor,
as,
enclitic forms a part of the word
according to the best critics, to those where a short syllable is
for
made long by synaloepha as,
'
;
VI. Oxytons of the first and second declension circumflex the last syllable of the genitives and datives ;
. ,,,, ,,, .,. .,

as,
\,
S.
D.
Exc. Attic oxytons of the second declension retain the

acute in the genitive singular as,
;
declension always cirof

the genitive plural,
cumflex
whatever be the place of the accent in the other
as,
cases
VII.
Nouns of
the
first
, ,, .,
the
last
syllable
,,,.
Exc. The feminine of baryton adjectives in

penultima of the genitive plural as,
Likewise
;
accents the
223
ACCENTS.
VIII. Monosyllables of the third declension accent the last syllable of the genitives and datives,
and the penultima of the other cases
as, S.
D
P.
,
, ,, %..
$,
. ,,
;
, ,&,, . , , ,
, &,, ,
interrogative are accented on the

Exc. Participles and
penultima in the genitives and datives, as well as in the other
Likewise
cases; as,
light, in the
a pustule,
and
genitive plural
in the genitive dual and plural
in the genitive and dative, dual and plural ; as,
}
&,
and polysyllable nouns of the

upon
the syllable on which it stands in the nominative,
when not prevented by the nature of the final syl
IX.
Dissyllable
. ,,,'&,,, ,,
third declension
retain the accent throughout

.
lable;
as,
but
Exc. 1.
are accented on
the penultima in all the cases and numbers, except the three
first in the vocative singular;
as,
)
,
,
-, ,
",., , , .
,,,.
,
,'
,
\ &, , .
Exc.
2.
The
,,,
, -,
following nouns throw the accent back as far
as possible in the vocative singular, in
of the nominative
is
shortened
which
tlie last
,*
proper names in
, and
syllable
some other words
as,
Likewise
makes
Obs. Nouns which suffer syncope conform in some measure
analogy of monosyllables
as,
}
as does also
as,
But the dative plural in
accents the penultima as,
In the syncopated cases of
the accent is thrown
upon the antepenultima of the nominative, accusative, and
vocative
as,
(See
}
to the
page 26.)
X.
contracted syllable
the former of the
two
is
circumflexed,
syllables from
which
when
it
re-
,,. , ,
224
ACCENTS.
suits
fore
acuted; otherwise
is
it
remains as
as,
cpilu
Exc.
it
was be-
but
(,
,,,,
In words compounded with nouns in

the
is not circumflexed
as,
from
So
Also the accusative
makes
,.
1.
&.
contracted syllable
--
,.
of feminine contracts in
tains the acute
as,
;
,.
and
Exc. 2. Adjectives in
penultima, circumflex the
Also
of the third declension re
having an acute on the ante-
syllable
last
contraction
after
when contracted becomes
as,
When
XI.
prepositions are placed after their

put instead of verbs compounded with
them, they throw back the accent upon the penultima ; as,
for
or
cases,
"
Exc.
when placed
and
retain the
accent on the
after their cases, to distinguish
the vocative of
-, and
last syllable
.
,
them from &va
the accusative of
XII. When oxytons lose their final accented

vowel, the accent is thrown back upon the penulfor
tima
as,
for
Exc.
with the
" &.
lose the accent
Prepositions and the conjunction

vowel ; as, nag"
}
final
On
Obs.
the contrary,
when
verbs lose their
initial
accented
syllable, the following syllable, if short, receives the acute, if
long by nature, the circumflex,
as,
&, &.
,,, ,
of perfects middle with

XIII. Compounds in
nouns, accent the penultima when their signification is active, and the antepenultima when passive
that brings forth for the first time;
as,
feeding the
;
people.
the
by
fed
compounded with a preposition, they draw
the first-born
people
Obs.
If they are
back the accent
to the
antepenultima
as,
225
ACCENTS.
,,
.
.
,
,
,
,.
, ,., , , ,
,
,
throw the accent back as

permit
will
&,
as,
,, , ,
Nouns compounded with
XIV.
far as the last syllable
In like manner
&c.
To these may be
added the compounds of two nouns
as,
;
Exc. Most adjectives in

of the third declension, verbals
, and many other compounds which cannot be reduced to
particular rules, have the accent on the last syllable
as,
in
,,
The accent is likewise on the last syllable of verbals

diminutives, patronymics, and other
adjectives in
derivative substantives in
as also of substantives in
from
the perfect passive
as,
Obs.
, . ., -, ,
in
cent as,
a compound verb
the penultima
as,
XV. Verbs
,,.
But compounds in
draw back the acexcept those which are derived merely from
Verbals in
as,
always accent
generally throw the accent back as

but those of one or two syllables
,
,
,
,
,.
,&, .
,
&. &
,,,
far as possible,
compounded with
prepositions
for
the
throw the accent upon the preposition

*
Exc.
1.
most part
as,
&,
The
or
ment
temporal
augment
or
retains
-&.
So
the
--
accent
and
as,
Also the syllabic aug-
as,
The second aorist accents the last syllable of the

and participle active and of the imperative middle, and
the penultima of the infinitive middle; as,
Also the last syllable of the imperatives
to distinguish them from the second aorist indicative. But the second person singular only of the imperative
Exc.
2.
infinitive
-.
,,,
, &,
226
ACCENTS.
&
, , ,-,
middle has the accent on the last syllable, the other persons
and numbers throwing it back as far as it will go as,
as do also
even
the second person singular.
;
Exc. 3. The second future active, the first and second aorist
subjunctive passive, and the subjunctive of verbs in
are
circumflexed on the last syllable.; as,
So the
first future active of the fourth conjugation, as,
which,
as also the second future, retains the circumflex on the same
syllable through all the modes and participles of the active and
middle voices, where the nature of the final syllable does not
prevent; as,
}
&c. The accent remains on the same syllable
through all the persons and numbers ; as,
&,c. ; which is likewise the case in the present and
second aorist optative, passive and middle, of verbs in
as,
, &,,
.,
,
,
-,
, , ,,
,,,
-,
-, -, -&, &,c.
,
&, , , , , &,
&
&, -.
,,,,. ,
, ,
Exc. 4. All infinitives in vcu, with those of the first aorist
active and perfect passive, are accented on the Denultima ; as,
Except the old or Doric
Exc.
5.
and
All participles in
infinitive in
as,
as also the participles
are accented on the last syllable, and the

active of verbs in
participle perfect passive on the penultima ; as,
&,
Exc. 6. Participles have the accent on the

the neuter as in the masculine ; as,
same
syllable in
\.
ENCLITICS.
, , ,,, ,, ,
,
, , ,, ,,
,.
,
,,,,,& ,
,,
,,,,
The
following are enclitics.
>,
S,
vlv,
through
indefinite
2.
tive,
The
verbs
all
The pronouns
1.
its
and
for
in the present indica-
except in the second person singular.
tit],
with the
cases, as well as
3.
The
which are
adverbs
distin-
,, & ,
guished only by their enclitic accent from the corresponding

or
interrogatives.
4. The conjunctions
9
as,
with the inseparable particle
or
}
ACCENTS.
227
XVI. Enclitics throw their accent as an acute

on the last syllable of the preceding word, if that
word have an acute on the antepenultima, or a
circumflex on the penultima; as,
Exc. When the last syllable of the preceding word ends

with a double consonant, the enclitic retains its accent ; as,
XVII. Enclitics lose their accent after oxytons,

which then resume the acute accent, and after
words which have a circumflex on the last syllable
as,
XVIII. Enclitic monosyllables lose their accent

words which have an acute on the penultima,
but dissyllables retain
it
after
as,
XIX. If several enclitics succeed each other, the

preceding always takes the accent of the following,
as, u
so that the last only is unaccented
Obs. 1. Enclitics retain their accent in the beginning of

and when they are emphatical, as,
a clause, as,
Rom. xi. 18. Also the pronouns retain their accent
after prepositions, and after
or $), as,
),
Obs.
2.
cented
When
', ,
follows
;
as,
,,,
>.
begins a sentence,
or
its
is
first
emphatical, or
syllable is ac-
DIALECTS.
Ancient Greece, with its dependencies, comprehended,
besides the different districts in Europe, part of Asia, and
several islands in the Mediterranean.
In these several couninhabitants, besides the common language, had
tries the
different dialects, of which four were principal, viz. the Attic,
Ionic, Doric, and JEolic ; the last comprehending the Boeotic.
The poetic style admitted all the dialects, and had certain
peculiarities of its own.
ATTIC DIALECT.
The
Attic dialect was the most refined, and peculiar to

It is admitted by the poets and
its neighborhood.
writers in the Ionic and Doric dialects.
Athens and
PROPERTIES.
I.
1.
Contraction.
Of syllables
a
ae
in the
into
a.
same word
as,
See Obs. 19, pa
aat, \
>
10.
9.
rt ai )
uo
11.
19.
-;
4. 6.
6. 20.
6. 20.
7
\
11.
00 )
5.
To
this dialect properly
belong
all
contract nouns and verbs.
229
ATTIC DIALECT.
Of
2.
different
syllables in
there are six species
.
.
&
.
^.
words by synalcepha, of whicn
viz.
&
apocope, as
>-,
.
.
.
.
&.
Xi
aphaeresis, as
c3
>
Attic
synaeresis, as
Til
crasis, as
apocope and
synaeresis,
apocope and
crasis,
as
Contractions of the article, the pronoun

and the preposition
xal,
.
,
.
.
&.
*e3
the conjunction
Article.
r
>
^,
.
andj
ol
.
.
.
.
.
<
.
.
&.
Ol
>.<2
I"2
1
before
.
.
&.
makes sometimes
See Article in the Ionic
20
<
dialect.
,.
.
,
230
DIALECTS.
*.
(..
1
C
AttlC
'
<
(?
?.
into
>
Before
.
.
.
.
[V
Before an aspirate
]
is
.
.
^.
,,
Attic
\
^
.
.
,
changed
into
as,
Attic
Before
.
.
,
.
,
.
.
,
,
,
.
*
.
, .
.
}
>
II.
Change of
into
letter or syllable
ft
as
,
&,
,
,
,
'
-&.
?,
, Fem.
/
,
,
Art.
.
.
Obs. 2.
Several of these contractions are more properly written without the

See page 6., near the top.
Busby, after Joh. Gramniaticus, reverses this instance, making &but greater authorities are against them.
for -fraQQuv
subscript.
4
&.
as,
t*M*S,
r,
e,
.
,
.
^
.
.
&, &.
.
231
ATTIC DIALECT
,
,
into
V
1
as
,
,
15.
4.
5
16.
?,
17
.
,
,
.
?, .
.
Diphthong.
at
?>
>
ft
)
)
,
6.
2.
,
.
, .
.
2.
Syllable.
Insertion of *,
III.
22.
24
27.
and
Obs. 16.
in perfect tenses.
17. 18.
IV. Syncope.
Obs. 12.
in the first future active and middle.
Antepenultima of the first aorist.
14.
in the perfect, sometimes with the vowel or
diphthong following.
19.
in the third plural pluperfect.
in
&,
.
,
'., , , ', ^ ,
V. Paragoge.
%,.
pronouns primitive as,

pronouns and adverbs as,
and
in pronouns demonstrative
in
ow
rot,
in
as,
for
,.
}
There
for
as,
20.
27.
23.
and verbs in
imperative passive and middle.
in the aorists optative,
in adverbs,
vvvi t
&a
in the
sometimes an
is
elision of
conjunctions, and prepositions
as,
ivl.
second person singular of verbs
in the conjunction
In
common
with the
Basotic.
as,
fo&a.
,
and
232
DIALECTS.
VI. Apocope.
&, &.
xhx in the imperative active of verbs in
for
and
as,
OBSERVATIONS.
makes the vocative
It
1.
like the nominative in
all
declen-
sions.
DECLENSIONS.
In the 2d, the vowel or diphthong in every termination
and the penultima of nouns in aog, if long,
is changed into
is changed into
as,
plur. Uaa,
not otherwise; as,
See Clarke's Homer, a, 265.
2.
.
, . , ,-, -
Some words
3.
and some
of the 3d in
in
it
declines after the 1st;
after the 2d.
(Page 35.)
.
,
.
In the 1st form the accusative singular of adjectives

(Page 23.)
contracted into
as,
4.
pure
is
Proper names of this form

and one appellative
;
sion
declines after the
first
declen-
(Page 35.)
,.
In the 2d and 3d forms it makes the genitive singular in

pure as,
contracting that from
5.
it
in
In the 3d form
contracts the accusative singular into
but
pure has both accusaand the N. A. V. plural into
also occurs.
as,
tives in a
6.
7.
, ,.
it
ADJECTIVES.
It
-, -, -.
-,
forms comparisons by
and, in common with the Ionic,
PRONOUNS.
8.
It
See Rule V. on the preceding page.

in the 2d person, and
uses
It contracts
9.
by
after the
10.
into
rj
, , &,
VERBS.
Doric manner.
,,,
and
made by the Ionic syncope,

second person singular of the present indicative
It contracts
in the
for
, &, ,
233
ATTIC DIALECT.
,
,&
.
, &, &.
passive and middle of verbs in
ofbarytons;
And
fw
as,
sometimes
in that of the perfect passive
^.
as,
(Page 110.)
j?o, oo, into

in
contracts the Ionic ao into
the 2d person singular of the imperfect indicative ; and of the
present and second aorist imperative passive and middle of
11.
It
verbs in
'
,,
12.
as,
In the
middle
&,
.,
it drops
future of polysyllables in
It does the same by those in
first
13.
It affects the
14.
It
augment
syncopates the
changes
into
o,
several different ways. (Page 73.)

aorist
first
(Page 96.)
15. In dissyllable perfects
(Page 78.)
It
as,
But
as,
which are afterwards contracted
ii. 28.
(Page 76, bottom,
uncontracted occurs, Joel,

and Obs. near the top of page 97.)
16.
,,
in
for
as,
it
changes
e into o.
, , &,
according to some grammarians,
in the perfect active of obsolete verbs
as,
,,
,
ninov&a, inserting . But they are better derived as in the

List of Defective Verbs.
,
17.
'#,
&,
which the
in
some
an opinion which
According
to
19.
into
to sanction.
from
,,,
,
In the perfect and pluperfect active

vowel as,
it
The
Ionic
,, ,
-,
for
of the pluperfect active and middle,

as,
-, -.
The
it
inserts
syncopates
^,
- ,-,- ,-.
,.
'&.
as
Except in the third person plural perfect, and

ciple, which contract the two vowels; as,
as,
change, but an insertion of
In the reduplicated perfect
also the following
20.
as,
often retained
is
this is not a
'& seems
\.
18.
as,
&,
In the perfects active and passive

and the middle
it changes
it
in the parti*
1st, 2d, and 3d sing
contracts into ,
contraction is used in the 2d person, though usually limited by

to the 1st and 3d only.
grammarians
20*
234
DIALECTS.
It
^.
syncopates
for
From
21.
&, .
in
2d person imperative
the
same tense
the third plural of the
&.
rejects the last syllable,
as,
&? &
active of verbs in
?
it
22. It changes
into
in the third person plural of
the imperative active, retaining the preceding vowel in the
1st aorist only of barytons, and in both the tenses peculiar to
verbs in
in the rest
is changed into o, except in the con
tracts,
where a
remains;
is
changed
into
into
, and
of the third
as,
Barytons.
-, -.
-, -.
1st Aor.
Pres.
Perf.
2d Aor.
>
Contracts.
1st Conj.
\
>
Verbs
(
Pres.
in
-.
-, -.
-.
.
&
(
.
-.
2d
it
&
&
&
23. In the 3d plural of the imperative passive and middle

syncopates
as,
Passive.
Pres.
Perf.
^-*>,
-v.
Middle.
1st
In this case the long vowel
.
#
is
restored, but
it is
not always in verbs
from
8
in this place
becomes
by reason of the preceding #.
235
ATTIC DIALECT.
24.
.
,
,
.
,.
In the optative active of barytons and contracts,
changed
into
as,
is
The
persons are varied in
passive of this
all
the tenses as in the aorists
mode
\
-,
-,
-,
-,
-,
-.
-, -,
25. It uses the 2d and 3d singular, and the

(Page 71.)
iEolic aorist.
26. It changes
verbs in
from
27.
It
changes
also in
in the
&
&
,.
,,
e>
as,
,,
syncopates
same mode,
in
of the aorists passive

in
of the
and, in both,
of the latter
and peculiar tenses of verbs
3d plural into
as,
&
&
Common.
1st Aor.
2d Aor.
Pres.
2d Aor.
d-
Pres.
plural of the
the penultima of the optative active of
into
optative of barytons,
3d
Attic.
'
'
-, -, -. &
<
-, -, -.
2d Aor.
Pres.
2d Aor.
dot
dot
WRITERS.
Thucydides, Lysias, Plato, Xenophon, Iscbus, Isocrates,
Demosthenes, JBschines, Lucian. JEschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, Aristophanes.
This dialect was divided into ancient
and more recent.
Thucydides, Plato, and Aristophanes used
the former.
The Doric moreover changes
of tne penultima into as,
"236
DIALECTS.
IONIC DIALECT.
The
Ionic dialect was peculiar to the colonies of the AtheniMinor and the adjacent islands,
Smyrna, Ephesus, Miletus, Teos,
by writers of the Attic dialect,
but most frequently by the poets.
ans and Achaians in Asia

the principal of which were
and Samos. It is admitted
often by those of the Doric,
PROPERTIES.
It delights
a confluence of vowels; hence
in
common
guished from the
The
I.
is
it
distin-
dialect by
resolution of diphthongs
and contractions.
&.
.
.
- & &.
&.
.
&
.
&
.
.
( ^'
.
]
,.
, }
into
_.;
61
6V
&
.
&.
, ..
,
*
, .
0*
f
i
(Maitt.
,
,.
.
<
'
103. b.)
Obs.
<
1
II.
5.
4, 5.
Syncope of
, . &, &.
,,,
and
in
in
in oblique cases.
many words
&,
many words
particularly
as,
imperf. of
in 2d persons of verbs.
a in the perfect active.
those
in
as,
for
237
IONIC DIALECT.
Epenthesis of
111.
,,,&,,...
,.
a before terminations of verbs.

before terminations of nouns and verbs, of
in all cases; as,
t in dual cases and many nouns; as,
as,
'
before a and
'
IV. Prosthesis of
some
1, 4.
for
as,
many words; as,

many tenses.
before
5.
12.
Reduplication in
,
,,.
V. Apharesis of
as,
'
as,
'
as, ^yavov.
12.
Augment.
Paragoge of
VI.
in the perfect
middle
as, ytyaa.
See, however, page 78.
in the third persons of verbs.
VII.
&.
.
- .
.
.
.
^
.
.
.
,
.
-- &.
.
& &.
Change of
\
>
&
V
\
Tt
into
&'
letter or syllable
>
&
'
<
Ionic
<
-oqd
The smooth and
aspirate
mute reciprocally
as,
\ Ionic <
&.
&.
Change of vowel and consonant.

The rough into the smooth.
See onward.
&
&
238
DIALECTS.
into
"^
V
VIII.
9.
.
'
.
.
&.
.
&.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4.
8.
4.
4.
.'
.
Contraction in a few instances.

into
.
.
3
C
J
(
3.
OBSERVATIONS.
1.
It inserts
2.
It
3.
In the
4.
In the 1st
,.
annexes
in all genitives plural.
of all parisyllabie nouns.

contracted into
as,
to the dative plural
before
or
article,
is
DECLENSIONS
it
changes the a of
all
terminations (the dual
and the N. A. V. plural excepted) into , subscribing the

of the genitive of nouns in c and
subjunctive vowel
and
of the accusative singular into
into
and
of
;
the plural into
..
-, -
G.
1.
Sing,
A.
-, -.
-.
2. Sing,
4
,
D. A.
or
-,
N.
-,
G.
-,
G.
-.
D.
-,
A.
-.
PI.
-rpv
PI.
or
See Article in the
BoQto), in Hesiod,
Attic Dialect.
for fioQtso)
by syncope
D.
-, - or or
G.
D.
-, - or -
239
IONIC DIALECT.
In the 2d
5.
(and
of the genitive singular into oto

whose
of this declension, into
of the dual into
G.
D.
G.
G.D.
changes
which
) and
it
in the article,
dative also
is
in
-,
G.
Sing.
D.
is
->,
Dual.
-*,
PI.
-.
*, '.
it makes
and
In the 3d by syncopating
of the 2d and 5th forms of the contracts.
6.
&
Sing,
-, -,
-,
-,
-*?,
iog.
In the
the 3d form,
7.
and 2d forms, the genitive and dative sing., in

of the penultima changed into .
1st
cases, have
all
G.
"-,
D.
^,
-}.
D.
. -.
Sing.
1.
-.
In the 4th form
In the 5th form
it
Plur.
-.
3.
G.
changes
Sing,
D.
-, -, -*, -.
makes the accusative
it
-,
.
G.
D.
G.
G.D.
9.
-, -,
-,
-,
Dual,
8.
G.
2.
in
ow
as,
of the penultima into
as,
D.
&c.
ADJECTIVES.
G.
N.
case
from vg i
In the feminine
10.
as,
or
-, -<
or
syncopated in every
is
-.
PRONOUNS.
.
.,
,
,, ,
and
before every termination of
11. It inserts
Seldomer when
with its compounds G. wmiov, D.
5
av is changed into
particularly in
and its conbut
the compounds
D.
tracted form cbure'ou for
also occur.
;
,'&
,,
removes the augment syllabic and temporal; as,

6 Herodot.
Sometimes the reduplication
sometimes both; as,
only as,
for
and from the pluperfect both augments as,
for
On the contrary it reduplicates the present, imperfect, and both
12.
It
See Rule
On
I.,
Example
1st.
the supposition that

augment of this verb is t.
is
an insertion and not a change of t.
The
240
the
., , ^
DIALECTS.
and
futures
aorists
as,
(Page 74.)
forms the 1st, 2d, and 3d sing, and the 3d plur. of

the imperfect, and both aorists active, by annexing
to the 2d persons singular respectively, dropping the subjunctive vowel in contracts, and shortening the long vowel in
verbs in
13.
,,
It
,
,
,
&&,
,
,
, '-
Common.
Imperf.
1st Aor.
2d Aor.
-, -.
Hence
Ionic.
the
in
-,
and middle
passive
8
}
-,
xov.
-6 .
)
In the first future indicative active of the 4th, and the

future of every conjugation, it inserts
before the three
14.
2d
terminations sing, and 3d plural
also in the infinitive and

into
in the dual and
and
except in the 3d plural and the participle feminine
- - -, -.
-,- -&, -&, -& &, -&,
participle, resolving
plural,
-aLv
->
-, -.
-,
into
Inf.
Part.
In the middle voice it
i
only resolves
and
the latter in the 2d sing, indicative
into
subjunctive into
as,
}
-,
'
-.
,
$
15. In the perfect active

penultima
;
it
&, &.
In the pluperfect active and middle
17.
It
and
resolves y
middle tenses into
in the
and shortens the
syncopates
16.
, into ,
it
changes
2d persons of passive and
in the subjunctive
(Page 88.)
To
the 3d sing, of all tenses active, of the perfect

middle, and of the aorists passive, of the subjunctive mode,
18.
annexes
.
it
7
8
This'
See
as.
augment in the infinitive. Herodot.

more frequently found without the augment;
retains the
form
is
Attic dialect, p. 233.,
Note
to Obs. 20.
as,
'
241
[ONIC DIALECT.
7}.
].
Perf.
Aor.
2d Aor.
1st
20.
1st Aor.
2d Aor.
10
Middle.
Jvtprjat.
Perf.
In the 2d sing, of the 1st aorist middle
19.
into o
sing,
.
.
-.
Passive.
Active.
Pres.
as,
-,
it
resolves
-ao.
In all tenses of the indicative and optative, whose 3d

ends in
or
it forms the 3d plur. by inserting
before those terminations respectively, and, of the next preceding letters, shortening the long vowel, dropping the subjunctive of the diphthong (except in the optative), changing
the smooth mute into the rough, and
into the characteristic
of the 2d aorist,
or & as,
& Perf.
Pres.
Sing.
Imp.
Plur.
& Pluperf. Plur.
'
&
When precedes these terminations, instead of inserting

another a after it, this dialect inserts an
before it as,
.
.
,
,
.
.
,
.,..
, ,. ,
.
:
,,
3d Sing.
In
21.
into
'
3d Plur.
common
as,
with the Doric
3d Sing.
3d Plur.
contracts verbs in
it
22. In the contract tenses of verbs in

it inserts
after
contraction ; as,
lmperat.
but
oftener changes a into

as,
Sometimes in
the present subjunctive passive of barytons ; as,
10
11
&,
See Obs. 22.

Also
Xqto occurs in Hippocrates, the Ionic of /gov, imperative of
for ypaouai.
21
242
&, .
&,-^.
DIALECTS.
always in the aorists; as,

Also in the 3d plur.
of the present indicative of verbs in
and the present
from
and 2d aorist subjunctive of those from
and
in the active
voice ; as,
Sometimes
in the 3d person middle voice
as,
, , , &.
&, & ,
,
.
, ,,. ,,,,
,
,
2d persons passive and middle of
23. It syncopates
in the
verbs in
(Page 110.)
In the 3d plural of the present active of verbs in

from
it inserts a, syncopating the subjunctive vowel of
diphthongs ; as,
24.
,,,
25.
It contracts
, from
into
as,
,,
and
Instead of the regular tenses of

and
those of their primitives
.
It
it
uses
in
He-
as,
&c.
makes
rodotus.
borrow
its
&,
tenses as
if
and
from
&c. occur
WRITERS.
Herodotus, Hippocrates, Arrian, Lucian, Aretceus, Homer,
Hesiod, Theognis, Anacreon.
DORIC DIALECT.
This dialect was used
and Lybia.
It is
first
in
Lacedcemon and Argos
Magna
Grcecia, Sicily, Crete, Rhodes,

seldom used by Attic, but often by Ionic
afterwards in Epirus,
writers and the poets.
PROPERTIES.
Contraction of
diphthongs.
I.
<5
and
,
,
,,
Common.
^,
ol
when
prefixed to vowels and
..
.
.
.
Doric.
*.
,
.
*
,
,
.
,",
.
.
..
,
.*, ,
.
*.
,
.
,
,
,
,
.
.
,
,
,
.
.
^- .
,
,
.
,
.
,
,
.
*
,
.
,
.
,
,
.
,
.
.
,, ,&. ..
243
DORIC DIALECT.
^.
'.
Other contractions
into
>
>
S-,
Change of letter
II.
into
gen.
or syllable
5.
as,
&, ^-, &.
&
0bg %%
by Metathesis
4.
'.
also jEolic.
9.
for
\
,
&,
for
also JEjoUc.
for
f
\
C
1
Words
other
to
which the
When
See
figure
letter.
'
or ^ follows.
in the JEolic
23.
17.
11.
is affixed,
undergo some change of an-
244
DIALECTS.
,
..
,
.
&,.
,
&.
,
.
., .
,,
into
also Ionic.
.
,
.
.
,.
16.
&,
2,
13, 19.
,
.
&,
,
.
,
,.
,
.&,
,
,
.
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
.
.
,
&.
,,.
1 >
16, 17.
2. 22.
24.
%, \\.
14.
Gen.
Accus.
Ace,
3, 24.
12.
18.
III.
.
,.
Syncope of
&
,
., &
&&
Sâaal.
15, 17.
17.
for
Plato says that
OQtttiv
5
was used
dialect.
6
for the ancient
By
and
Attic oqcci,
xaiqovq.
This seems to come from verbs in

another syncope for
&.
made
by the Attic and ionic
245
DORIC DIALECT.
.
.
&.
pen thesis of
a
V
V. Aphceresis of
-e
in
,,.
OBSERVATIONS.
makes
It
1.
16.
20.
the nominative plur. of the article
.
,
F.
/.
DECLENSIONS.
In the 1st
changes
of the
of the genitive singular,
genitive plural, and
Sometimes
of every termination, into .
also the genitive plural of the 2d and 3d
as,
2.
it
-,
^-,
G.
D.
A.
V.
-or,
-a,
-up,
-a.
-a,
-,
-,
-.
N.
Proper names in
3.
after the
D. A.
" ,/
"ft
In
1st
as,
V.
~
-,
as,
G. D.
Sing,
also
changes
-', 8
Plur.
in the
into
It
A.
G.
-, -.
N. A. V. plur. contracted of the 3d

Plur. N. A. V.
4.
-,
it changes ov into
that of the accusasometimes into o, and rejects the c subscript of the
tive plural
It
&,c.
this declension
dative
]^
syncopated, and are declined

N. G.
have
for
G.
or
as,
-.
,..
N. and A.
sing,
, *.
",, , ?
&,
changes into
Gen.
in
nouns in
and
as,

5.
It
of the N. and V. of the 1st and 3d
and
changes
N.
forms reciprocally
genitives in
into
7
as,
V.
N. V.
- -\, -.
as,
'
Third sing. 1st future middle.

This is infrequent.
9 Odys. '. 397.
21 *
8
or
of
all
ov into
246
DIALECTS.
*.
in the genitive sing, of the fourth form; as, G.

the nominative plural into
without the subscript,
genitives into a
This last but seldom.
PRONOUNS.
nom. sing, it annexes ,

penultima of the dual and plural it changes
To
6.
in the
, , .andIn
into a,
Table
all
the
often
accusative for the dual and plural.

end of Dialects, page 255.)
7. In the pronoun of the 2d person it changes
into
annexes
(See Table, page 256.)
uses the
of
of
(See
singular
at the
,.
, and
8. In the 3d personal pronoun, for the accusative

it uses
the accusative of
prefixed
obsolete, with
or
as,
G.
vlv } which often stand not only for , but for
6,
. For the plural dative
and also for the plural
}
-, -,
;
,-,
, .
-,
-, -),
which by aphaeresis becomes
uses the dual

For the plural accusative
it
by metauses the dual

is often used
hence
thesis
As the demonstrative
and
(contracted from
so
for the reflectives
and
are used respectively for
-, in all genders
sometimes for the accusative
-.
singular
it
>
-,
-, -,
In the possessives
it
.
.
changes
into
.
.
.
6g
. \,&, ,,,,
,
, ., .
VERBS.
9.
changes
as,
and
It
10.
It
It
1st aorist
tenses from perfects by changing

10
as,
makes new present
It
the future characteristic of verbs in

as,
pure, into I
changes
of some in
12.
,,
a into
11.
the characteristic of the present into
changes
penultima of the 1st future and

as,
pure into
in the
of verbs in
10
, and
From
nkpor/.a for
247
DORIC DIALECT.
& ,.
13.
in the penultima of the

and pluperfect, into as,
changes
It
aorist perfect
1st
,,
1st
future
and
14.
changes
It
, the
without a subscript
as,
augment formed by annexing
\,
t,
into
\lnov.
,,.
15. It syncopates
in the 2d and 3d persons sing, of the
present indicative active, and in every tense of the infinitive
t,
ending
16.
it
as,
-,
-,
circumflexes the
It
forms
like the
2d
as,
-, -, - -,
in
Act.
Mid.
-, -,
future active
first
and middle, and

-"
^ -, .
>
&, -&, -&, &C.

"
17. It changes
in the first person plural of all tenses
into
indicative and subjunctive active, and of the aorists subjunctive
passive ; also
in the 3d plural, dropping the subjuncinto
,^
,
,
,
&,
,
,
,
,
,
. &, .
, , . ^ ,-,-, ,
.
,
. . .. .
-, - &-,
tive
vowel of the preceding diphthong, except in the futures
as,
13
13
13
13
&C.
13
Pass,
18. It changes
in the penultima of barytons and
into
contracts of the optative active, whose termination
the Attic
had before changed into
as, Attic,
'
Doric,
It also often
and barytons
Imp.
-.
or
-.
changes
of the penultima both of contracts
sometimes into
as, Act.
into
-,
-*
or
Pass, and Midd.
Part,
1st Fut.
Fut.
Particip.
the subjunctive; as,
Imperat.
is
Also
1st
sometimes inserted in
Archimedes.
11
is
13
See Obs. 18, and note to the same,

See Obs. 18.
This person is like the dative plural of the participle of the same
makes it like the dative singular.

future commonly retains the v, if the penultima be not
or ot, but not always.
tense, but the Doric dialect

14
into
The 2d
ft
changed
248
, , &, & , -,
.
,
,
.
DIALECTS.
19.
It
changes into a in most tenses of the indicative and
and middle also of verbs in

ending in
optative, passive
.
as,
&.
20.
It inserts
21.
In the perfect passive of verbs in

it changes
into
as,
future,
in the 1st person plural passive
as,
, making
in the
22. It contracts verbs in

into 77, in common with the
Ionic ; as,
--, ~yv
and changes the
contracted into
-^^
particularly in participles
as,
In the
24.
into
as,
^ &,
,.
23. In verbs in
indicative active into
changes
it
infinitive
as,
it
&,c.
&
-
&
&
&
,, ,
To
as,
sometimes changes
25. It also changes

and
into
junctive of the preceding diphthong ; as,
26.
of the 3d person sing, present
this
form
it
&C.
into a,
and
dropping the sub-
frequently annexes ui
16
These
as,
often occur in
Ionic writers.
PARTICIPLES.
27.
- -.
It inserts
participles
as,
15
iEolic for
16
Sometimes
loss of the subjunctive
after
in the
masculine and feminine of
after the iEolic
manner of compensating the
vowel of the diphthong.
See JEolic
dialect.
,,
DIALECT.
-SIOLIC
249
ac28. It changes via the feminine termination into

cording to some grammarians as,
but they rather belong to present tenses formed
from perfects. See Obs. 10.
;
WRITERS.
Archimedes, Timceus, Pythagoras, Pindar, Theocritus,
Bion, Moschus, Callimachus, and the tragedians in the
choruses.
iEOLIC DIALECT.
This dialect was used in Bozotia, Lesbos, and jEolia in
Asia Minor. It is a branch of the Doric, and has some
changes
common
in
with
it.
PROPERTIES.
& Change
and
of the rough into the smooth breathing

removal of the accent back, as,
I.
%,
, , ,,.
as,
To compensate the loss of the aspirate it sometimes prefixes

as,
, when the next syllable begins with , , , or
to
vowel
which
II.
"
for
as,
by the Ionic dialect
is
^^)
<5 2
&
$>
,
to
for
.
.,
,
.
,
.
.
,
,
.
^
,
,
,.
0
Change of letter
into f Y
sometimes prefixes
by syncope for
Doric for
It
or syllable,
<*9<>.
for
.
.
For
An
, &.
./Eolic resolution
Words
.3
for
C
of <
is
See Rule IV.
~
>
by metathesis
that undergo a complicated change.
< ox
( an
,
,
.
,,
,
3
,
,
,
.
.
,
.
&,
&,
&,
.
,
]
.
,
&.
-, , .
250
DIALECTS.
into
\
-
/,
&,
-
2
added.
&&.
for
-.
hence
! *. ,
,
,
.
(
S
%,. .
*
-&
,
{ .
&, .
, .,
,
*>
.
,
'
______
G.
-,
Ace.
>
-.
,
,
,
&.
,
.
* ',
>.
. ., ,
^.
rp
Prosthesis of
III.
as,
,,,,
instead of the aspirate
same purpose;
IV.
JEolic,
as,
.
, ,.
Epenthesis.
changing
into
,
,
before
for the
as,
Also in other words
whence
II.
It transposes the letters in the syllable
and doubling
as,
'. 411.
*,
Epenthesis of
a in the genitive plur.

in
participles in
also of the
and
are of iEolic extraction, from
In the augment, according to Priscian.
and
subscript.
,
, , , ',
.
&, .
. ,,.&, , , &, &,
,
.
.
,
",
.
,,,
-EOLIC DIALECT.
v after
after
^,
as,
'
251
as,
a consonant to compensate the loss of the aspirate
a consonant
shortened
when
the vowel
as,
or diphthong preceding
is
as,
in futures in
,.
in
V. Syncope of
|,
in
.
VI.
*.
'
also
subscript
as,
Paragoge of
to the accusative sing,
of the 4th form of contracts
as,
OBSERVATIONS.
It
1.
nouns
into ao
changes
into
'
as,
as,
DECLENSIONS.
in the
^,
It
nominative of the first declension of

and
of the genitive sing,
inserts a in the genitive plural of
-
this declension ; as,

and in the
t
accusative plural of those in a and
as,
2. In the dative singular of the 2d it omits the subscript ; as,
of the accusative plural into
and changes
from the
3. In the 1st form of the contracts it rejects
as,
vocative sing, in
4. In the fourth form it makes the genitive sing, in
and
as, G.
the accusative in
It makes of genitive cases a new nominative of another
the
declension from which it forms its cases ; as, of
is the
genitive, it makes a nominative, from which
from
So
and
G.
dative plural.
which has sometimes the
D.
&,c. from the genitive
syncopated.
in the genitive sing, and accusative
into
It changes
of the 1st declension, the nominative
plur. of nouns in a and
sing, of the 2d, the nominative and genitive sing, of the 3d,
nouns of
, &.
,
,, , ,
-, . -.
252
DIALECTS.
.
,
, . ..
the genitive and accusative sing, of the 1st form of the contracts, the genitive of the 2d form, and the accusative plural
of all five
as, 1st, G.
2d,
3d,
G.
Plur.
1st form of
contracts, G.
2d, G.
/,,
;
VERBS.
-,
of the 2d and 3d sing, of the present indicative active, and of the infinitive, into
as,
changes the
It
5.
->
-V,
annexes #a
,.
6.
It
7.
It inserts
as,
changes
It
8.
ccig
2d persons
and
as,
as,
&,
&.
,
&, &&.
,.
,
,
,
,
, ,, ,
,
;
as,
changes dv and
It
in
of the penultima of the perfect passive into
in the infinitive
9.
to the
in futures of the fourth conjugation in
in the infinitive of contracts into
10. It gives many contracts the form of verbs in

both
with and without a reduplication ; as,
Imperf.
hence the third plurals
and participles present
&c.
from
11. It changes
in the present of verbs in
yalcut
into t
as,
from
into , doubling
&, -, -.
.
13.
&.
&-, -, &, &, &,
and
3d
It often
12.
verbs
as,
In
,,
&C.
changes the short into the long vowel

it
makes
the
3d
sing,
the
in these
plural
WRITERS.
AIccbus, Sappho.
BCEOTIC DIALECT.
Under the Molic is comprehended the Bczotic dialect, which
has the following distinct peculiarities
changes
It
into
.
1
The
into
si
for
which the Doric changes into a, the Bceotic does not change
and, on the contrary, what the Bceotic changes into it, the Doric
,?
.
&
,
.
, &, &, .
*
.
?
.
253
BCEOTIC DIALECT.
Perf. Act.
into
S
<
added.
I*
V
1st Aor. Act.
av
OBSERVATIONS.
in the
It inserts
1.
,
,
,
,
,
Common.
And
Baeotic.
in the imperfect of contracts
Common.
.
,.
2.
.
.
.
.
3d plural of the imperfect and both
aorists indicative active.
as,
Bceotic.
It
sometimes makes the 3d plural of the
It
sometimes makes the 3d plural of the perfect
1st aorist in am,
as,
3.
4.
first
5.
It
as,
makes the 2d
-, -.
aorist imperative
In the optative active
it
changes
in
av
as,
active in ov like the
of the 3d plural into
as,
Common.
Boeotic.
\-6v f
L<7t0l
never
Basotic
does not change into a as, t Sv, Doric
Doric. So Hort. Adonidis. Aldus. 1496. p.
Baeotic
but not
But
occurs in Pind. Pyth. Od. iii. v. 13.
209.
2 Some grammarians make this the perfect by changing x into
, others
?,
the 1st aorist, by changing av into aoi.
22
254
POETIC PECULIARITIES.
6. In the 3d plural of both the aorists passive, and of the

imperfect and 2d aorist active of verbs in
it syncopates
shortening the preceding long vowel
as,
,
,
&,
,
&,
.
.
&.
&.
Common.
Bonotic.
'.
',
changes
It
7.
in the
&, ,.,
penultima of verbs in
and uses the Ionic reduplication
as,
from
into
No Writers extant nor would this dialect have been

known, nor the Cretan, Spartan, Macedonian, Tarentine,
Pamphylian, and others, had not writers occasionally introduced them as, in Aristophanes we find a Bazotian woman
;
speaking in her
own
dialect.
Superadded to the use of all the dialects and figures of

orthography and prosody, the POETS have a few peculi-
,,
, , -,
, ..
arities
They make nouns
indeclinable by adding
to the nominative of parisyllabic nouns, and to the genitive of imparisyllabics, rejecting
and
from the terminations ; as,
I.
for
-.
Neuters of the 1st form of the contracts reject

genitive
add
as,
To
as,
G.
only from the

they
the Attic genitive in
for
They form
the dative plural from the singular by chang

and change
as,
or
oiv into ouv in the dative dual.
II.
ing
into
or
,
,,
,,.
In verbs they insert a before a contracted,

if the penultima be long
but
before
penultima be short. Thus
Poet,
III.
before
,
IV.
Poet,
They redouble
position
1
as,
Hence 2d
, -.
letters to
for
aor. act. subjunctive,
-,
if
the
Poet.
make
}
and
a short syllable long by
1st aorist active
-, --
-,
and
also
-toî*,
DIALECTS OF THE PRONOUNS.
,
,
25>
change the quantity of vowels by inserting to form a diphthong as,

Ionice,
po'etice ; and by changing
into
;
for
as,
V.
subjunctive active.
They change bary tons
&* from
&.
into verbs in
>
as,
,-
& , , , , , ~,
&, , , , &, , , , & .
VI.
From
defective
in
regular verbs in
#,
are formed by the poets verbs
/,
'.
Singular.
Doric.
Ionic.
'
G.
Poetic.
jEolic.
Baotic.
j
C
(
(
.
&,
&.
D.
Dual.
.
.
.
G. D.
Plural.
G.
{
aulv
,\
D.
<
.
^
an
256
DIALECTS.
Singular
Ionic.
Doric.
jEolic.
Poetic.
.
&.
G.
&.
&,
.
.
<
\
,,
D.
A.
Dual.
N. A.
G. D.
.
.
Plural.
N.
G.
D.
Singular.
(
G.
\
{
D.
hoi
A.
.
&.
&.
1
and
are both singular and plural, and of
Doric dialect, Obs. 8.
all
genders.
See
257
Dual.
Doric.
Ionic.
N. A.
Poetic.
JEolic.
'
,
,
.
Plural.
N.
G.
D.
\
A.
,
.
ARTICLE .2
Singular*
N.
,
,
G.
D.
A.
Dual.
N. A.
G. D.
N.
,(
G.
D.
\
Plural.
&,
>
A.
The
dialects,
by others
,,
From
P.
Dat.
Dat.
}
used by the Attics for
2
To
,,,
.
.
.
,,
to the relative bg t
belong properly to
,,,
comes regularly the Gen.
>
which by some are annexed
to the relative
P.
?, used
for
D.
Gen.
and
are
every case of the article the Attics add the particles
also yt to the
pronouns
22*
&c.
Plur.
and
ys
258
DIALECTS.
DIALECTS OF THE VERB SUBSTANTIVE
INDICATIVE MODE.
Present Tense.
Dual.
Sing.
Plur.
'*
Vaat.
Movjl.
*.
Imperfect Tense.
.
'
**
'
)
{
&%
D.
iff
Future.
.
(
D.
.
.
<
% .
% .
'
,.
&,.
&, ,
'.
&,
IMPERATIVE MODE.
}
&.
Present Tense.
.
D.
Jjrw
.
OPTATIVE MODE.
Present Tense
P.
1
See
See
syncopated in the Attic dialect, Obs. 27.

syncopated in the Attic dialect, Obs. 27.
DIALECTS OF THE VERB SUBSTANTIVE
DIGAMMA.
259
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
Present Tense.
'.
I.
( (jJVII.
D.
P.
.,,, .
,,
,
INFINITIVE MODE.
Present Tense.
m
I.
D.
&,
&. &.
Future.
D.
P.
PARTICIPLE.
Present Tense.
Future.
P.
DIGAMMA.
The
ancient Greek language had a sound similar to that of

a
or a w, which was called the JEoIic Digamma, because it
remained longest in use among the iEolians, and was denoted by a character resembling two gammas, placed one
above the other, thus, F or f. It was prefixed to several words
beginning with a vowel, which in the more familiar dialect
had the smooth or rough breathing, and was sometimes also
It is supposed
inserted in the middle between two vowels.
that the digamma, which had the force of a consonant, was
more or less frequently employed by Homer in certain words,
of, ,
of which
are some of the most common, but that it
was neglected by the transcribers of his works. Hence the
reason appears why such words so often have a hiatus before
$ ,,
}
them
',
, , ," , , ,
for
as,
^,
"
&
for
and also why they are so rarely preceded by long

vowels or diphthongs shortened as, al
for
and so often by short syllables made long, as if
by position, even where the caesura does not fall upon them;
as,
for
for
^,
ABBREVIATIONS.
,
3
7)
77
ysv
UV
e?
,
QL
&
ii
St
hoc
%>
OT
ok
in
>
iv
i%l
I
sv
*>
5"
seal
cm
vb
'
A TABLE, exhibiting
the pages of the First Edition of the Grammar to

in the Notes appended to the Exercises, and
the corresponding pages of the Second Edition.
which reference
is
made
The
large figures denote those Examples of the Exercises, which have notes referring
to the Grammar; the small figures in the next column show the pages of the First
Edition referred to in the respective notes ; and the small figures in the third column,
the corresponding pages of the Second Edition.
No. of
Examp.
2
3
4
5
Page,
No. of
Page,
Ed.
Page,
2d Ed.
85
103
79
98
69
70
22
26
71
76
62
74
77
63
75
10
10
Page,
2d Ed.
Examp.
60
71.72
26
61
72
64
76
64
65
la
Eel.
27
60
72
72
11
12
110
129
35
40
81
82
83
28
29
61
73
19
22
108
127
11
13
60
72
10
79
31 {
11
66
11
13
66
78
33^
11
12
113
132
32
40
46
22
26
35
37
41
17
20
41
46
79
67
79.80
91
110
11
60
72
30
74
90
36
37
60
72
38)
66
79
72.73
88.89
39 (
40
13
65
76
41
60
72
43
16
17
67
79.80
67
79.80
20
68
80
67
79.80
77
95
24
25
26
f-
78
96
77
95
197
216
62
74
115
134
40
"
43
50
35
40
79
98
108
127
61
73
60
72
117
1J6
79
98
30
34
106
125
61
73
79
98
75
91
63
75
62
74
61
72
75
91
94
62
74
63
75
102
109
128
74
37
41
63
129
61
72
44
35
43
62
74
61
73
62
74
45
41
49
114
133
46
47
49
52
53
55
57
58
105?
63
75
117
136
40
39
46
63
75
42
49
62
74
10
60
72
>
15
17
110
129
72
85
35
40
37
43
42
49
35
43
61
73
11
12
125
62
74
63
75
67
80
116
135
110
129
11
12
37
43
15
17
79
98
61
73
60
68
103
104
35
110
20
Page,
2d Ed.
110
106
85?
48
129
17
84
87
88
89
Page,
Ed.
1st
61
67
21
No. of
Examp.
74
77
7$
79
12
1st
106
108
111
112
115
116
118?
119
121
122
75
91
61
73
110
119
38
63
75
20
34
TABLE TO BE USED WITH THE EXERCISES.
262
No. of
Examp.
122
125
127
133
135
136
140
141
142?
143$
144?
145
<
Page,
Ed.
1st
Page,
2d Ed.
19
22
62
74
63
75
No. of
Examp.
Page,
Ed.
1st
231$
2321
Page,
No. of
2d Ed.
Examp.
19
22
17
21
14
16
417
432
433
19
40
46
234
236
240
17
20
242)
19
22
63
75
245 V
16
19
453
451
61
73
246)
11
12
463
62
74
247
119
138
66
78
61
73
476
19
22
10
10
96
115
485)
61
73
74
90
86
104
60
72
94
113
15
18
19
22
63
75
248
254
255
260
Page,
Ed.
1st
63
75
111
130
62
73
449?
448
Pasfe,
2d Ed.
22
10
10
75
91
15
17
15
17
109
128
<
63
75
117
136
16
19
475?
(
480?
16
19
481
15
17
17
20
15
17
20
23
10
10
486 V
487 S
510?
19
23
512$
'
146?
150
147
154)
156 V
157^
136
117
62
74
15
17
159?
160
163
169
107
123
113
132
21
25
(
>
15
17
183 V
184)
17
20
196
198
199
<
204
205
207 f
209 J
210
214
215
216
63
74
65
15
279 V
285^
19
22
63
75
108
127
85
103
64
76
59
277)
295
298
300
181)
190
193
262
263
268
106
125
109
128
111
130
110
129
106
125
68
80
76
92
301
303
305
316
319
65
66
322
76
78
117
136
94
113
219
115
134
221
22
113
132
77
62
74
17
59
71
61
73^
547
558
560
358
374
384
389
398?
400$
414
1
73
44
52
43
50
588
14
16
15
17
20
23
20
24
14
17
71
19
600 V
60
72
601)
117
136
118
137
65
77
63
75
129
113
132
107
126
19
125
61
16
110
16
106
578?
579$
596?
597$
599)
333
344
19
519
521'
615
623
633
637
639
15
17
65
76
61
73
16
85
103
645
113
132
647$
107
126
661
118
137
108
127
111
130
20
23
107
126
64
CyGQ
667
<;
684?
685$
19
15
18
43
50
20
23
105
124
43
51
15
17
TABLE TO BE USED WITH THE EXERCISES.

No. of
Examp.
689
701
714
756
Page,
Ed.
1st
Pago,
2d Ed.
No. of
Examp.
16
14
761
15
19
266?
12
19
13
14
78
96
61
73
15
18
767
824
868
958
985
Page,
Ed.
1st
Page,
21 Ed.
21
25
20
23
50
58
20
24
15
18
50
58
No. of
Examp.
Page,
Ed.
1st
263
Page,
2d Ed.
1008?
1009 I
1038
1043
1051
10631208
63
74
39
46
32
36
68
80
15
17
85
103
POPULAR
SERIES OF ARITHMETICS,
ADAPTED TO ALL GRADES OF PUPILS;
IN
THREE BOOKS.
BY BENJAMIN GREENLEAF,
A. M.
PRINCIPAL OF BRADFORD (MASS.) TEACHERS* SEMINARY.
IMPROVED STEREOTYPE EDITIONS.

The
publisher invites the attention of Teachers and School
Com-
mittees to this valuable series of Arithmetics, and especially to the
important improvements which have recently been made.
I.
This book, as its

children and -while
;
MENTAL ARITHMETIC.
title
it is
indicates, is strictly mental,

sufficiently simple
and easy
and designed
for
for
"beginners,"
it
advances with gradual steps till it presents to the learner all the Tables
in simple and compound numbers, and many ingenious and practical
questions under them, and also several sections in simple fractions, the
whole being admirably adapted to the capacities of young scholars, and
to prepare them for the next book of the series.
II.
INTRODUCTION TO THE NATIONAL ARITHMETIC.
This book consists of mental and written Arithmetic, " on the Inductive Sststem, combining the Analytic and Synthetic Methods."
The present edition has been thoroughly revised and entirely rewritten, and nearly 150 pages of new matter have been added.
The
following are some of the prominent features of this work.
1. The arrangement is strictly progressive and philosophical, no principle being anticipated.
2. The language is simple, precise, and accurate, rendering the rules,
definitions, and illustrations, intelligible to the pupil.
3. The examples are eminently practical, and adapted not only to
illustrate and fix in the mind the principles which they involve, but also
to interest the pupil, exercise his ingenuity, and inspire a love for the
science.
4. The reasons for the operations have been shown, and the learner is
led to look into the philosophy of the subject, rather than perform mechanically operations which he does not understand.
5. The subject of Cancellation is more fully treated, it is believed,
-B
;;
greenleaf's series of arithmetics.

than in any other work of the kind. The principles upon which it depends, and the different modes of operation are fully developed, and its
application and use are made perfectly clear to the scholar.
G. Several subjects not in the former edition, have been added in this
and Loss, Factors, Progression, Annuities, &c.

and Numeration, Interest, Proportion, Extraction of the Roots, and their application, have been greatly extended and
improved, making the book sufficiently extensive for Common Schools.
7. Questions have been inserted at the bottom of the pages, designed
to direct the attention of teachers and pupils to the most important principles of the science, and fix them in the mind.
as, Ratio, Duties, Profit
and
others, as, Notation
III.
THE NATIONAL ARITHMETIC.
This book is designed more particularly for advanced scholars in our

Public Schools, High Schools, and Academies, and, like the Introduction, combines the Analytic and Synthetic Methods.
It was
revised in 1847, and contains the most valuable modern improvements.
In describing its prominent characteristics it may be remarked,
1. That it is a complete system of itself, comprising all the elementary Rules, as well as those pertaining to the higher branches of the
science, together with a full illustration and demonstration of their
principles, and contains, it is believed, a greater amount and variety of
matter strictly arithmetical, than can be found in any other treatise of
the kind.
2. It embraces a large amount of mercantile information not usually
found in arithmetics, but important to those destined for the warehouse
or counting room.
3. The Custom House business, carefully prepared by officers of the
Boston Custom House, the Philosophical and Geometrical Problems, the
articles on Banking and Exchange, are full, and have passed under the
revision of those who are well acquainted with these respective de-
partments.
Of the entire Series of Arithmetics thus briefly described, we have
ample testimony from many of the most intelligent School Committees and Teachers in New England and elsewhere, that it is better
adapted than any other before the public, to secure to the pupil mental
discipline, thorough knowledge of the principles of the science, and. facility in their application.
The great popularity of Greenleaf's Arithmetic is indicated by the
fact tha.t it is now in general use in the best schools throughout New
England, including the several State Normal Schools, in Massachusetts, in New York City, and in hundreds of academies and select
schools in various sections of the United States.
Two editions of this Arithmetic, one containing the answers in the
book, and the other without them, are now published.
Comflete Keys to the Introduction and National Arithmetics,
containing full solutions and explanations, are prepared for the convenience of teachers only.
Copies of the work will be furnished for examination, on application
Co., 118 Washington Street,
to the Publishers, Robert S. Davis
Carter, Exchange Street, Portland.
Boston, or to Sanborn
&
&
RECOMMENDATIONS OF GREENLEAF'S ARITHMETIC.

The attention of Teachers and Superintendents of Schools, is respectively invited
popular si/stem of Arithmetic, which is well adapted to all classes of students.
05^" Copies of the work furnished for examination, on application to the Publisher.
To those who have not had an opportunity to examine the work, the following testimonials from eminent teachers, indicating some of its peculiar excellences, are submitted:
to this
Phillips Academy, Andover, May 15, 184G.

" National Arithmetic " has been used as a text book in this Institution for
6everal years.
had previously made trial of several different systems, and the
comparison has satisfied us that your work possesses decided advantages over ail
others now in use.
One of the peculiar excellences of your book is, that the examples are so constructed and diversified as to exhaust the subject. It would be almost impossible for
a pupil to pei-form your examples in course, and remain ignorant of any of' the
important principles of the science. Your work is also happily adapted to accom
There are
plish a still higher and more important object,
mental discipline.
various other points to which I might allude, as the originality of your examples,
their practical character, &c.
but the crowning excellence of your'system is, that
it works well in the school-room.
have used your " Introductory Arithmetic " in our preparatory department
for the last two years, and find it to possess substantially the same valuable qualitier
W. H. Wells,
that characterize the larger work.
Instructor in English, Department.
B. Greenleaf, Esq.
Yonr
We
We
formerly a
Esq., Principal of Framingham Academy
Teacher in one of the Public Schools, Boston.
After giving Greenleaf 's Arithmetic and Introduction a pretty thorough examinaThe
tion, I concluded to give them a ti-ial; and it has been attended with success.
definitions and rules, both in the National Arithmetic and Introduction, are stated
with admirable clearness. A feature of these works, which pleases me much, is the
selection of such examples as fully illustrate the principles, and teach a skilful application of the rides of arithmetic.
The "Mental Arithmetic " by the same author, is
well arranged and perspicuous, and goes so far as to prepare the pupil to enter with
ease the next work of the series. I particularly like the tables, and the application
of them in the latter part of the book. In publishing all the works of this author,
I feel that you are doing good service to the cause of education.
Framingham, Jidy 3, 1845.
Marshall Conant.
From Marshall Conant,
The Mental, Introductory, and National Arithmetics, by Mr. Greenleaf, have been
for some time used in the school under my charge
so that, from experience I can
speak freely of their merits. The rules are given in clear and precise language
illustrated where necessary by examples
and furnished with so many questions,
skilfully varied, as to render it impossible for any one, after fairly going through the
series, to be without a competent knowledge of the subject.
These observations apply particularly to the National Arithmetic. Its efficiency
is acknowledged wherever it has been used.
During the last six years I have had
scholars in every stage of progress, and I have invariably found that it furnished all
the information which they desired, while by its systematic arrangement the principles of the science were acquired with pleasure and facility. It is superior, in my
;
opinion, to
any work now before the
Marblehead, April
public.
James
B.
Batcheller,
Principal of Centre SchooL
11, 1S46.
After a careful examination of Greenleaf's Arithmetic, and comparing it with a

library of Arithmetics which I am fortunate enough to possess, I am prepared to
say, that as a practical and scientific work, it is the best I have seen ; and I can but
regard it only as a valuable acquisition to this department of education. The peculiar excellences of the work, consist in the clearness of its arrangement and the
omission of a mass of explanation, tending to confuse the pupil, and to defeat what
It is a
I regard as one great object of education, the learning of the young to think.
work which should be introduced into all our schools, and I am persuaded that
when its merits become known, it will supersede many works of more extensive
Having felt that an arithmetic prepared for the
circulation, but of far less merit.
higher schools, and at the same time adapted to the comprehension of very young
pupils, was a great desideratum, I have for a long time desired to see such a work
school.
Moses Woolson,
as this which I have now in use in
Bangor, Me., June 15th, 1844.
Principal oftlie Female High SehooL
my
RECOMMENDATIONS OF GREEELEAE'S ARITHMETIC.

After a
of several months, Greenleaf 's Arithmetics have been adopted as textmy department of instruction. The general arrangement of
the introduction of several of the old modes of working problems omitted by so many
of the present time, the numerous examples, the clearness and perspicuity of the
rules, and the placing of the answers with the sums, are among the advantages possessed by those works, which in
view justly entitle them to preference.
New York, January 24, 1844.
Wm. Taylor A. M.,
Instructor in Natural Philosophy and Mathematics, Washington Institute.
books
trial
for the classes in
my
Having had occasion to examine the several treatises upon Arithmetic used in our
and to select from them one for the use of the pupils of the Commer
Department of the University Grammar School, I found Emerson's 3d part and
befit schools,
cial
Greenleaf 's National Arithmetic to possess apparently about equal degrees of merit.
After having taken several large classes through Emerson's, and several others
through Greenleaf's, I have adopted the latter as the permanent ai'ithmetic of my
school.
Isaac G. Hubbs, Commercial and Collegiate School.
New
York, April 9, 1844.
After a careful and rigid examination of Greenleaf's Arithmetic, I do not hesitate

to say that it is the very best work of the kind extant.
I have introduced it into my
school, and am delighted with the apparent satisfaction displayed by my pupils.
W. King, Classical and English School, 639 Broadway.
New
York, October 2,1843.
have carefully examined Greenleaf's Introduction and National Arithmetic.

They are, in my opinion, better adapted to the purposes of teaching than any other
books in this department of science with which I am acquainted. I prefer them to
Emerson's series, which I have used during the last eight years, and I have therefore
introduced them into my school.
Chas. W. Feeks, 649 Broadway,
Y.
New York, October 4, 1843.
Classical and English School.
I
I have examined with great care and attention " Greenleaf's National Arithme
and have no hesitation in saying, that I think it excels every other work of th*
kind with which I am acquainted. I have accordingly introduced it into " All Saints'
Parochial School," and most cheerfully recommend it to others of my profession.
Wm. A. Taylor, Principal of All Saints' Parochial School.
tic,"
New
York, October 31, 1843.
B. Greenleaf, Esq. Dear Sir I thank you most heartily for the " National Arithmetic " you presented me some time ago. After a thorough and practical examina:
tion of the work, I can truly say it pleases me more than any I have ever used.
The youngest scholars are interested, and love to study it the oldest give evidence
of a clearer and better understanding of the subject than they have ever shown before.
Having introduced it into my own school, I would cheerfully recommend it
Yours, very truly,
John Jay Greenough.
to others.
New York, September 12, 1843.
;
have not only examined Greenleaf's National Arithmetic
faithfully,
but
have
tested its value by use ; and I do unhesitatingly pronounce it the best text-book of
notice, during
entire school-room experience.
the kind, that has fallen under
'
Joseph McKee,
I shall, hereafter, use no other.
Classical and English Teacher, Madame Chegaray^s School.
Union Square, Neiv York, July, 1844.
my
my
An attentive examination of Greenleaf's National Arithmetic and the Introduction thereto, has confirmed the favorable opinion I had previously formed from reThe rules, simply yet accurately expresssed, the lucid illustrations and
port.
copious examples, in fact, the entire arrangement, show them to be works of no ordinary merit, and indicate that they have been prepared by one who is a complete
master of the science. I have not the slightest hesitation in giving them a decided
preference to any works of the kind I have hitherto seen.
M. J. O'Donnell, Principal of Public School, No. 11.
York, November 22, 1844.
New
I have examined, with some care, Mr. Greenleaf's Arithmetic, and, by that examination, imperfect as it was, am forced to the conclusion, that on several accounts, it
is preferable to most, if not all other works on that subject, that I have seen.
James N. McElligott, Principal of the Mechanic Society School.
York, January, 1844.
New
;;
RECOMMENDATIONS OF GREENLEAF'S ARITHMETIC.

Gree.vle.af's National Arithmetic is now used as a text-book in the following important seminaries of learning, among others, which fact may be considered a
high recommendation for the work.
The several State Normal Schools in Massachusetts, under the direction
of the State Board of Education.
The Normal Schoots in New York City Rutger's Female Institute, New York
Brooklyn (. Y.) Female Academy; Abbott Female Academy, and Phillips Academy, Andover; Chauncey Hall School, Boston; Bradford Female Seminary, (Mass.)
Miss Hasseltine, Principal Phillips Academy, Exeter the Young Ladies' Iusti
tute, Pittsfield
Williams Academy, Stockbridge Worcester County High School,
Worcester Catholic College, Worcester Wesleyan Academy, Wilbraham Amherst
Academy Quaboag Seminary, Warren Framingham Academy; Hingham Acade
my Portland Academy Peirce Academy, Middleborough Partridge Academy,
Duxbury Lowell Academy Bristol Academy, Taunton New Bedford Academy ;
Putnam High School, Newburyport.;
Rev. D. Leach's Select School, Roxbury
Friends' Academy, Providence; Kimball 'Union Academy, Meriden, (N. EL;) Pembroke Academy New Hampton Academy Keene Academy Hillsboro' Academy
Mount Caesar Seminary; Belfast Academy; Thetford Academy; Caledonia County
Grammar School the* High Schools or Academies in Woodstock, Middlebury, Rutland, Montpelier, Burlington, Bradford, and many other towns in Vt.
the High
Schools in Hailowell, Augusta, Waterville and Bangor, and many other distinguished institutions in various parts of the United States and wherever the work
has been introduced, it is still used with great success,
which is deemed a sufficient
O^
recommendation.
The whole or a part of this series, has been recommended and adopted by the
superintending school committees of the principal towns throughout New England,
including Andover, Haverhill, Newburyport, Salem, Beverly, Lynn, Portsmouth,
Worcester, Springfield, Northampton, Pittsfield, Taunton, Fall River, Pawtucket,
Bristol, Marblehead, Duxbury, Kingston, Plymouth, Weymouth, Hingham, Milton,
Barnstable, Ipswich, Danvers, Brookline, Newton, Watertown, Medford, Quincy,
Dedham, Nashua, Manchester, Concord, Fitzwilliam, Keene, Portland, BangoV,
Belfast, Hailowell, Augusta, Waterville, Hartford, Norwich, and in the best public
and private schools in various sections of the United States.
Greenleaf's Arithmetics
mies (including the following) in
Washington
are used in
New York
most of the Select Schools and Acadewhich are of the first grade.
City,
&
T. D.
T. W. Porter, Principals.
Charles E. West,
Principal.
"
Rev. J. J. Owen,
Institute,
Rutger's Female Institute,

Cornelius Institute,
All Saints'' Parochial School,
Wm.
Commercial and Collegiate School,

Classical, Mathematical, and Com' I histitutwn,
Classical and English School,
New York Institute,
Trijiity School,
A. Taylor,
Hubbs
&
Clarke,
Peugnet,
Isaac F. Bragg,
Charles Lyon,
E. H. Jenny,
William Morris,
Madame Chegaray,
Day School for Young Ladies,
Mechanics' Institute School,
Mr. Tracy,
English and Classical School,
Aaron Rand,
Classical, Mathematical, and English Academy," J. F. Worth,
Select School for Boys,
J.J. Greenough,
Taylor & Foignet,
Classical, French, and English Scliool,
Robert H. Browne,
Scotch Presbyterian School,
J. B. Quick,
City Commercial School,
E. L. Avery,
Academy for Young Gentlemen,
J. Fanning & H. Cady,
Commercial and Collegiate Institute,
St. Luke's School,
George A. Rogers,
Mrs. Page,
Female Academy,
Boarding and
Classical a?id English School,
James Larson,
Brooklyn Female Academy,

Select School for Young Ladies, (Brooklyn.)
Collegiate and Commercial School, (Brooklyn,)
Brooklyn Grammar School,
A. Crittenden,
A. Greenleaf,
James G.
Russell,
Walter Chisholm,
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
''
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
D^=-This system of Arithmetic is also the text book in the "Normal Schools^
male and female.) under the supervision of the Public School Society, and in the
SchooL in the City of New York, and in various parts of the State.
Ward
12
NEW ELOCUTIONARY WORKS,

PUELISHED BY
ROBERT
DAVIS, BOSTON.
S.
THE PRACTICAL ELOCUTIONIST. Fourth Edition.

THE NATIONAL SPEAKER. Tenth Ed. 12mo. pp. 360.
Since the first edition of the above works was issued, a few months
ago, they have met with a very favorable reception, and one or both
have been adopted as text-books by School Committees or teachers in
Roxbury, Cambridge, Charlestown, Salem, Lowell, Springfield, and in

several other important places.
RECOMMENDATIONS.
From
Rev.
Thomas
Hill, A.
./If.,
Member of
the
School
Committee,
Waltham, Mass.
As
looked over the " Practical Elocutionist" of Mr. Maglathlin,
my
old Whateleian prejudices against rules for utterance vanish.

The .practical, intelligible, and valuable nature of the rules in this little
book makes it the only thing I have ever seen which I thought would
help either teacher or scholar in our common schools in learning to
read well.
found
From
Levi Reed, Principal of the Washington School, Roxbury, Mass.,

and President of the Norfolk County Teachers' Association.
I have examined "The Practical Elocutionist" with much satisfacA brief
tion, and am happy to say that I like its plan and matter.
manual of vocal culture, like this, has been much needed, and I have
no doubt, that, in the hands of a skilful teacher, it may be used with
the happiest results.
From C. C. Chase, A. M.,

I know of no work on
highly
Principal of the High School, Loicell, Mass.

the subject of Elocution which I can more
recommend than " The
From W.
a The
Practical Elocutionist."
A. H. Wait, Preceptress, of MelB. Wait, Principal, and

rose Academy, near Boston, Mass.
Practical Elocutionist " is, as it should be, brief; but being,
throughout, definite, lucid, and thoroughly practical, it is abundantly

full and comprehensive.
It seems to us exactly adapted to supply our
public schools and academies with what many excellent teachers have
hitherto regarded as a great desideratum.
Having introduced it into
the institution under our charge, and had opportunity to test its merits
by actual use, we are prepared to give the work our highest commendation.
RECOMMENDATIONS.
From Edwin W. Bartlett, A. M., Principal of the High
School, Wo*
burn, Mass.
Having
carefully
state, that
it
examined " The National Speaker,"
appears to
me most
admirably adapted
am happy
to the
to
purposes in-
different parts of the work are well arranged, and the selections show that they have been very judiciously made.
The elocutionary analysis is evidently the result of much labor, being
It seems to contain all the necessary rules
concise, definite, and clear.
for good reading and speaking, illustrated by most appropriate examples.
tended.
The
In short,
am much
pleased with the whole work.
From Franklin Crosby, A. M., Principal of
the
High
School, South
Reading, Mass.
The arrangements and selections of " The National Speaker " are
such as to commend it to all who are interested in elocution as a branch
of school studies.
An " Elocutionary Analysis " is certainly a new feature in an American compilation. In my opinion, the selections are admirably adapted
While a
to insure that variety so necessary in a work of this nature.
few of the most legible of the ancient landmarks are allowed to remain,
I am glad to see that a desire for a change imparts to this book that
.freshness of matter so essential to success.
Pearl, A. M., Principal of the College Street Female Seminary, New Haven, Ct.
have examined with much pleasure "The National Speaker," and
From
I
J.
am
pleased with the arrangement, and the selection of its pieces ; I

think the elocutionary analysis better adapted to promote correct enunciation and articulation than any work of the kind with which I am
acquainted.
From Charles R. Coburn,

Teachers' Association,
Esq., President of the
New York
and Teacher in Oswego Academy,
State
Y.
Sir, I am highly pleased with your

Mr. Henry B. MagJathlin,
works on elocution. They seem to be just such books as are required
by every person who is engaged in teaching the elements of good reading and speaking.
The "Elocutionist" contains what its title indicates, "the principles
of elocution rendered easy and comprehensive," and is eminently prac-
Notwithstanding its
National Speaker
embrace a suitable variety
them being taken from late
America.
tical.
"
The
brevity, I think it sufficiently full.

" is well arranged, and the selections, which
of style, are judiciously made; the most of
eminent writers and speakers in Europe and
From George Spencer, A.
M., Author of Latin Lessons, and Principal

Y.
of Utica Academy,
I have examined " The National Speaker " with some care, and an
pleased with it. Its "principles of elocution" are such as are sanctioned by nature and the most correct usage, and are expressed in clear
and simple language. It will fully meet the want I have felt of a
similar work for my classes in this branch of study.
Robert S. Davis* Publications.

LEVERETT'S CESAR AND FOLSOiM's CICERO.
LEVERETT'S CtESAR'S COMMENTARIES.
Caii Julii Cjb-
Commentarii de Bello Gallico ad Codices Parisinos recensiti,

a N. L. Achaintre et
E. Lemaire. Accesserunt Notulae Anglicae, atque Index Historicus et Geographicus.
Curavit F. P.
saris
Leverett.
From John
J.
Editio stereotypa.
Owen, Principal of Cornelms
Institute,
New
York, and Editor
of Xenophon's Anabasis.
I have examined with some attention Caesar's Commentaries, edited by
Leverett, and Cicero's Orations, edited by Folsom, and am happy to recommend them to classical teachers, as being, in my estimation, far superior to
any other editions of those works, to which students in this country have
general access. The typography is fair and accurate, and the general appearance of the books does honor to the enterprising publisher. I hope these
editions will be extensively used in our Academies and High Schools.
(Signed) John J. Owen, Cornelius Institute.
New York, Nov. 22, 1843.
The neatness and accuracy

I have attentively perused Leverett's Caesar.
of the Text, and the beautiful adaptation of the Notes, compel me to use it in
preference to any other that I have seen.
(Signed)
H. Jenny, Principal of New York Institute.
FOLSOM'S CICERO'S ORATIONS. M.

Quaedam
In
Selectae, Notis illustratae.
Usum Academies
Exoniensis.
T. Ciceronis Orationea
[By Charles Folsom, A. M.]

Editio stereotypa, Tabulis Ana
lyticis instructa.
Charles E. West, Principal of Rutgers Female Institute, New York.

take pleasure in commending to teachers the recent beautiful edition of
Folsom's Cicero. The attractiveness of its text, notes, synoptical and analytical tables, and typographical execution, led me to place it in the hands of
a class of young ladies, who are reading it with delight.
(Signed) Charles E. West, Principal of R. F. I.
From
I
New
York, Nov.
1,
1843.
I have examined Cicero's Orations, edited by Charles

The Synopsis and Analysis
it to any other 1 have seen.
bo beautifully given, that it

learning Latin. I shall use
(Signed)
Folsom, and prefer
of each Oration are

as a Rhetoric, as well as a Text Book for
exclusively in the institution under my charge.
seems
it
H. Jenny, Principal of New York
Institute
I have carefully examined the recent editions of Leverett's Ceesar, and

Folsom's Cicero, and fully concur in the opinions above expressed.
(Signed) Wm. A. Taylor, Principal of All Saints Parochial School
New York, Nov. 1843.
These editions of Ccesar and Cicero are highly recommended by the following
who have recently adopted them, in preference to all others.
New York.
Isaac F. Bragg, Principal of Male High School,
u
"
" English and Classical School,
C. Tracy,
"
" Female Classical School,
"
B. F. Parsons,
"
Brooklyn.
"
Lyceum,
W. Marsh,
Teachers,
Robert S. Davis'' Publications.

FISK'S
GREEK GRAMMAR, AND EXERCISES.
A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE,

Franklin Fisk.
by Benjamin
Twenty-sixth stereotype edition.
Manual of Grammar, are simplicity and lucidness of
The requisites in a
arrangement, condensation of thought, and accuracy of principle and expresThese requisites Mr. Fisk appears to have attained in a considerable
degree in his Greek Grammar, of which we have expressed approbation by
introducing it into our School.
Forrest and Wyckoff, Principals of Collegiate School, New York City.
New York, October 3d, 1845.
sion.
have used for several years Fisk's Greek Grammar, and I regard it among
the best, and perhaps the nest, now used in our Schools. Pupils instructed in
it, encounter less difficulty than in others.
E. H. Jenny, A. M.,
New York, October, 1843.
Principal of" New York Institute."
Mr. R. S. Davis,
I have examined Fisk's Greek Grammar, published by
yourself.
To all who will take the trouble to examine it, its own intrinsic
merit will be its best recommendation. The Syntax I regard as decidedly
superior. The rules are peculiarly clear and comprehensive, thereby relieving
the student from a heavy tax upon his time and memory, to which he would
otherwise be subjected, and from which, perhaps, he is not equally free in the
use of any other work of the kind.
C. Tracy, Principal of Select English and Classical School.
New York City, October 28th, 1843.
From Benjamin Greenleaf, Esq., author of the National Arithmetic, etc.

Bradford, (Mass.,) Teacher's Seminary, October 16th, 1843.
For several
years past, I have used Fisk's Greek Grammar in my seminary. I consider it
are
It is well arranged ; and the rules
clear and pera work of superior merit.
spicuous. It is, in my opinion, better adapted to initiate pupils into the idiom
of the Greek language, than any other treatise of the kind, that I have examined. Fisk's Greek Exercises should be used in connexion with the
Grammar. A work of this kind has long been needed. It is a production of
great merit.
Yours respectfully, Benjamin Greenleaf.
Recommendations fully concurring with
from
the
following gentlemen, among
the above opinions,
many
others,
have
who have
beei. received
recently adopted
Grammar in preference to any other.

New York.
Isaac F. Bragg,
Principal of Male High School,
"
"
" Mechanics' Society School,
James N. McElligott,
"
"
"
Parochial
School,
Wm. A. Taylor,
All Saints
"
"
" the New England School,
Moore and Fish,
"
"
" Classical and English School,
Charles W. Feeks,
"
"
"
"
Washington King,
"
"
" Select School,
J. Jay Greenough,
this
Fisk's Greek Grammar is tised in Harvard university, and in man^

other Collegiate and Academic Institutions, in various parts of the United States.
GREEK
EXERCISES. Greek Exercises; containing

the substance of the Greek Syntax, illustrated by Passages from
the best Greek Authors, to be written out from the words given in
" Consuetudo
their simplest form ; by Benamin Franklin Fisk.
FISK'S
maxime
Grammar."
et exercitatio facilitatem
the Author's " Greek
Quintil.
Adapted
to
Sixteenth stereotype edition.
Greek Exercises are well adapted to illustrate the rules of the Gra:rand constitute a very useful accompaniment thereto.
J. B. Kidder, Teacher of Select School, New York.
(Signea)
Fisk's
*ar,
parit."
1
Robert S. Davis Publications.
smith's class book of anatomy.
ANATOMY,
THE CLASS BOOK
explanatory of the first

OF
principles of Human Organization, as the basis of Physical Education ; with numerous Illustrations, a full Glossary, or explanation
of technical terms, and practical Questions at the bottom of the
pase. By J. V. C. Smith, M. D., formerly Professor of General
Anatomy and Physiology in the Berkshire Medical Institution.
Seventh,lmproved Stereotype Edition.
ljr This work has received the highest testimonials of approbation from
the most respectable sources, and has already been adopted as a text book in
many schools and colleges in various sections of the United States.

The estimation in which it is held in other countries may be inferred from
the fact, that a translation of it has recently been made into the Italian language, at Palermo, under the supervision of the celebrated Dr. Placido Portel.
also in the progress of translation into the Hawaiian language, by the
American missionaries at the Sandwich Islands, to be used in the higher
schools, among the natives ; and the plates are soon to be forwarded, with
.eference to that object, by the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign
Missions ; which furnishes conclusive evidence of its value and utility.
It is
From Rev. Hubbard
Winslow, Pastor ofBowdoin
St.
Churchy Boston.
Boston, Nov.
7,
1836.
have examined the Class Book of Anatomy, by Dr. Smith, with very great
For comprehensiveness, precision, and philosophical arrangement, it is surpassed by no book of the kind which I have ever seen. The
study of Anatomy and Physiology, to some extent, is exceedingly interesting
and useful as a branch of common education and it is to be desired that it
should be more extensively adopted in all our higher schools. To secure this
end, there is no other book before the public so wll prepared as the one under
remark. It is also a convenient compend to lie upon the table of the scientific
anatomist and physician, and a very valuable family book for reference, and
for explanation of terms which often occur in reading.
I
satisfaction.
ow
We are
gratified to see the attempt to introduce a new subject to ordinary

It is wonderful that civilized man has been so long willing to
students.
remain ignorant of the residence of his mind, and the instruments by which it
operates^ The book before us abounds in information in which every adult
reader will feel a deep interest, and from which all may derive valuab'e lesare gratified to see frequent references to the
sons of a practical kind.
cordially wish success to his ente
Great First Cause of life and motion.
We
We
prise in a path almost untrodden.
American Annals of Education.
Copy of a Communication from Mr. C. H.
Allen,
of
the Franklin Acade~i'
Andover, Mass.
North Andover, Dec. 10, 1835.

Mr. R. S. Davis. Dear Sir During my vacation. I have had time to examine Smith's Class Book of Anatomy, the second edition of which you have
I do not hesitate to speak of it as the very work which
recently published.
It contains knowledge which should be
the public have long demanded.
author is remarkably clear in h v sxânations and desThe
diffused.
widely
Jbo that he has rendered
criptions, and very systematic in his arrangement.
his neglected branch of useful knowledge highly interesting to all classes.
Yours, respectful
Chas# h< a
:
PARKER'S EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION.

great popularity of this work has given it an introduction into
almost every Academy and higher Seminary throughout the United
and its usefulness, as an aid
States, England, and the British Provinces
in teaching this important branch of education; has been acknowledged
by hundreds of eminent teachers who have used it.
The School Committee of Boston authorized its introduction into the
public schools of the city, soon after the first edition was issued, and it is
now the only work on Composition used in them.
The publisher trusts that the improvements contained in the present
edition will render the work more acceptable, and give it a still wider
The
circulation.
The following recommendations have been selected from a

number of valuable notices from the most respectable sources
From
J.
W.
large
Buikley, Esq., Teacher, Albany.
I have examined " Parker's Exercises in Composition," and am delighted with the work.
I have often felt the want of just that kind of aid that is here afforded. The use of this book
will diminish the labor of the teacher, and facilitate the progress of the pupil in a study that
has hitherto been attended with many trials to the teacher, and perplexities to the learner.
If Mr. Parker has not strewed the path of the student with flowers, he has " removed many
stumbling-blocks out of the way, made crooked things straight, and rough places smooth."
It is certainly one of the happiest efforts that I have ever seen in this department of letters,
affording to the student a beautiful introduction to the most important principles and rules
of rhetoric ; and I would add, that if carefully studied, it will afford a " sure guide " to written
composition. I shall use
influence to secure its introduction to all our schools.
my
From, Rev. Samuel P. Neivman, Professor of Rhetoric in Bowdoin College.

I have examined " Progressive Exercises in English Composition," by R. G. Parker, with
care, and hesitate not to express an opinion that it is well adapted to the purpose for
It is well fitted to call into exercise the ingenuity of the pupil, to
it is designed.
acquaint him with the more important principles and rules of rhetoric, and to guide and aid
his first attempts in the difficult work of composition.
much
which
From Walter R. Johnson, Esq., Franklin Institute, Philadelphia.

Having often felt the necessity of reducing to its simple elements the art of composition,
and having been compelled, from the want of regular treatises, to employ graduated exercises
expressly prepared for the purpose, and similar in many respects to those contained in this
treatise, I can speak with confidence of their utility, and do not hesitate to recommend them
to the attention of teachers.
From Dr. Fox,
Principal of the Boylston School, Boston.
This little manual, by the simplicity of its arrangement, is calculated to destroy the repugnance, and to remove the obstacles, which exist in the minds of young scholars to performing
the task of composition. I think this work will be found a valuable auxiliary to facilitate theprogress of the scholar,
From Mr.
and
lighten the labor of the teacher.
C. Walker, Principal
of the Eliot School Boston.
is evidently the production of a thorough and practical teacher, and in my opindoes the author much credit. By such a work, all the difficulties and discouragements
which the pupil has to encounter, in his first attempts to write, are in a great measure
removed; and he is led on progressively, in a methodical and philosophical manner, till he can
express his ideas on any subject which circumstances or occasion may require, not only with
sufficient distinctness and accuracy, but even with elegance and propriety. An elementary
treatise on composition, like the one before me, is certainly much wanted at the present day.
I think this work will have an extensive circulation ; and I hope the time is not distant, when
this branch of education, hitherto much neglected, will receive that attention which in some
degree its importance demands.
This work
ion
it
We have
the pupil.
seen no work which seems to us so useful as a guide to the teacher, and an aid to
American Annals of Education and Instruction.
of this work is unexcepfionably good. By a series of progressive exercises, the

is conducted from the formation of easy sentences to the more difficult and complex
arrangement of words and ideas. ~He is, step by step, initiated into the rhetorical propriety
of the language, and furnished with directions and models for analyzing, classifying, and
writing down his thoughts in a distinct and comprehensive manner.
London Journal of
Education.
The design
scholar
Published by ROBERT S. DAVIS, School-Book Publisher, No.

118 Washington Street, Boston, and sold by the Booksellers in all the
principal cities and towns throughout the United States.
Jay~
ROBERT S. DAVIS & CO.,
PUBLISHERS AND BOOKSELLERS,
NO.
Have
118
WASHINGTON-STREET, BOSTON,
assortment of the Text Books used in the Common

Schools, Academies, and Colleges in the United States, together with a variety
of Books in the various departments of Literature and Science.
Also, Stationery,
for sale a large
including Paper, Steel Pens, Ink, Blank Account Books of all sizes and qualities.
[CT Booksellers, Country Merchants, School Committees, and Teachers, supAll orders promptly and faithfully attended to.
plied at the lowest cash prices.
Among their publications are the following valuable SCHOOL BOOKS, which
are extensively used throughout the United States, viz.
^
GREENLEAF'S SERIES OF MATHEMATICS.

MENTAL ARITHMETIC, upon the Inductive Plan designed for Primary
1.
and Intermediate Schools.
Revised and enlarged edition. 144 pp.
INTRODUCTION TO THE NATIONAL ARITHMETIC or, COMMON

SCHOOL ARITHMETIC. Improved stereotype edition. 324 pp.
3. THE NATIONAL ARITHMETIC, for advanced scholars in Common
2.
Schools and Academies.
Improved stereotype
edition.
360 pp.
COMPLETE KEYS TO THE INTRODUCTION, AND NATIONAL ARITHMETIC,
containing Solutions and Explanations, for Teachers only.
PRACTICAL ALGEBRA, for Academies and High Schools, and for

Common Schools. New edition, revised and stereotyped.
4.
advanced Students in
KEY TO THE PRACTICAL ALGEBRA,

Solutions
and Explanations,
for
containing the Answers, and
full
Teachers only.
PARKER'S PROGRESSIVE EXERCISES IN ENGLISH

COMPOSITION.
New
Stereotype Edition, revised, enlarged, and improved, from the fifty-fifth

144 pp. 12mo, morocco back. [A text-book in all the principal AcadHigh Schools in the United States.]
and
emies
edition.
CLASS BOOK OF PROSE
AND POETRY;
Consisting of Selections from the best English and American Authors, designed
as Exercises in Parsing ; for Common Schools and Academies. By Truman Rickard, A. M., and Hiram Orcutt, A. M. (Teachers.) New stereotype edition, enlarged
and improved. 144 pp. Half morocco.
THE NATIONAL SPEAKER;

Containing Exercises, original and selected, in Prose, Poetry, and Dialogue,
Declamation and Recitation and an Elocutionary Analysis, exhibiting a clear
explanation of principles, with rules for each element of Oral Expression, pracBy Henry B. Maglathlin,
tically illustrated in a systematic course of lessons.
Tenth edition, revised and enlarged. 360 pp. 12mo. [A new and popA. M.
ular work, used either as a Rhetorical Reader, or Speaker.]
for
FISK'S
By
~pp.nj a.nnin
GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE.
Franklin Fisk.
FISK'S
Thirty-eighth stereotype edition.
GREEK EXERCISES.
Greek Exercises, containing the substance of the Greek Syntax, illustrated by

Passages from the best Greek Authors, to be written out from the words given
in their simplest forms. Adapted to the Author's " Greek Grammar."
LEVERETT'S CESAR'S COMMENTARIES.

Caii Julii Cajsaris Commentarh de Bello Gallico ad Codices Parisinos recensiti,
a N. L. Achaintre et N. E. Lemaire. Access,erunt Notulae Anglicae, atque Index
Historicus et Geographicus. Curavit P. P. Leverett, A. M., Editor Latinitatis
Lexicon, etc.
FOLSOM'S CICERO'S ORATIONS.

T. Ciceronis Orationes
Polsom, A. M.]
In
Analyticis instructa.
Usum
Quaedam
[By Charles
illustratse.
Editio stereotypa, Tabulis
Selectas, Notis
Academies Exoniensis.
Deacidified using the Bookkeeper

process
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium
Oxide
Treatment Date: July 2006
PreservationTechnologies
A
WORLD LEADER
IN
PAPER PRESERVATION
1 1
1 Thomson Park Drive
Cranberry Township, PA 16066
(724) 779-21 11

Franklin Grammar of Greek

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Franklin Grammar of Greek

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

*%*

Entered according to Act of Congress,

in the year 1830,

Benjamin Franklin Fisk,

Court of the District of Massachusetts.

The requisites in a Manual of Grammar, are simplicity and lucidness of

E. H. Jenny, A. M., Principal of"

I have examined Fisk's Greek Grammar, published by

City, October 28th, 1843.

Recommendations fully concurring with

the above opinions,

have been received

Moore and Fish,

and English School,

Greenleaf, Esq., author of the National Arithmetic,

PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION.

the Greek language.

Those most esteemed for copiousness

and methodical arrangement,

important matter, or by the incommodious disposition

and defective exemplification of what they contain.

With the hope of remedying these

faults the following

vork was undertaken, the extreme difficulty of which the

compiler was by no means aware of; but he soon discovered

Greek language, and whatever

published to elucidate them, no one could be qualified to

and accurate system of

wherein the rules and observations should be properly exemplified,

importance attached to them

and accordingly, with a labor to be appreciated by those

are conversant with such studies (to say nothing

impediments of no ordinary character), he

collected and perused every

any thing of service

work which seemed

In particular he read over

more popular Greek

most of them many times, especially those from

as also their different

having constant recourse to the invaluable lexicons

and indexes of single authors by

Sanxay, Beck, Reiske, and

also availed himself of the labors of Vigerus,

Hoogeveen, Bos, Fischer, Matthias,

public, with the

general lexicons, from the smallest up to the voluminous one

In perusing these works,

constantly before him, he copied whatever might be of use

any part of the grammar, and thus accumulated a mass

which he was enabled

from a large number of the most pertinent examples that

has borrowed from other grammarians whatever answered his

would not be produced by an

preceding the Syntax required

than most of the others

bestowed on these, and

much pains have been

was adopted, because

favor the suffrages of nearly

but as the ancient division

those writings in which

of nouns into three

appeared most con-

%